JP2018012035A - Game system - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To perform control for reducing a possibility that a clerk of a Pachinko parlor performs misidentification even if a plurality of pieces of notification are set.SOLUTION: In notification of alarm setting based on line disconnection of a Pachinko machine (off state, line disconnection) after notification of alarm setting based on fraudulence (opening of a frame at night) to a CU 3 when a Pachinko machine 2 detects the fraudulence, cancellation setting for canceling alarm setting based on the opening of a frame at night is performed and notification by the alarm setting is stopped. After that, alarm setting based on line disconnection (off state, line disconnection) is performed and notification by the alarm setting is performed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 69

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming system that is communicably connected to a gaming machine represented by, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine.

  Conventionally, it is detected that a front member (for example, a glass door or a front frame) provided in an openable and closable manner on the frame of the gaming machine has been opened when the power is turned off, and based on that detection, there has been an opening when the power is turned on next time. It is known that the game hall side can grasp whether or not the front member has been opened illegally at night, for example (Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-142135 A

  When the front member of the gaming machine is illegally opened at night, the opening is detected and notified. On the other hand, notification is also made when it is detected that a line disconnection has occurred between the gaming machine and the gaming apparatus that are communicably connected to each other. However, when notifying that the gaming machine has been turned off and a line break has occurred while reporting the fraud of opening the night frame, the night frame is set to notify that the line break has occurred. The setting for notifying the unauthorized opening is continuously maintained. Therefore, even if the setting for notifying that the gaming machine is powered on and communication is restored and the line is disconnected is released, the notification continues because the setting for notifying the unauthorized opening of the night frame remains. Will be. In this case, the store clerk at the amusement hall may misunderstand that the line disconnection continues because the notification continues.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to control the possibility that a store clerk at a game arcade will misidentify even when a plurality of notifications are set. It is to be.

(1) The present invention is a gaming system comprising a gaming device that enables a game using a gaming value owned by a player, and a gaming machine that is communicably connected,
The gaming device is:
A notification setting means for performing notification setting including notification of fraud to the gaming machine and fraud notification setting for performing notification that communication with the gaming machine is impossible;
Notification means for performing notification based on the notification setting by the notification setting means;
Cancellation setting means for canceling the notification setting set by the notification setting means,
The gaming machine is
A request notification means for notifying a setting request for requesting the gaming device to perform the fraud notification setting and a release request for requesting the gaming device to cancel the fraud notification setting;
The release setting means includes
The unauthorized notification setting can be canceled when a cancellation request is notified from the gaming machine after the unauthorized notification setting is performed by the notification setting means in response to the notification of the setting request from the gaming machine. ,
After the unauthorized notification setting is performed by the notification setting means, it is possible to cancel the unauthorized notification setting by assuming that a release request has been notified when communication with the gaming machine is disabled.
(1-2) The present invention is a gaming device that is communicably connected to a gaming machine and enables a game using a player-owned gaming value,
A notification setting means for performing notification setting including notification of fraud to the gaming machine and fraud notification setting for performing notification that communication with the gaming machine is impossible;
Notification means for performing notification based on the notification setting by the notification setting means;
Cancellation setting means for canceling the notification setting set by the notification setting means,
The release setting means includes
A setting request from the gaming machine capable of notifying a setting request for requesting the gaming device to perform the fraud notification setting and a release request for requesting the gaming device to cancel the fraud notification setting. After the unauthorized notification setting is performed by the notification setting means in response to being notified, the unauthorized notification setting can be canceled when a release request is notified from the gaming machine,
After the unauthorized notification setting is performed by the notification setting means, it is possible to cancel the unauthorized notification setting by assuming that a release request has been notified when communication with the gaming machine is disabled.
(1-3) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (pachinko machine, slot) that is communicably connected to a gaming device (CU3, call lamp device, etc.) that enables gaming using the gaming value owned by the player. Machine, sealed circulation pachinko machine (P 2), slot machine without medal (S 2S)),
Fraud detection means (FIG. 2: glass door opening detection switch 12, front frame opening detection switch 13, etc.) for detecting fraud against the gaming machine;
Line disconnection detection means (FIG. 4: payout control unit 171 connected to the communication control IC of CU3) for detecting communication line disconnection between the gaming machine and the gaming device;
Notification setting means (alarm setting shown in FIG. 69 and FIG. 70) for setting the notification to notify the notification means based on at least one of the fraud detected by the fraud detection means and the communication line disconnection detected by the line disconnection detection means. When,
Release means for releasing the notification setting set by the notification setting means and stopping the notification by the notification means based on the notification setting (release of the alarm setting shown in FIGS. 69 and 70);
When the notification setting unit performs another notification setting while performing one notification setting, the release unit cancels the one notification setting and performs notification by the notification unit based on the one notification setting. The notification setting unit performs the other notification setting and causes the notification unit to notify (FIG. 69, FIG. 70: When the P stand 2 detects the fraud, the alarm setting based on the fraud (opening the night frame) is set in the CU3. After notifying, when notifying the alarm setting based on the P unit line disconnection (off state, line disconnection), cancel the alarm setting based on the nighttime frame release and stop the notification by the alarm setting. Alarm setting based on disconnection (off state, line disconnection).

  According to such a configuration, when the notification setting unit performs another notification setting, the release unit cancels the one notification setting, stops the notification by the notification unit based on the one notification setting, and then sets the notification setting. Since the means performs other notification settings and notifies the notification means, even if a plurality of notifications are set, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the store clerk at the game hall will misidentify.

(2) In (1) above,
When the fraud detected by the fraud detection unit continues even after the communication line is restored, the notification setting unit performs the notification setting again to notify the notification unit (FIG. 70: P platform 2 and CU3) When the open detection continues even after the disconnection is restored, communication between the P stand 2 and the CU 3 is started, and the alarm setting based on the opening of the night frame is notified from the P stand 2 to the CU 3 again.)

  According to such a configuration, even if the fraud detected by the fraud detection means continues after the communication line is restored, the store clerk at the amusement hall recognizes that the communication line has been restored, and It can be recognized that the fraud detected by the detection means continues.

(3) In (2) above,
The notification setting unit performs notification setting again after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the cancellation unit canceled the notification setting, and causes the notification unit to notify (the P stand 2 sets an alarm setting for line disconnection (disconnection)). After a predetermined period of time has passed since the release, the alarm setting for opening the night frame is made again and notified to CU3.)

  According to such a configuration, even when the time until the communication between the gaming machine and the gaming device is started after the communication line is restored is short, the notification setting is performed again after a predetermined period has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably recognize that the fraud detected by the fraud detection means is continuing while the store clerk at the amusement hall recognizes that the communication line has been restored.

(4) In the above (1) to (3),
A gaming machine (P 2 and S 2S) in which a game is played by a player,
Frames (outer frame 4 and front frame 5, main body frame 2aS);
A front member (glass door 6, front door 2bS) provided on the frame so as to be opened and closed;
Opening detection means for detecting the opening of the front member (glass door opening detection switch 12, front frame opening detection switch 13, front door opening detection switch),
A board (game board 26, board mounting board) detachably provided on the frame;
Panel connection detection means (a convex drawer connector 32, a concave drawer connector 33) for detecting electrical connection between the panel and the frame;
The panel connection detection means and the open detection means are connected in series, and a power line (loop-shaped power line 500) wired in a loop shape that supplies power from a backup power source during a power-off period, which is a period during which the power is off. )When,
It is operated by the backup power source during the power-off period and counts the number of detections of opening of the front member by the opening detection means and the number of detections of electrical disconnection between the panel and the frame by the panel connection detection means. Counting means (counting counter 120 including the CPU 10a operated by the backup power source of FIG. 64);
Output means (I / O port 10d) for outputting a count value in the power-off period in the counting means as a counting result;
The counting means is a cyclic counting means (FIG. 67 (c)) that counts from the initial value again after counting up to a predetermined upper limit value.
When the count value returns to the count value at the start time of the power-off by the counting process in the power-off period, the output means outputs a specific value indicating that as the count result (FIG. 63). A value (= 63) where the round flag shown in (b) is set is output.

  According to such a configuration, not only the opening of the front member can be detected, but also the electrical connection between the panel and the frame can be detected. After counting up to a predetermined upper limit value, counting from the initial value is performed again. By counting the number of detections of opening of the front member by the circulation type counting means and the number of times of detecting electrical disconnection between the board and the frame by the board connection detecting means, the storage area of the count value of the number of detection times is excessive. It can be suppressed so as not to become. In addition, when the count value returns to the count value at the start point of the power-off by the counting process in the power-off period, a specific value indicating that is output as the count result. The inconvenience that the numerical value goes around and the number of detection times is determined to be 0 can also be prevented. Also, even if an opening operation and a cutting operation are performed in which the counting range of the circulating counting means leaks and the count value of the counting means is intentionally made to circulate in accordance with the counting range, the determination of the opening is made accurately. Can be done.

(5) In the above (1) to (4),
Including first control means (main control part 161) and second control means (payout control part 171) communicating with each other;
At least one of the first control means and the second control means is:
A user program area capable of storing a user program (main control storage unit 161c, payout control storage unit 171c);
A communication control circuit (communication control circuits 161b, 171b) for transmitting predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit for storing the predetermined information (for example, a transmission data buffer 613 shown in FIG. 56, a data reception register 713 shown in FIG. 57, etc.);
Information transmitting means (encrypted communication control units 600 and 700) for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit in a predetermined manner (for example, an aspect such as encryption);
When the communication control circuit recovers from a communication disabled state (recovery function of the communication control circuits 161b and 171b), the communication control circuit executes a return process for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, and the return process The generation of the predetermined information by the execution of the user program is executed on the condition that the process is completed (S292 in FIG. 59: a flag indicating the completion of recovery is written in the recovery communication completion register 618 and the recovery request / completion register 718). Restart (S293 in FIG. 59: a signal for starting the processing of the user program is transmitted, or the processing of the user program stopped by the stopping unit is canceled and the processing of the user program is restarted).

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(6) In the above (1) to (4),
Including first control means (main control part 161) and second control means (payout control part 171) communicating with each other;
At least one of the first control means and the second control means is:
User program areas (main control storage unit 161c, payout control unit 171c) that can store user programs,
A communication control circuit (communication control circuits 161b, 171b) for transmitting predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit for storing the predetermined information (for example, a transmission data buffer 613 shown in FIG. 56, a data reception register 713 shown in FIG. 57, etc.);
Encryption means for encrypting information stored in the information storage unit (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuits 161b and 171b);
Encryption information transmission means (encrypted communication function of communication control circuits 161b and 171b) for transmitting the encrypted information encrypted by the encryption means,
At least one of the first control means and the second control means is a decryption means for decrypting the encrypted information transmitted by the other (for example, the communication control circuit 161b decrypts the information encrypted by the communication control circuit 161b). including.

  According to the above configuration, at least one of the first control unit and the second control unit encrypts the information stored in the information storage unit by the encryption unit of the communication control circuit and transmits the information transmitted by the other decryption unit. Since the information is decrypted, the processing of the encrypted communication performed between the first control means and the second control means can be reduced, and the contents of the encrypted information can be prevented from leaking and the security from being lowered. it can.

(7) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (P 2) that gives a predetermined gaming point when a winning occurs, and is connected to the gaming machine so as to be able to communicate with the gaming machine using the valuable value owned by the player. A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3) that enables the game of
The gaming machine is
Game point storage means for storing the game points (FIG. 6: game ball counter);
Count for counting the game points stored in the game point storage means based on an operation for counting the game points to a predetermined score (for example, pressing the “count” button shown in FIG. 15). Count request transmitting means for transmitting a request to the gaming device (FIG. 15: When there is a counting ball payout request at the start of counting, the P table 2 sends a status information response command including information of counting request = ON to CU3. To send to
The gaming device is:
Based on the counting request from the counting request transmission means, counting processing means for counting the gaming points to the possession points (FIG. 15: CU3 is requested when receiving a status information response including information of counting request = ON. The number of counting balls is added to the number of holding balls)
A recording medium receiving means (FIG. 1: a card insertion / ejecting port 309 for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a valuable value owned by a player;
Recording medium processing means (FIG. 15: CU3 is inserted into the card insertion / ejection slot 309) for processing the holding points counted by the counting processing means so as to be specified by the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving means. Memorize the number of balls in the card.),
Recording medium return means for returning the recording medium processed by the recording medium processing means (FIG. 15: CU3 returns a card storing the number of possessed balls);
Removal waiting state notification means for notifying the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium return means is waiting to be removed (FIG. 15: CU3 prepares for card return when card removal is possible) Information on status OFF and card waiting for card removal ON is sent to the P stand 2).

  According to the above configuration, the removal waiting state notification means notifies the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium return means is waiting for removal, so that the gaming machine removes the recording medium from the player. Can be notified, and forgetting to remove the recording medium can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to call attention to prevent theft caused by forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(8) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (P unit 2, S unit 2S) that gives a predetermined game point by the occurrence of a prize, and is connected to the gaming machine so as to be communicable. A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3) that enables gaming on the gaming machine using storage balls, number of gaming balls, cash, etc.,
The gaming device is:
Player specifying information reading means (card reader / writer) for reading player specifying information (C-ID (card ID) or the like) for specifying a player who performs a game;
Player identification information storage means for storing the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means (the CU control unit 323 stores the card ID read by the card reader / writer);
When starting a game, player identification information transmission control means for controlling to transmit the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means to the gaming machine (card ID is notified by card insertion notification in FIG. 9). Notification)
The gaming machine is
Storage means (FIG. 9: backup card ID) for storing player identification information transmitted under the control of the player identification information transmission control means;
When the game is finished, transmission control means for performing control to transmit the player specifying information stored in the storage means to the gaming device (FIG. 15: P table 2 is backed up by a card return response. Send C-ID)
Game point storage means for storing the game points (game ball counter in FIG. 6);
Conversion request transmitting means for transmitting a conversion request for converting the gaming point to the holding point to the gaming device based on an operation (counting) for converting the gaming point into a predetermined holding point (FIG. 15: P table 2 includes a count request = ON state information request is transmitted)
The gaming device is:
Based on the conversion request transmitted from the conversion request transmitting means, a conversion process for converting the gaming points into the holding points is executed (FIG. 15: the number of counting balls is added to the number of holding balls) and the conversion A conversion processing means for returning a conversion approval indicating that the request has been accepted to the gaming machine (FIG. 15: sending a count response = ON state information request);
Identical determination for determining whether or not the same player is specified by the player specifying information transmitted by the control of the transmission control means and the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storage means Further includes a means (FIG. 15: determination of coincidence between the C-ID stored on the CU3 side since the card insertion and the C-ID notified by the card return response).

  According to such a configuration, the game points are converted into points based on the conversion operation, and the same game is determined by the player specification information transmitted from the gaming machine and the player specification information stored at the start of the game. By determining whether or not the player is specified, it is possible to determine the identity between the information specifying the player at the start of the game and the information specifying the player at the end of the game. Further, it is possible to end the game based on the determination result, and it is possible to prevent the disadvantage that the game is ended by a player different from the player at the start of the game.

(9) The present invention is an information management device (for example, CU3, hallcon 900, call lamp) capable of communicating with a gaming machine capable of launching a game medium to a game area and playing a game,
A signal (for example, a status information response indicating the launch intensity) output from the gaming machine and a first area where the game medium is provided in the game area (for example, normal winning holes 272 to 274). , A signal (for example, a passing area) indicating that the winning winning opening 271, the starting winning opening 275 to 277, one of a plurality of areas including at least one of a normal symbol gate and a stage entrance is passed. Status information response) and a second area in which the game medium is provided in the gaming area (for example, at least one of a normal winning port 272-274, a big winning port 271, a starting winning port 275-277, a normal symbol gate, or a stage entrance) A signal indicating that the vehicle has passed through one of the plurality of regions including the first region and a region different from the first region (for example, a state indicating the passage region) And acquisition means for acquiring a broadcast response) and (S10 in FIG. 71),
Using the signal received by the acquisition means, at least one of the number and ratio of game media passing through the first area and at least one of the number and ratio of game media passing through the second area are each determined as the firing strength. A totaling unit (for example, S13 in FIG. 71) that performs a totaling process for totaling is provided.

  According to the above configuration, at least one of the number and ratio of game media passing through the first area and at least one of the number and ratio of game media passing through the second area are tabulated for each firing strength. Therefore, it is possible to grasp which area the game medium tends to pass according to the launch intensity (ease of passing through each area according to the launch intensity). In addition, when grasping | ascertaining the ease of passage of each area | region according to discharge | release intensity | strength, you may make it compare the frequency | count of a 1st area | region and the passage ratio of a 2nd area | region, for example.

It is a front view which shows a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the glass door and front frame of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows a mode before the game board is attached to a front frame, and after being attached. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process when abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in the card unit side and the pachinko machine side, and its transmission / reception. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response which are transmitted / received between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of power activation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a flowchart figure which shows the process at the time of insertion which a card unit performs when a card | curd is inserted in a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when lending a ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when paying out and carrying out the coins. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when counting game balls. It is a sequence diagram for demonstrating the counting process performed automatically when a game hall closes. It is a figure which shows an example of the count process when a player performs card return operation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection and the command of the status information request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection and the response of a status information response has not reached | attained from a pachinko machine to a card unit. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection and the response of a status information response has not reached | attained from a pachinko machine to a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the addition request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the response of the addition response from a pachinko machine to a card unit has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the response of the addition response from a pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the addition request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the response of the count response from a pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the count request | requirement from a pachinko machine to a card unit has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power failure and a communication line disconnection, and the response of the count response from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of a process at the time of the game ball addition result abnormality at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating operation | movement of P platform and CU regarding an addition serial number. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating operation | movement of P stand and CU regarding a count serial number. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a 1st and 2nd check process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a 3rd check process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a request serial number. It is a figure for demonstrating another example of the operation | movement regarding a request serial number. It is a figure for demonstrating the encryption key used for communication between a key management server and communication control IC. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response transmitted / received between CU control part 323 and security chip (SC) 325b. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response transmitted / received between CU control part 323 and security chip (SC) 325b. It is a figure for demonstrating the starting process at the time of power activation of CU control part 323, and hall installation. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of power activation and normal start-up of the CU control part. It is a figure for demonstrating the process at the time of the power activation of CU control part 323, and factory shipment. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of a board | substrate maker code. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of a board | substrate initial stage key or a board | substrate shipping key. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of board | substrate serial ID and a board | substrate authentication key. It is a figure for demonstrating the process in the case of inquiring about security board information. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of a board | substrate authentication key authentication abnormality sequence. It is a figure explaining the process of the inquiry timeout sequence of security board | substrate information. It is a figure explaining the process of the inquiry (collation) timeout sequence of gaming machine chip information. It is a figure explaining the process of the business message sequence between SC325b and communication control IC325b. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process of board | substrate authentication key authentication. It is an example of the flowchart for demonstrating the switching process of communication mode, (a) is a communication mode switching process between CU control part-SC, (b) is a communication mode switching process between SC-communication control IC. It is another example of the flowchart for demonstrating the switching process of communication mode, (a) is the communication mode switching process between CU control part-SC, (b) is the communication mode switching process between SC-communication control IC. is there. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the authentication operation | movement of the check of a unified store code. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the authentication operation | movement of a board maker code. It is a figure for demonstrating the process which cancels | releases a time limit operation function in the game system which concerns on this Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the process which validates a time limit operation function in the game system which concerns on this Embodiment. It is the schematic for demonstrating the communication performed between a main control part, the payout control part, and communication control IC. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with the payout control part. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with the main control part. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with communication control IC. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a recovery completion confirmation process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response which are transmitted / received between the main control part and the payout control part. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence between a main control part and a payout control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the game state notification from the main control part to the payout control part is unreached. It is a block diagram for demonstrating opening detection and connection detection of the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit of a count counter. It is a block diagram for demonstrating opening detection and connection detection of the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the storage state of the data memorize | stored in RAM, and the state from which a data signal is output according to the input of CS signal and CLK signal. It is a flowchart which shows the control operation of CPU of a count counter. It is a flowchart which shows the specific control content of the count display process by a payout control part. It is a figure for demonstrating the fraud detection alarm of P units at the time of a power supply ON / OFF. It is a figure for demonstrating the fraud detection alarm of P units at the time of a disconnection. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a total process. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed procedure of the correction | amendment process of discharge intensity. It is the figure which illustrated the relationship between the change of the firing intensity T, and a total interruption period. It is the figure (the 1) which illustrated the contents of total data obtained by the result of total processing. It is the figure (the 2) which illustrated the contents of the total data obtained as a result of total processing. It is the figure (the 3) which illustrated the content of the total data obtained by the result of a total process. It is the figure (the 4) which illustrated the content of the total data obtained by the result of a total process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a firing abnormality determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a driving | running | working area specific process. It is the figure which illustrated correspondence with a driving field and a firing intensity threshold range. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed procedure of threshold range setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a measurement process. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the system containing a hall control and a central management apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a summary tabulation process. It is the figure which illustrated the contents of summary tabulation data. It is the figure which illustrated the data memorize | stored in the internal memory of Hallcon by threshold range memory | storage process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a classification display process. It is the figure which illustrated model type data typically. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the front door of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission / reception aspect.

Embodiments according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
<Configuration of pachinko machine>
First, the configuration of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each amusement island (not shown) arranged in a plurality of game halls (halls), an enclosed circulation pachinko machine as an example of a game machine (hereinafter also abbreviated as a game machine, a pachinko machine, or a P machine). 2 is attached. A card unit (which may be abbreviated as CU hereinafter) 3 as an example of a gaming device is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the P table 2 at a side position on the predetermined side of the P table 2. Yes. Note that the card unit is taken as an example of the gaming apparatus according to the present embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a calling lamp device or the like.

  The P stand 2 encloses a pachinko ball as an example of a game medium inside, and when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the firing motor 18 (see FIG. 4) is driven to make one shot of the enclosing ball. The game board 26 is configured so that it can be played one by one in the game area 27 in front of the game board 26. Specifically, a touch sensor is provided around the batting operation handle 25, and the player's hand touches the touch sensor while the player is operating the batting operation handle 25, and the player's hand. Is detected by the touch sensor, and the firing motor 18 is driven. In this state, the hitting momentum is adjusted in accordance with the amount of rotation of the hitting operation handle 25 by the player, and the ball is shot into the game area 27.

  The firing strength of the pachinko ball (hereinafter simply referred to as the firing strength T) can be adjusted in accordance with the amount of rotation of the hitting ball operating handle 25 (hereinafter also simply referred to as the handle operating amount), and the handle operating amount is increased. The firing intensity T increases accordingly. Therefore, the player can adjust the firing strength T so that the pachinko ball passes through the region he / she aims by adjusting the handle operation amount.

  The P stand 2 shown in FIG. 1 is a so-called first type pachinko machine, and a variable display device (also referred to as a special symbol) 278 is provided in the center of the game area 27. In addition, the game area 27 is provided with a plurality of types of winning holes through which the inserted pachinko balls can be won. In the game area 27 shown in FIG. 1, one large winning opening (variable winning ball apparatus) 271, three normal winning holes 272, 273, 274 and three start winning holes 275, 276, 277 are shown. ing. In particular, the start winning opening 276 is configured by an electric tulip that can be changed between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player. .

  The variable display device 278 includes a variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (symbols), and based on the detection signals of the start winning balls won in each start winning opening 275, 276, 277. Start variable display of multiple types of identification information. When the display result of the variable display device is a combination of specific identification information (for example, a glance), a big hit state is established and the big prize opening 271 is opened.

  A probable winning prize opening 271 a is arranged in the big winning prize opening 271. When the pachinko ball that has won the big prize opening 271 also wins the probability change prize opening 271a, the probability that a big hit will occur after the end of the current big hit state is improved (hereinafter also referred to as a probability variation state or simply a probability change state). Will occur.

  Further, the display result of the variable display device 278 becomes a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of probability variation symbols such as 777) out of a combination of jackpot symbols (a slotted pattern), so that the probability variation big hit state And a probability variation state (probability variation state) in which the probability of occurrence of the jackpot is improved after the end of the jackpot state.

  Pachinko balls that have been driven into the game area 27 are won in any of the winning openings or are collected in the out opening 154 without winning. The pachinko balls won in any one of the winning openings and the pachinko balls collected in the out opening 154 are returned again to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path in the P stand 2. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is again shot into the game area 27.

  An indicator 54 is provided at a position below the game area 27 in the P stand 2. The display 54 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and displays various effect images linked to the display of the points, the remaining card amount, or the variable display device 278 to the player. The display 54 is formed integrally with the CU (card unit) 3 even if it is attached to the P base (pachinko machine) 2 independently of the CU (card unit) 3 as shown in FIG. (Pachinko machine) 2 may be configured to be fitted on the front surface. If the display 54 of the CU 3 is configured to be fitted to the front surface of the P base 2, the CU 3 and the P base 2 can be more strongly connected, so that fraud can be further prevented. In this case, fraud can be further prevented by preventing the connection and locking with the display 54 from being released unless the glass door 6 or the lower door provided with the hitting ball operating handle 25 is opened. .

  A 7-segment display 50 is provided below the display 54. The 7-segment display 50 includes a 7-segment LED display, and is controlled by a payout control unit 171 described later. The 7-segment display 50 displays the number of game balls to be described later, an error number of an error that has occurred, and the like.

  Further, a counting button 28 for counting from game balls to holding balls is provided at the left position of the hitting operation handle 25 on the P platform 2. In the present embodiment, the counting operation is repeatedly executed according to the time for which the counting button 28 is kept pressed. It should be noted that, regardless of the pressing duration time, if the button is pressed once, a predetermined number (for example, 100 balls) may be counted from the gaming ball to the holding ball, or the counting button 28 is pressed once. All of the game balls currently owned by the player may be counted regardless of the pressing time (regardless of whether the button is pressed for a long time). Further, the counting speed is further improved when a card return operation is performed, and a smooth card return process is realized.

  As described above, since the counting button 28 is provided on the P base (pachinko machine) 2 side, it is seated facing the P base 2 as compared with the case where the counting button 28 is provided on the CU (card unit) 3 side. Can improve the operability of the player. In addition, the P platform 2 is provided with speakers 270 for outputting music data to be reproduced in accordance with the effects displayed on the variable display device 278 at the upper right position and the upper left position of the game area 27. In addition, the position and the number of speakers are not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 1, and the position and the number may be changed as necessary.

  A game ball number display 29 for displaying the number of game balls is provided at the upper right of the counting button 28. The game ball number display 29 is a 7-segment display. The game ball number display 29 may be configured by a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, or other display.

  The P stand 2 according to the present embodiment can be divided into a game board 26 and other front frames (game frames) 5. In particular, the game board 26 is different for each model of pachinko machine developed by each company, while the front frame 5 is a common common frame regardless of the model. For this reason, it is sufficient for the game store to replace only the game board 26 when replacing a new stand.

<Configuration of card unit>
Next, the configuration of the CU 3 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This CU3 is a visitor card (also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to general players who have not registered as a member, or a member player who has registered as a member in the playground. A membership card, which is a game recording medium issued to, is accepted. Visitor cards and membership cards are composed of IC cards.

  The CU 3 that accepts these cards has a function of converting the game value (for example, the remaining card amount, the number of balls, or the number of balls, etc.) owned by the player specified by the record information of the card into “game ball data”. . In the P stand 2, a ball game corresponding to the number of balls specified by the data of the game balls is made possible. That is, “game ball data” is data indicating the number of remaining balls that can be fired. In the following description, “game ball data” is simply referred to as “game ball” in the same manner as a stored ball and a holding ball.

  On the front side of CU3, a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting bills, a protruding portion 305 formed to project forward from the front side of the device, a card insertion / discharge port 309 for inserting a membership card or a visitor card, etc. Is provided. A membership card or a visitor card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309 is received by a card reader / writer (not shown), and information recorded on the card is read.

  In the protrusion 305 described above, on the surface facing the player, the display unit 312 and the member card ID recorded on the member card when the member card is received (also simply referred to as a card ID or C-ID). ) And a replay button 319 for performing a replay game using the number of stored balls specified by the member card ID.

  The display 312 displays the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted game recording medium (card) (also referred to as the card balance or simply the balance), but can display the number of game balls and various other information. In addition, the surface is configured with a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display 312 with a finger.

  When the replay button 319 is operated, if the number of possessed balls acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, a part of the number of possessed balls is withdrawn and converted into a game ball, and the converted game ball is converted into a converted game ball. Based on this, it is possible to play a game with the P stand 2. On the other hand, if the inserted card is a membership card and the number of possession balls is not recorded and the storage ball is recorded in the hall management computer, etc., a part of the storage ball is withdrawn and becomes a game ball. It is converted and the game by P stand 2 becomes possible. That is, when both the stored ball and the holding ball are stored in association with the inserted card, the holding ball is withdrawn preferentially. Separately from the replay button 319, a dedicated ball payout button for withdrawing the holding ball may be provided, and the replay button 319 may be a button dedicated to the withdrawal of the stored ball.

  Here, the “storing ball” is a ball deposited in the hall with a ball acquired before the previous day, and becomes a game ball by paying out the saving ball. The storage ball is a game medium deposited in a game hall, and is generally managed by a hall management computer or other management computer installed in the game hall.

  “Mochitama” is a ball acquired on the day and becomes a game ball by paying out the possessionball. The number of possessed balls is the number of balls that the player possesses as a result of the player playing the game with the gaming machine on the card, and the number of balls that have not yet been deposited in the game hall. That is. Generally, the number of balls that the player has acquired on the day of the game hall is called “mochidama”, and the number of balls that the player has acquired before the previous day and that has been deposited in the amusement hall is “save ball”. Say.

  A “game ball” is a ball that can be fired by a gaming machine. As described above, the data on the number of game balls is generated in exchange for withdrawing the remaining amount of the prepaid card, holding balls, or storing balls.

  Note that the number of possessed balls may be managed by a management device for managing the number of possessed balls set in the game hall. In short, the difference between “sold balls” and “mochidama” is the number of balls that have been deposited in the amusement hall as a result of a storage operation for depositing in the amusement hall, or is still deposited in the amusement hall. It is a point whether it is the number of balls of the stage which is not.

  In this embodiment, the stored ball data is not recorded directly on the membership card, but stored in association with the membership card number on a server installed in a game hall such as a hall management computer, and the corresponding storage ball is searched based on the membership card number. It is configured to be able to. On the other hand, Mochitama records directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the hall server 801 in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, Mochitama is recorded directly on the visitor card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball may be stored in the hall server 801 in association with the card number. When the hall server 801 stores the card number in association with the card number, data that can specify the time stored in the hall server 801 may be written on the card (member card, visitor card) and discharged. Also, the prepaid balance is written directly on a card (member card, visitor card) and discharged.

  Note that the timing for storing the holding balls in a card (member card, visitor card) or hall server is stored at regular intervals every time the counting button 28 is operated and counting processing is performed, for example. It is conceivable that the timing is such that it is stored in a lump or when the card is returned.

  Also, when the player finishes the game and returns the card from CU3, the possession ball stored in CU3 is temporarily stored in the hall server 801 as a stored ball, and the day when the player receives the card return When the card is inserted into the same or another CU3 again on the same day, only the possession balls for the day that are once stored as accumulated balls are stored again in the CU3, and the game balls are added within the range of the possession balls. You may be able to do it.

  The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302 is taken in by a currency discriminator (not shown), and its authenticity and banknote type are identified.

  An IR (Infrared) photosensitive unit (also referred to as an IR light receiving unit) 320, a ball lending button (also referred to as a lending button) 321, and a card return button 322 are further provided on the front side of the CU 3. The IR photosensitive unit 320 is an IR photosensitive unit 320 that receives an infrared signal from a remote controller (not shown) possessed by an attendant at a game arcade, converts the infrared signal into an electronic signal, and outputs the electronic signal. The ball lending button 321 is a button for performing an operation (conversion operation to a game ball) for withdrawing the remaining amount recorded on the inserted card and using it for a game by the P stand 2. The card return button 322 is operated when the player ends the game, and the number of game balls determined at the end of the game on the inserted card (the number of balls at the time of card insertion−the number of conversions to game balls + count) This is an operation button for memorizing and discharging the number of possessed balls counted by the operation.

  Next, referring to FIG. 2, the P base 2 is opened and closed with respect to the frame-like outer frame 4 by a front frame (hereinafter also referred to as a cell) 5 and a glass door 6 with the left side edge as a swing center. It is provided as possible.

  A pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 6a and 6b are provided in the vicinity of the edge of the front frame 5 opposite to the center of swing (the free end side). The engaging protrusions 6a and 6b are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b are provided at positions facing the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b of the outer frame 4. When the front frame 5 in the open state is pressed against the outer frame 4, the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b get over the engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b, and the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b are moved downward by the urging force of the spring in the state of getting over. Move and become locked.

  Then, a clerk at the game hall inserts a key into the key hole 10 shown in FIG. 1 and performs an unlocking operation (for example, clockwise rotation), thereby a pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 6a against the urging force of the spring, 6b is pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement projections 6a and 6b are disengaged from the engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b to be unlocked, and the front frame 5 is released.

  Further, the front frame 5 is also provided with an engagement projection 8 for the glass door 6, and an engagement hole 9 is provided in the glass door 6 portion facing the engagement projection 8. The engagement protrusion 8 is pressed downward by a spring (not shown), and the engagement protrusion 8 is pushed up by the lower edge portion of the engagement hole 9 by pressing the opened glass door 6 against the front frame 5. By getting over, the engagement protrusion 8 is pushed down by the urging force of the spring, and the engagement protrusion 8 and the engagement hole 9 are engaged with each other to be locked. In this state, a game attendant inserts a key into the keyhole 10 shown in FIG. 1 and performs an unlocking operation (for example, counterclockwise rotation), whereby the engaging protrusion 8 is pulled up against the biasing force of the spring. Then, the engagement between the engagement protrusion 8 and the engagement hole 9 is released, and the lock door is released, and the glass door 6 is opened.

  A front frame open detection switch 13 is provided at a position in contact with the outer frame 4 in a lower part of the front frame 5 and it is detected that the front frame 5 is opened. Further, a glass door open detection switch 12 is provided in a contact portion with the glass door 6 in the upper part of the front frame 5, and the glass door open detection switch 12 detects that the glass door 6 has been opened.

  The number of opening times of the glass door opening detection switch 12 and the front frame opening detection switch 13 is counted by a counting counter 120 shown in FIG. The counting counter 120 is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, etc., and can be operated by a backup power source even when the power supply of the P stand 2 is interrupted, and detection of opening of the glass door 6 and the front frame 5 even when the power is turned off at night or the like. The count can be counted and the count value can be transmitted to the payout control unit 171. Here, the backup power source is, for example, a capacitor or a storage battery provided in the P base 2.

  A main control board 16 is provided on the back surface of the game board 26 (the surface opposite to the surface facing the glass door 6). Since the back surface of the outer frame 4 is closed, the main control board 16 becomes detachable from the game board 26 by first opening the front frame 5 and removing the game board 26 from the front frame 5. That is, in order to remove the main control board 16 from the game board 26 or replace the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16, it is necessary to open the front frame 5. The work can be detected without fail. Therefore, if the main control board 16 is illegally removed from the game board 26 or the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16 is illegally exchanged, the front frame opening detection switch 13 can always detect.

  Further, a payout control board 17 is provided on the back surface of the front frame 5. The payout control board 17 also needs to be removed from the back surface of the front frame 5 after first opening the front frame 5. Therefore, if the dispensing control board 17 is illegally removed from the back surface of the front frame 5 or the semiconductor chip provided on the dispensing control board 17 is illegally replaced, the front frame opening detection switch 13 can always detect.

  Next, the structure which installs the game board 26 in the front frame 5 is demonstrated. FIG. 3 is a view showing the game board 26 before and after being attached to the front frame 5. As shown in FIG. 3, attachment mechanisms 34a and 34b are provided on the back surface of the front frame 5 so as to be openable and closable around hinges 35a and 35b, respectively. The attachment mechanisms 34a and 34b have a U-shaped shape and have a bottom having a width corresponding to the game board 26. By pushing the game board 26 into the front frame 5 in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 3B, the game board 26 is fixed by the attachment mechanisms 34a and 34b as shown in FIG. 3A. When the game board 26 is fixed by the attachment mechanisms 34a and 34b, the convex drawer connector 32 provided on the game board 26 side is coupled to the concave drawer connector 33 provided on the front frame 5 side. Here, the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 are floating connectors having flexibility with respect to displacement.

  Further, when the game board 26 is installed in the front frame 5, the convex drawer connector 32 is coupled to the concave drawer connector 33, so that the main control board 16 on the game board 26 side and the payout control board on the front frame 5 side are combined. 17 is connected. Further, the game board 26 is fixed at a fixed position, and the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 have flexibility with respect to a certain degree of positional deviation, so the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer These can be coupled without being aware of the positional relationship with the connector 33. In addition, even if it is the structure which installs the game board 26 in the front frame 5 only by the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33, without providing the attachment mechanisms 34a and 34b, the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 are provided. Since they are flexible connectors themselves, they can be coupled without being aware of the positional relationship between the game board 26 and the front frame 5. Here, the convex drawer connector 32 is connected to the main control board 16 via an internal wiring (not shown) of the game board 26, and the concave drawer connector 33 is a payout shown in FIG. 2 via the signal cable 36. It is connected to the control board 17.

<Configuration of card unit and pachinko machine>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the CU 3 and the P stand 2. With reference to FIG. 4, the outline of the control circuit of CU3 and P stand 2 is demonstrated.

  The CU 3 is provided with a CU control unit 323 composed of a microcomputer or the like. The CU control unit 323 is a main control function unit of the CU 3, and includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, A RAM (Random Access Memory) functioning as a work area for the CPU, an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided.

  The CU control unit 323 is provided with an external communication unit (not shown) for communicating with a hall management computer and a hall server 801 (see FIG. 5) for security management. Connected to the CU control unit 323 is a security board (SC board) 325 for communicating with the payout control board 17 of the P table 2 while ensuring security. The security board 325 is a security monitoring function unit of the CU3. Note that the CU control unit 323 may be provided on the security board 325, or the CU control unit 323 may be provided on a board different from the security board 325. The CU 3 is provided with a connecting portion (not shown) to the P stand 2 side, and the P stand 2 is provided with a connecting portion (not shown) to the CU 3 side. These connection parts are constituted by connectors, for example.

  The security board 325 on the CU 3 side and the payout control board 17 on the P stand 2 side are communicably connected via this connector and connection wiring. The security board 325 is provided with a communication control IC 325a for controlling communication between the security board 325 and the payout control board 17, and a security chip (SC) 325b for monitoring the security of the P base 2. The SC 325b further includes a fraud detection unit 1325. The fraud detection unit 1325 performs fraud detection by monitoring the game ball addition request information notified from the CU control unit 323 to the P-unit 2, and manages the key when fraud is detected. The server 800 (see FIG. 5) is notified. Further, the setting value (constant) for fraud detection is notified from the key management server 800 as board control information.

  To the CU control unit 323, the authenticity and type of the banknote are identified by the above-described money identifier, and the identification result signal is input. In addition, when the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by an attendant at the game hall, a light reception signal is input to the CU control unit 323. The card reader / writer reads the information recorded in the inserted card into the CU control unit 323, and the read information is input to the CU control unit 323. The CU control unit 323 writes the information to the card reader / writer. When data is transmitted, the card reader / writer writes the data to the inserted card. The card recording information includes a card ID. The CU control unit 323 stores the card ID read by the card reader / writer until the game ends.

  The CU control unit 323 manages and stores the player's possession balls when the player is playing. Data such as the remaining amount or the number of game balls is output from the CU control unit 323 to the display control unit 350, and is converted into display data by the display control unit 350. The display data converted by the display control unit 350 is transmitted to the P base 2. The display data transmitted to the P platform 2 is input to the display 312 via the relay board 14. The display 312 displays an image corresponding to the display data. Further, when the player operates a touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323 via the display control unit 350. When the player operates the ball lending button 321, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323. The ball lending button 321 is not limited to the configuration provided in the CU 3, and may be configured so as to be provided in the P platform 2 and input an operation signal to the CU control unit 323. When the player operates the replay button 319, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323. When the player operates the card return button 322, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323.

  The P base 2 has a main control board 16 that controls the progress of the game of the P base 2, a payout control board 17 that manages and stores game balls, and a drive control of the launch motor 18 based on commands from the payout control board 17 A launch control board 31, a variable display device 278, and an effect control board 15 that controls the display of the variable display device 278 based on a command transmitted from the main control board 16.

  The main control board 16 and the effect control board 15 are provided on the game board 26. The main control board 16 is equipped with a game control microcomputer as the main control unit 161. The main control unit 161 is a main control function unit of the gaming machine. A microcomputer for gaming machine control includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (RAM that functions as a work area for the CPU). Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. The main controller 161 is connected to a winning sensor 162 and a radio wave sensor 163 provided on the game board 26.

  When a ball wins each start winning opening 275, 276, 277, the main control unit 161 draws a random number for determining a big hit (or further including a small hit) / off and stores the random number. This is called reserved storage. The maximum value of the number of reserved memories is, for example, 4. When the variable display device 278 is ready to start a new variable display, the main control unit 161 digests one reserved memory, makes a jackpot determination based on the reserved memory, and derives the display result from the variable start. The variable display time to reach is determined from multiple types. Further, when the big hit is determined, it is also determined whether or not the probability fluctuation is caused. The main control unit 161 transmits the result of the jackpot determination (including whether or not to change the probability) and information regarding the variable display time to the effect control unit 151 mounted on the effect control board 15 as commands.

  The variable display command transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the effect control unit 151 specifies a variable start command indicating the start of variable display, a display result command indicating the result of variable display (big hit / out), and a variable display pattern. A variable display time command that is possible, a variable stop command that indicates the timing for deriving and displaying a variable display result, and the like are included. Furthermore, the commands transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the production control unit 151 include a command that can identify the progress status of the big hit during the big hit, a command that indicates the occurrence of a new reserved memory, and the occurrence of an error in the gaming state. There are commands to show.

  The effect control unit 151 determines the variable display content of the variable display device 278 based on these commands transmitted from the main control unit 161. For example, the effect control unit 151 specifies a variable display result and a variable display time based on a command transmitted from the main control unit 161, determines a stop symbol, and a variable display pattern (reach presence / absence, reach type). In addition, the effect pattern of the notice effect related to the big hit or reach is determined. The effect control unit 151 controls display of the variable display device 278 according to the determined variable display content.

  The effect control board 15 is also connected to the display 54 via the relay board 14 on the front frame 5 side. The effect control unit 151 transmits a display control signal for variable display or the like to the variable display device 278 and transmits a display control signal for performing display in conjunction with the display of the variable display device 278 to the display unit 54. Is possible. The relay board 14 and the display 54 may be provided on the CU3 side. In this case, the effect control board 15 on the P stand 2 side is connected to the relay board 14 provided in the CU 3.

  The payout control board 17 is provided on the front frame 5. The payout control board 17 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer which is a payout control unit 171. The payout control unit 171 is a payout control function unit of the gaming machine. The payout control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  Further, a firing ball detection switch 903, an out ball detection switch 701, a foul ball detection switch 33A, a counting button 28, and a radio wave sensor 173 are provided on the payout control board 17 in an electrically connected state. The radio wave sensor 173 is for detecting an illegal act of illegally transmitting radio waves and mainly turning on the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. A detection signal of the radio wave sensor 173 is input to the payout control unit 171 via an input port (not shown) of the payout control board 17. The ball raising switch (upper) 41a detects the launch of a game ball by changing from on to off, and based on the detection, the payout control unit 171 subtracts “1” from the number of game balls.

  Accordingly, when the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is always turned on by an improper radio wave, the number of game balls is not subtracted no matter how many balls are fired. Such radio fraud is detected by the radio wave sensor 173.

  From main control board 16 to payout control board 17, main control chip ID, winning opening information, round information, connection confirmation signal, winning detection signal, starting winning opening winning information, error information, number of symbols determined, jackpot information, manufacturer specific Jackpot information is sent.

  The main control chip ID (also referred to as main chip ID) is a chip ID recorded on the main control board 16 of the P base 2 and is transmitted to the payout control board 17 when the power of the P base 2 is turned on. Information. The winning opening information is information including the type of winning opening (start winning opening, ordinary winning opening, large winning opening) and the number of winning balls (the number of balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the winning opening). This is transmitted to the payout control board 17 when the power of the table 2 is turned on. The round information is information on the number of rounds when a big hit is made, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17 when the power of the P unit 2 is turned on.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 is configured to control the operation on the condition that the payout control board 17 receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of a pachinko ball that has won a winning opening other than the starting winning opening. Upon receiving this detection signal, the payout control board 17 performs control to add the number of balls to be given to one winning ball to the number of game balls and the number of added balls.

  The start winning award winning information is information indicating that a pachinko ball has won a prize in any of the starting winning awards. The error information is information for notifying the payout control board 17 when an error occurs while the main control board 16 is performing game control.

  The symbol determination number of times is information on symbols determined as display results of the variable display device for winnings at each start winning opening.

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred. The breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each manufacturer and manufacturer-specific jackpot information indicating a manufacturer-specific jackpot. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine manufacturer, such as 15 round jackpots, and includes probability variation information when a probability change occurs with the jackpot. When the time-short state (control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the time-shortage information is included. The manufacturer-specific big hit is a big hit state that is adopted only by a certain gaming machine manufacturer, such as sudden probability change (surprise).

  A health check command and a winning ball number acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the main control board 16. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 16 is operating normally. The prize ball number acceptance command is a command indicating that the additional number of balls has been accepted.

  An out ball detection signal is input from the out ball detection switch 701 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 to which the out ball detection signal is input subtracts and updates the number of in-game balls (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27) as will be described later. In the payout control board 17 to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 33A, as will be described later, the addition ball number and the game ball number are added and updated, and the in-game ball number is subtracted and updated. A shot detection signal is input from the shot detection switch 903 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 to which the fired ball detection signal is input updates the number of in-game balls by subtraction.

  The security board 325 of the CU 3 and the payout control board 17 of the P stand 2 are electrically connected, and various commands are transmitted from the security board 325 to the payout control board 17 as described later. On the contrary, various responses are transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the security board 325 as described later.

  In addition to the payout control board 17, the front frame 5 is provided with a relay board 14, a launch control board 31, a launch motor 18, and a game ball number display 29. The game ball number indicator 29 may be directly attached to the front frame 5, but it may be attached to the front frame 5 like an upper plate or a lower plate provided on the front side of a normal pachinko machine from which balls are paid out. You may make it provide in the aspect which can be rotated. The same applies to the display 54. The payout control unit 171 of the payout control board 17 displays the number of game balls currently owned by the player on the game ball number display 29.

  A firing control signal and a firing permission signal are output from the dispensing control board 17 to the firing control board 31. Upon receiving this, the launch control board 31 outputs a signal for exciting the launch motor 18 of the launcher. Thereby, the pachinko ball is in a state where it is bullet-launched into the game area 27. The firing control board 31 emits a firing motor excitation output to drive the firing motor 18 when a touch ring input signal for detecting that the player is touching the hitting ball operating handle 25 is input.

  The launch intensity sensor 19 detects the launch intensity T of the pachinko ball by the launch motor 18. For example, the firing intensity sensor 19 detects, as the firing intensity T, a value obtained by converting an analog value output from a variable resistor configured to change the electrical resistance value according to the handle operation amount into a digital value. Hereinafter, as an example, it is assumed that the firing strength T varies from 0 (minimum value) to 99 (maximum value) according to the amount of steering operation. The detection result of the launch intensity sensor 19 is output to the payout control board 17 and the CU 3 via the launch control board 31.

  A display 54 is provided on the front frame 5. The display unit 54 receives display data (display control signal) from the display control unit 350 of the CU 3 via the relay board 14. Further, the display unit 54 receives display data (display control signal) from the effect control board 15 via the relay board 14.

  The relay board 14 outputs a display control signal from one of the effect control board 15 and the display control unit 350 to the display 54 and outputs the display control signal to the display 54 based on the display control signal from the effect control board 15 or the display control unit 350. A switching circuit 141 for displaying an image is mounted.

  In the present embodiment, the display 54 on the P stand 2 side is configured to be controlled on the CU side. Instead, the display 54 is controlled on the P stand 2 side. A display control substrate may be provided. In this case, the display control board controls display of the display 54 based on a command from the payout control unit 171.

  The RAM clear switch 293 is a switch for erasing game table information and game information stored in the RAM of the P table 2, and after the P table enters an error state, the store clerk operates the switch to initialize It becomes possible to return to the state. The RAM clear switch 293 is operated by a store clerk after the card is discharged, for example.

<Pachinko ball circulation route>
Here, with reference to FIG. 1 and FIG. 4, the circulation route of the pachinko ball in the P stand 2 will be outlined.

  When the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the firing motor 18 is driven. As a result, one pachinko ball that has been supplied to the launch position is shot by the hitting hammer and the pachinko ball is driven into the game area 27.

  The detection of the play of the game ball is detected when the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is changed from on to off. This detection is detected by a port input on the payout control board 17 (see FIG. 4) on which the payout control unit 171 is provided. Based on the detection, the payout control unit 171 subtracts “1” from the number of game balls. To do.

  Out of balls that have been driven into the game area 27, the out balls that have entered the out port 154 (see FIG. 1) flow down the out ball flow path and are detected by an out ball detection switch 701 provided in the middle. . The foul balls flow down through the foul ball return path and are detected by a foul ball detection switch 33A provided in the middle of the foul balls.

  All winning balls that have won the winning opening and the variable winning ball device are collected on the back of the gaming machine and guided to the collection ball passing path. Similarly, out balls and foul balls are also guided to the collection ball passing path. A firing ball detection switch 903 is provided in the collection ball passage route. For this reason, the winning ball, the out ball, and the foul ball are all detected by the firing ball detection switch 903. That is, the fired ball detection switch 903 is a switch that detects all of the bullets that have been bulleted. When the number detected by the switch and the number of shots of the pachinko balls shot by the firing motor 18 become equal, it can be determined that all the pachinko balls that have been driven are collected.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the difference between the number of shots detected by the shot ball detection switch 903 and the number of bullets is calculated. When this difference is not zero, the balls that have been driven into the game area 27 have not been collected. It is determined that it is not. By making this determination, it can be determined whether the game area 27 is rolling, or whether there is a floating ball that does not fall due to being caught between nails or the like in the game area.

<Notification process for abnormalities in card units and pachinko machines>
FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a notification process when an abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication.

  Referring to FIG. 5, when an abnormality occurs in CU control unit 323, security board 325, payout control unit 171, or main control board 16, notification is given in the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. For the abnormality mentioned here, the CU control unit 323, the security board 325, the payout control unit 171, or the main control board 16 is replaced with another illegally manufactured one, or malfunction or failure occurs due to noise or the like. Or offline status due to disconnection or the like. The key management server 800 shown in FIG. 5 is a key management server that stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with each serial ID (also referred to as SID) of the electronic component inside the CU 3. is there. The key management server 800 is a server that can communicate with the main control board 16.

  First, when an abnormality occurs in the security board 325 of the CU 3, the CU control part 323 detects the abnormality as a result of the mutual authentication performed between the CU control part 323 and the security board 325 described above. This mutual authentication includes device authentication using a session key in addition to serial ID authentication and device authentication described later.

  The serial ID is a serial ID (substrate serial ID) of the security board 325, and is stored in the ROM of the security chip 325b when the security chip 325b of the security board 325 is manufactured. Further, when the CU 3 is brought into the amusement hall and connected to the hall server 801, the board serial ID is downloaded from the key management server 800 of the key management center via the hall server 801 and stored in the CU control unit 323. The

  When the CU control unit 323 detects an abnormality in the security board 325, the CU control unit 323 notifies the hall server 801 to that effect and transmits an abnormality notification command to the display control unit 350 of the CU3. The CU control unit 323 controls the display 312 to display that an abnormality has occurred and causes the display control unit 350 to perform an abnormality notification by lighting or blinking an abnormality notification lamp (not shown). Further, the CU control unit 323 transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred from the external communication unit to the hall management computer.

  When an abnormality occurs in the CU control unit 323 of the CU 3, the security board 325 detects the occurrence of the abnormality by the above-described mutual authentication, and notifies the payout control unit 171 of a signal indicating that (an abnormality notification signal). In response, the payout control unit 171 notifies the main control board 16 that an abnormality has occurred. As described above, the main control board 16 performs control to operate the abnormality notification lamp and transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer.

  When the security board 325 detects an abnormality of the payout control unit 171, the CU control unit 323 is notified of this, and the CU control unit 323 notifies the hall server 801 accordingly.

  As described above, when the security board 325 detects an abnormality of the CU control unit 323, the security board 325 notifies the payout control unit 171 of the fact. When detecting an abnormality of the payout control unit 171, the security board 325 notifies the CU control unit 323 of the fact. The notification destination of abnormality occurrence by the security board 325 is different. The reason for this is that even if the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred is notified that an abnormality has occurred, no abnormality notification control is performed and no abnormality prevention measure is provided. In addition, the security board 325 has a communication control function but does not have an abnormality notification control function. Therefore, the abnormality notification cannot be controlled by itself, and for this reason, notification is made that an abnormality has occurred in the direction of the control unit opposite to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The payout control unit 171 that has received the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality from the security board 325 notifies the main control board 16 to that effect. Upon receiving the notification, the main control board 16 performs the same control for abnormality notification as described above.

  When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171, the security board 325 detects that fact and notifies the CU control unit 323 that the abnormality has occurred. The CU control unit 323 performs the above-described abnormality notification control. The hall server 801 is notified that an abnormality has occurred. When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171, it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the main control board 16, and upon receiving the notification, the above-described abnormality notification control is performed.

  As described above, the payout control board 17 detects and notifies the abnormality to the main control board 16 when an abnormality occurs in the security board 325, while notifies the abnormality to the main control board 16. It detects and notifies the security board 325 that an abnormality has occurred. As with the security board 325 described above, the payout control board 17 is also controlled for anomaly notification even when a notice is given to the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, a notification is sent to the control unit or control board on the opposite side of the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The security board 325 and the payout control board 17 are not connected to an abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and have a function of performing abnormality notification control themselves even when an abnormality is detected. Absent. In the above description, the security board 325 and the payout control board 17 are not connected to an abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and perform abnormality notification control themselves even when an abnormality is detected. Although described as having no function, the security board 325 and the payout control board 17 may be provided with an abnormality notification function to directly notify that an abnormality has occurred.

<Transmission / reception mode between card unit side and pachinko machine side>
Next, FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing main data among various data stored on each of the CU 3 side and the P stand 2 side and its transmission / reception mode. With reference to FIG. 6, main data of various data stored on each of the CU (card unit) 3 side and the P stand (pachinko machine) 2 side and its transmission / reception mode will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the fluctuation of the number of game balls is calculated on the P stand 2 side, and the current latest game ball number is stored and managed. The current number of game balls is also calculated and stored on the CU 3 side, but the number of game balls is based on information transmitted from the P stand 2 side. On the other hand, the CU3 side manages and stores the number of possessed balls (the number of cards possessed), the number of stored balls, and the remaining card amount (remaining amount).

  FIG. 6 shows RAM storage data provided in the CU control unit 323 on the CU 3 side and RAM storage data mounted on the payout control board 17 on the P base 2 side. First, when the power supply is started up in a state where the P unit (pachinko machine) 2 and the CU (card unit) 3 are electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the amusement hall, the payout control board 17 on the P table 2 side. Receives the main chip ID (main control chip ID) from the main control board 16, transmits the main chip ID to the CU3 side, and also issues the payout chip ID (payout control) stored in the payout control board 17 itself. Chip ID) is transmitted to the CU3 side.

  On the CU3 side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, data of the connection time, that is, the time at which communication is started after the CU 3 side and the P base 2 side are connected is transmitted from the CU 3 side to the P base 2 side, and the transmitted connection time is transmitted on the P base 2 side. Remember.

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU3 side are stored on the CU3 side and the P stand 2 side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side.

  On the CU 3 side, the transmitted data is collated with the data already stored, and it is determined whether or not the same P base 2 is connected as in the previous time. As for the connection time data, every time the power is turned on, new connection time data in which communication between the CU 3 side and the P base 2 side is started is transmitted from the CU 3 side to the P base 2 side. Time data is stored on the P table 2 side.

  Both the CU and the P platform transmit the “sequential number” added to the message. Further, both the CU and the P platform store the “serial number” received from the other party. There are three types of “serial number”: “normal serial number”, “additional serial number”, and “counting serial number”. “Normal sequence number” indicates the sequence number of the message. “Normal serial number” is transmitted by counting up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission on the CU3 side (primary station side) with an initial value “1”. However, the “normal serial number” is not counted up at the time of retransmission. P station 2 side (secondary station side) transmits the received serial number as it is. Note that there is no response if the serial number continuity is not established. The “additional serial number” is a serial number used when the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to add game balls. The “counting serial number” is a serial number used when the P stand 2 requests the CU 3 to count game balls.

  Only the CU3 has the right to update the normal serial number. When the normal serial number that is the same as the transmitted normal serial number is returned, the CU 3 backs up and stores the normal serial number and transmits the updated normal serial number. Only the CU3 has the addition update right of the addition serial number. When the addition request is made, the CU 3 transmits an addition sequence number added to the addition sequence number that has been used for communication until then to the P unit 2. The P platform 2 returns the same addition serial number when accepting the request. When rejecting the request, the previously received addition sequence number (the addition sequence number received this time-1) is returned. Only the P-unit 2 has the counting update number addition update right. When making a request for counting, the P platform 2 transmits to the CU 3 a counting sequence number that is +1 to the counting sequence number that has been used for communication. When CU3 accepts the request, it returns the same counting sequence number. When rejecting the request, the received counting sequence number (counting sequence number-1 received this time) is returned.

  In the following, with regard to “normal serial number”, a configuration will be described in which the serial number received by the CU 3 at the time of transmission is counted up (+1) and transmitted. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. Each of the P base 2 and the CU 3 or the serial number received by the P base 2 at the time of transmission is counted up (+1), and the other is the received serial number. May be transmitted as it is.

  The “addition serial number” and “counting serial number” are special serial numbers that are counted up in the addition request processing and the count request processing, respectively. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a configuration in which “normal serial number” is also counted up when the “additional serial number” and “counting serial number” are counted up. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and may be configured to stop the “normal sequence number” from being counted up when the “additional sequence number” and the “counting sequence number” are counted up. In the following, “normal serial number” is simply referred to as “serial number”. The “additional sequence number” and “counting sequence number” are also collectively referred to as “request sequence number”.

  The latest game machine information (game machine information being counted) is transmitted from the P machine 2 side to the CU 3 side. This latest game table information is stored in the latest game table information storage area of the RAM of the payout control unit 171 (see FIG. 4) on the P table 2 side. Specifically, information on the added ball number counter, information on the subtracted ball number counter, and information on the counted ball number counter are included. The number of game balls is not included in the latest game table information, and is transmitted from the P table 2 side to the CU 3 side as the count value of the game ball number counter as will be described later. However, instead of this, or in addition to the game ball counter, the number of game balls may be included in the latest game table information.

  Information on these counters is collectively transmitted to the CU side as a response. The added ball number counter is a counter that counts the added ball number. The added ball is the sum of “the number of winning balls × the number of winning balls” and “the number of back balls”. The back ball is a foul ball. That is, the addition ball indicates the number that the addition ball counter should add to the game ball. The subtraction ball number counter is a counter that counts the number of subtraction balls. The subtraction ball is the “number of fired balls”. That is, the number of balls detected by the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. Note that the “number of balls to be subtracted” does not include the “number of balls to be counted”. The counting ball counter is a counter that counts the counting balls. The counting ball is “the number of balls converted from game balls to holding balls by the counting operation”. Here, the “prize ball” is a ball that is paid out when a ball wins a winning opening, and is a safe ball. The “fired ball” is a ball fired by the gaming machine. When there is a back ball, the number of balls obtained by subtracting the back ball is the number of fired balls. The “back ball” is a ball in which the fired ball returns without jumping onto the board surface. The “out mouth passing ball” is a ball that has passed through the out mouth 154, and the total number of balls of the out ball and the safe ball means the number of balls passing through the out mouth.

  For example, when a pachinko ball that has been placed in the game area 27 wins and the winning information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17, an additional ball to which a gaming ball is added based on the winning information. The added ball number counter counts the number, and the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number) is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side. Also, the subtraction ball counter counts the number of shot balls as the number of subtraction balls based on the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a due to the pachinko ball being shot in the game area 27, The value of the subtraction ball number counter (subtraction ball number) is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU3 side.

  Alternatively, the payout control unit 171 counts the number of gaming balls as the number of counting balls by pressing the counting button 28, and transmits the value of the counting ball number counter (counting number of balls) from the P stand 2 side to the CU3 side.

  On the P-unit 2 side, each time the values of the addition ball counter, the subtraction ball counter, and the counting ball counter are transmitted to the CU 3 side, the count values are stored in the previous gaming machine information storage area (the RAM of the payout control unit 171). Etc.) are stored (rewritten) as backup data, and the values of the added ball counter, subtracted ball counter, and counted ball counter as the latest game table information are cleared to 0 (excluding the game ball counter). In the present embodiment, “clear” has the same meaning as “initialization”.

  As a result, the game table information transmitted to the CU 3 side immediately before is added to the storage area of the previous game table information (game table information transmitted immediately before). Stored as data. When the latest game machine information is not transmitted from the P machine 2 side to the CU 3 side, the backup data includes not only the value of each counter at the time of the next transmission but also the value of each counter of the previous time that was not transmitted. It is intended to enable transmission. You may make it memorize | store by adding the number of game balls transmitted immediately before to this last game machine information.

  Further, the payout control board 17 updates the value of the game ball counter in response to the occurrence of a prize, the firing of a ball, the occurrence of a back ball, and the occurrence of a counting ball (conversion from a game ball to a holding ball), The updated value of the game ball counter is transmitted to the CU 3 side as the number of game balls.

  On the CU3 side, the number of game balls, the number of cards held (simply referred to as the number of balls), the number of balls stored, the remaining amount, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), total subtraction are stored in the cumulative data storage area in the RAM. The number of balls (the total number of subtracted balls) and the number of balls at the time of card insertion are stored. The number of cards possessed is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of possessed balls paid out (the number of balls converted from the number of cards possessed to the number of game balls) from the number of balls possessed when the card is inserted, and adding the counted number of balls. That is, the card possession number is the number of possession possessed by the player at the present time.

  The total number of added balls is added based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number) transmitted from the P stand 2 side to update the number of balls. Further, the number of balls is updated by subtracting the total number of subtraction balls based on the value of the subtraction ball counter (the number of subtraction balls) transmitted from the P stand 2 side. Further, based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P stand 2, the number of card holding balls is added and updated. In this way, the CU 3 can manage the latest information by updating the total added ball number, the total subtracted ball number, and the card holding ball number with the latest game table information transmitted from the P table 2 one by one. It becomes possible.

  As shown in the figure, the CU 3 has an area for storing game balls, and also receives a count value of a game ball number counter (also referred to as game ball number or game ball total number information) from the P stand 2 side. CU3 updates the area for storing game balls in the following procedure. That is, the CU 3 stores the value based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number), the value of the subtracted ball number counter (subtracted ball number), and the value of the counted ball number counter transmitted from the P side. The number of game balls being updated is updated, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P platform side at the same timing matches the updated number of game balls. If they match, the game is allowed to continue, but if they do not match, control to shift to an error state is performed.

  As a result, for example, an error notification lamp or indicator 312 is used to notify an error, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or hall server 801 (in this case, hall management). An error notification may be performed by a computer or hall server 801). As a result, a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by a staff member is performed.

  Instead of shifting to an error state and stopping the game, the number of game balls stored on the CU 3 side may be replaced with the count value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P unit 2 side. Good. Alternatively, it may be corrected to an average value of the number of game balls managed on the CU 3 side and the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2 side.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the CU 3 side, but it is determined whether or not the number of game balls matches the number of game balls managed and stored on the P-unit 2 side. (CU3 side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2 side does not match the number of game balls stored on the CU 3 side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, the determination function is provided on the CU3 side. For example, the number of game balls stored on the CU3 side and the Pball 2 side are stored by the hall server 801 or the hall management computer connected to the CU3. The number of game balls being played may be received, and it may be determined whether or not the two match.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the CU 3 stores a storage area for storing the number of cards held and the number of stored balls, a storage area for storing the remaining card amount of the received (inserted) card, and the total number of added balls (the number of added balls). (Cumulative total), the total number of subtracted balls (total number of subtracted balls), and a storage area for storing balls when the card is inserted. The CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 4) stores a stored ball in response to an input requesting the use of the stored ball (for example, a press input of the replay button 319 provided on the CU 3 (when there is no holding ball)). Subtract a certain number of balls from the area.

  The CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 4) is an input requesting the use of the holding ball (for example, pressing input of the replay button 319 provided on the CU 3 when the holding ball is present (however, when the holding ball is present)) Accordingly, a predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area for storing balls. Furthermore, the CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 4) subtracts a predetermined value from a storage area for storing the card remaining amount in response to an input requesting use of the card remaining amount (for example, pressing input of the ball lending button 321).

  When a player performs an operation to deduct the value from the player's own gaming value (for example, the prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls) and use it for the game, the number of balls that are deducted The number of balls to be added to the counter is transmitted from the CU 3 side to the P stand 2 side. In response to this, the P stand 2 side adds and updates the game ball counter.

  In the gaming system according to the present embodiment, on the other hand, it is possible to accept a so-called wagon service order in which the gaming value owned by the player is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like. However, access to wagon services with game balls is restricted, and wagon services can only be received with holding balls. This is an image of prohibiting the use of the ball before counting remaining in the dish by hand and using it for the wagon service in the conventional enclosed circulation pachinko machine in which each counter is provided.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, when the operation for performing the wagon service is executed, if the number of balls is less than the number corresponding to the desired menu of the wagon service, the player is prompted to perform the counting operation. Has been. When the player performs a counting operation at that time, the number of counting balls based on the operation is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side. In response to this, the CU3 side subtracts the number of game balls and adds and updates the number of card possessions.

<Frame configuration used in communication>
Next, communication between the CU 3 and the P base 2 according to the present embodiment will be described in more detail. A message used in the communication is composed of a frame having a predetermined format. Transmission data (message) is always transmitted in units of one frame. That is, the divided transmission of the message is not performed. Moreover, when transmitting a message | telegram continuously, the space | interval of 1 millisecond or more is opened.

  One frame of transmission data includes a data length, a normal sequence number, an addition sequence number, a counting sequence number, a command, and a data portion. “Data length” indicates the data length of the transmission data (serial number to data portion (business message range)). “Command” is a command code of the message. The “data part” is data of a message.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the CU and the P platform>
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the outline of the command and response transmitted / received between CU (card unit) 3 and P stand (pachinko machine) 2 is demonstrated.

  FIG. 7 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

<< 1. Recovery request, 2. Recovery response >>
First, a command named recovery request is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. This recovery request command is for requesting recovery information from the P unit 2. In response to this recovery request, a response named recovery response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. This response of the recovery response notifies the CU 3 of the recovery information.

  The recovery request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2 after the CU 3 completes the authentication. The recovery request command requests recovery information from the CU 3 to the P unit 2, and the CU 3 transmits the command first after the authentication is completed. The recovery request includes “serial number”, “command”, “previous last transmission serial number”, “previous final transmission count serial number”, “store code”, and “SC board ID”. “Serial number” is a sequence number (1 to 255). “Command” is a command code for the recovery request, and is represented by binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  The “last last transmission sequence number” is the sequence number of the command for requesting the state information last transmitted to the P unit 2 at the time of the previous connection. When “Previous Last Transmission Sequence Number” is “0”, this indicates a state where there is no stored sequence number. The “previous last transmission serial number” is a serial number that stores the “sequential number” as the last final transmission serial number (serial number) when the status information response is received at the CU3 and when the status information response is received at the CU3. It is.

  “Previous last transmission count sequence number” is a count sequence number of a response to the status information request last transmitted to the P unit 2 at the previous connection. “Last transmission count sequence number” indicates that there is no stored sequence number when “0”. The “previous last transmission count sequence number” is a sequence number that stores the count sequence number as the previous last transmission count sequence number on the P unit 2 and the CU 3 side when receiving the status information response to the CU 3 when the P unit 2 transmits the status information response. .

  In the recovery process (number of balls) of the P base 2, the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P base 2 Is matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. If they do not match, the count request ball count = 0 is set in the subtraction register and notified to the user program.

  The P stand 2 refers to the “previous last transmission count sequence number” notified from the CU 3 and sets the count request ball count = 0 to the subtraction register when the CU 3 has not performed the count process for the count request. The user program executed on the P platform 2 is notified. If CU3 has already performed the counting process, the count request ball number notified to CU3 is set in the subtraction register and notified to the user program. When all the store codes held by the P platform 2 are “F” (hexadecimal), it is determined that the store codes match. When the “store code” notified from the security board 325 and the “store code” held by the P platform 2 do not match, the user program side is notified of the store code mismatch via the register.

  The response of the recovery response is a response to the recovery information held in the P base 2 with respect to the CU 3. Recovery information includes “sequential number”, “command”, “previous last transmission serial number”, “last inserted card ID”, “previous card insertion time”, “previous last transmission addition serial number”, “game information storage presence / absence”, “ “Previous Game Table Information” and “Previous Game Information” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  “Previous last transmission serial number” is data of a serial number included in the response of the status information response last transmitted to the CU 3 at the previous connection, and when “0”, there is no stored serial number. “Previously inserted card ID” is data of the card ID of the card that was being inserted at the previous connection, and “0” indicates that there is no inserted card. The payout control unit 171 of the P table 2 stores and holds the card ID that was being inserted based on the information transmitted from the CU 3.

  “Previous card insertion time” is data on the insertion time of a card that was being inserted at the time of the previous connection. When “0”, there is no inserted card. This data is also represented by year information as 2 digits YY, month information as 2 digits MM, day information as 2 digits DD, time information as 2 digits hh, minute information as 2 digits mm, and second information as 2 digits ss. It is. The “previous last transmission addition serial number” is an addition serial number included in the response of the status information response last transmitted to the CU 3 at the previous connection, and when “0”, there is no additional serial number. “Game information storage presence / absence” is “0x00” when game information is not stored, and “0x01” when game information is stored.

  The “previous gaming machine information” is gaming machine information previously notified to the CU 3 and includes information on “number of gaming balls”, “game ball information”, “counting requesting balls”, and “counting serial number”. The “number of game balls” is the number of game balls notified to the CU 3 last time. “Game ball information” is the game ball information notified last time. The game ball information is, for example, information such as the number of fired balls previously notified to the CU 3, the number of balls passing through the outlet, and the total number of prize balls. The “count required ball number” is the number of game balls requested to be counted. “Counting sequence number” is the counting sequence number notified to the CU 3 last time.

  The “previous game information” is the game information previously notified to the CU 3, and includes information on “number of game information” and “game information 1” to “game information n”. The “number of game information” is the number (0 to n) of game information notified to the CU 3 last time. Note that n = 0 to 22 and the length is variable. “Game information 1” is the game information 1 notified to the CU 3 last time. “Game information n” is the game information n previously notified to the CU 3. The game information n includes, for example, the type information notified to the CU 3 last time, game prize ball information, and the like.

  The “previous last transmission addition serial number” is a serial number that is stored as the last final transmission addition serial number on the CU 3 side and the P base 2 when the state information request is received at the CU 3 and when the status information request is received at the P base 2.

  In the recovery process (game information) of the P table 2, the “store code” and “SC substrate ID” notified from the security board 325, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P table 2 If the “store code” does not match, it is processed as no recovery data. If they match, the following processing is performed.

  When there is recovery data of gaming information, “gaming information storage presence / absence” is stored: set to 0x01, and recovery data held by the P table 2 is set in “previous gaming machine information” and “previous gaming information”. When there is no recovery data of game information or when the last transmission sequence number is 0, “game information storage presence / absence” is set to “0x00” without storage, and “previous game machine information” and “previous game information” are set to ALL “0”. set. However, the number of game balls notified last time is set as the number of game balls. When all the store codes held by the P platform 2 are “F” (hexadecimal), it is determined that the store codes match.

  In addition, when the process of the “last previous transmission serial number” notified from the P table 2 is not performed, the CU 3 performs the recovery process using the previous game machine information. If the “last previous transmission serial number” process is being performed, the CU 3 performs the recovery process using only the previous game machine information. However, the number of balls is not recovered.

  In addition, when recovery processing cannot be performed due to a mismatch of communication partners (for example, replacement of the CU 3 or the P unit 2), it may be possible to manually correct by POS based on the display information of the P unit 2. For example, it is conceivable that the display information of the P base 2 is displayed using the liquid crystal display screen of the variable display device 278. Alternatively, it is also conceivable that a display device controlled by the payout control unit 171 is further provided on the P table 2 and information for manual correction is displayed on the display device. Note that POS refers to a free gift management system for exchanging free gifts and managing free gifts. In addition, POS is not limited to those for exchanging prizes or managing prizes, but records general sales information for each sale of merchandise at a store and uses the aggregated results as inventory management or marketing materials. It may be management (Point Of Sales system).

<< 3. Recovery request 2, 4. Recovery response 2 >>
A command named recovery request 2 is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. The command of the recovery request 2 notifies the added recovery information to the P unit 2. In response to this recovery request 2, a response named recovery response 2 is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. This response of the recovery response 2 notifies the CU 3 of the processing result of the added recovery information.

  The command of the recovery request 2 is to notify the additional recovery information to the P unit 2 and includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “previous last transmission additional serial number”, and “additional number of balls”. Yes. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. The recovery request 2 is transmitted when the CU 3 determines that it is necessary to perform the additional ball recovery process in the P stand 2. The CU 3 compares the “previous last transmission addition serial number” included in the recovery response received from the P unit 2 with the “previous final transmission addition serial number” stored in the CU 3, and if they match, the additional ball recovery is performed. It is determined that processing is not necessary, and in the case of mismatch, it is determined that addition ball recovery processing is necessary. When it is determined that addition ball recovery processing is necessary, a recovery request 2 is transmitted.

  The “last last transmission addition serial number” included in the recovery request 2 is data of the addition serial number of the command of the status information request last transmitted to the P unit 2 at the previous connection, and the “addition ball number” is the game ball This is data on the number of balls added.

  Next, the recovery process of the P base 2 will be described in detail. The recovery process of the P unit 2 is based on the recovery request 2 and, if the “last previous transmission serial number” process notified from the CU 3 has not been performed, This is a process of performing addition.

  The response of the recovery response 2 is for notifying the CU 3 of the processing result of the added recovery information at the P unit 2 and includes “serial number”, “command”, and “recovery result”. The “recovery result” is a recovery result process OK when “0x00”, and a recovery result process NG when “0x01”. In addition, when the P stand 2 is in a state where the number of additional balls cannot be received, a process NG is returned as a recovery result.

  When performing the recovery process (additional number of balls) of the P unit 2, if the P unit 2 has not performed the process of the “last previous transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3, the process OK is processed as a “recovery result” to the CU3. , The number of balls to be added notified from CU3 is set in the addition register and notified to the user program. However, if the game table state 1 responds with the game ball addition result (Bit5 = 1) in the state information response when the CU state of the state information request to be described later is a game ball addition request (Bit = 1), the “recovery” is sent to the CU3. Processing NG is returned as a “result”, and the number of balls to be added = 0 is set in the addition register and notified to the user program.

  When the “previous last transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU 3 is the same as the “previous final transmission addition serial number” held by the chip of the P unit 2, the number of balls to be added = 0 is set in the addition register, The user program is notified, and processing NG is returned as a “recovery result” to CU3.

  In addition, at the timing when the recovery process is completed (for example, when the recovery completion flag is set), the “previous last transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU 3 is notified to the user program via the register regardless of the recovery result. . When the recovery request 2 is not received, the “previous last transmission addition serial number” held by the chip of the P base 2 is notified to the user program at the timing when the recovery process is completed.

<< 5. 5. Communication start request, Communication start response >>
A communication start request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. This communication start request command requests the P base 2 to start communication. In response to this communication start request, a response to the communication start response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. This response to the communication start response is a response to the CU 3 for communication start.

  The communication start request command notifies the P unit 2 that communication has started normally. Receiving the communication start request, the P base 2 clears the recovery information stored so far. The communication start request command includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. The CU 3 sets the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value) after the communication start request, and the P unit 2 also sets the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value) after receiving the communication start request.

  The response to the communication start response is to notify the CU 3 that the communication has started normally, and the CU 3 clears the recovery information. The response of the communication start response includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

<< 7. 7. Communication end request, Communication end response >>
A communication end request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. This communication end request command requests the P unit 2 to end communication. In response to this communication end request, a response of a communication end response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. This communication end response is a response to the end of communication to the CU3.

  The communication end request command notifies the P unit 2 that the communication has ended normally, and includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The response of the communication end response is to notify the CU 3 that the communication has ended normally, and the CU 3 and the P stand 2 stop the communication and wait for the restart after the notification. The response of the communication end response includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

<< 9. Status information request >>
A status information request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. This status information request command is for requesting the status of the CU 3 to the P unit 2. The CU 3 uses this command to periodically check the status of the P base 2. The status information request command includes the number of balls to be added from the CU 3 side to the P stand 2 side shown in FIG.

  Specific data of this status information request includes data of “sequential number”, “command”, “CU state”, “addition ball number”, “additional serial number”, and “counting serial number”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “CU state” represents the state of the CU 3 notified to the P base 2, and indicates that a card is being inserted when Bit 0 is “1”, and no card is inserted when “0”. That is, Bit0 represents a state where a card (general card / member card) is inserted in CU3. In addition, a general card is being inserted by depositing into a stock card (general 0 yen 0 card) stocked in advance in the card stock section of CU3.

  When Bit1 is “1”, the card unit is being opened, and when it is “0”, the card unit is being closed. That is, Bit1 notifies the P unit 2 of the card unit opening state according to the state of CU3. The timing for notifying the opening of the card unit is, for example, when the opening of the card unit is completed. The timing for notifying that the card unit is closed is, for example, when the store is closed. Note that when the same state changes from opening to closing, the P stand 2 notifies the CU 3 with a status information response as the number of all playing game balls being held.

  When Bit 2 is “1”, the card return preparation is in progress, and when “0”, the card return preparation is not in progress. The CU 3 notifies the P stand 2 of “preparing for card return” for a certain time (10 seconds) by setting this bit during each operation of card return, simple leaving, and meal break. When the operation of the counting button 28 is detected, the P table 2 has operated the counting button once or a plurality of times if it has received a status information request with the bit being prepared for card return turned on. Regardless of the operation duration, regardless of the operation duration time, all the stored game balls are notified to the CU 3 by counting the number of balls.

  When Bit 3 is “1”, a game ball addition request is shown, and when Bit 3 is “0”, no game ball addition request is shown. That is, Bit3 requests addition of game balls (the number of added balls) at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and stored ball payout operations.

  When Bit 4 is “1”, completion of counting ball reception is indicated, and “0” indicates that counting ball is not received. Bit4 notifies P stand 2 that the receipt has been completed when the counting ball is received. That is, it is used to confirm delivery of the response “count ball” of the state information response.

  When Bit 5 is “1”, card removal is waiting, and “0” indicates completion of card removal. Bit 5 notifies P stand 2 of the state of waiting for card removal from CU 3. Bit 6 to Bit 7 are not used.

  The “added ball number” is the added ball number of game balls, and the data of the added ball number is valid only when Bit 3 in the CU state is “1”. The “addition serial number” is an addition sequence number (0 to 255), and is notified by updating (+1) the sequence number when a game ball addition request is made. The “counting sequence number” is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and the count sequence number received when the count is requested is notified as it is. However, if the continuity of the counting sequence number is not established, the counting is not received.

<< 10. Status information response >>
In response to the status information request, a response of the status information response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. This response of the status information response is to notify the information / status of the P platform 2 to the CU 3. The response of the status information response includes the latest game table information and the number of game balls shown in FIG.

  The specific data of this status information response includes “sequential number”, “command”, “number of game balls”, “number of fired balls”, “number of balls passed through outro”, “total number of ball balls”, “count request ball” Data of “number”, “counting serial number”, “game table state”, “injustice detection information” and “game information” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “number of game balls” is the current number of game balls (the number of game balls as a result of calculating addition / subtraction). The “number of game balls” calculates the number of game balls held by the CU 3 by using the “total prize ball number”, “number of fired balls”, and “count ball number” described later. Thereafter, the CU 3 checks whether the calculated number of game balls of the CU 3 matches the number of game balls of the P unit 2.

  “Number of fired balls” is the number of fired balls (summed if there are balls fired multiple times at the time of transmission). However, if there are back balls, subtract the number of back balls. That is, the “number of fired balls” (subtraction) is data to be subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU 3. If the data is received without holding the card, CU3 does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3 does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3 itself is 0.

  “The number of balls that have passed through the outlet” is the number of balls that have passed through the outlet 154 (when there are a plurality of balls that have passed through the transmission, they are added together).

  “Total number of prize balls” is the total number of prize balls in the prize ball information 1-n. The prize ball information 1-n is the number of prize balls for each prize opening type such as a start opening, a big winning opening, a winning opening (ordinary winning opening), and the like. Note that the “total prize ball number” (addition) does not include the “addition request ball number” transmitted from the CU 3. In addition, the CU 3 adds the data of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls held. When the data for the total number of winning balls is received without holding the card, CU3 does not add the number of gaming balls.

  The “count request ball number” is the number of game balls requested to be counted. That is, the “count ball” (subtraction) is data that is subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU 3 and added to the number of cards held. Note that the number of counting balls is not used for the data of the number of subtraction balls transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3. Further, when the data is received without holding the card, the CU 3 does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3 does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3 itself is 0.

  However, when the card unit opening state changes from opening to closing, the game balls held by the gaming machine are counted and set as the number of counting balls. When the card unit opening state is open, the operation of the counting button 28 is performed, so that the number of game balls is counted and set as the number of counting balls. However, when the card unit opening state changes from opening to closing, the game balls are automatically counted and set as the number of counting balls without waiting for the operation of the counting button 28.

  The “counting serial number” is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and is updated (+1) and notified when a counting is requested.

  The “gaming table state” indicates the state of the P table 2 when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P table 2, and the “gaming table state 1”, “gaming table state 2”, “ It includes information on “game table state 3” and “game table error state”.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 1” indicates whether the game is permitted or prohibited. When “0”, the game is permitted, and when “1”, the game is prohibited. Bit1 indicates whether or not the fan (player) is playing (balls are being fired), and is “0” when waiting (the fan is not firing a ball), and “1”. The game is in progress (a state in which the fan is firing a ball), but there is a game ball and the game is in the state in which the launch handle (hitting ball operating handle 25) is touched (touch sensor touched).

  Bit 2 indicates the presence / absence of a game ball (detection of no game ball). When “0”, there are a number of game balls, and when “1”, there is no game balls. Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are confirmed in a state where the fire of the balls is stopped. That is, it shows whether all the floating balls in the game area 27 have been collected. However, it does not include ball stoppages due to a fire stop switch (also called a single shot switch). When it is “0”, the game is incomplete (a state where all balls are unconfirmed), and when it is “1”, a game is complete (a state where all balls are confirmed). Note that if the completion of the game is not confirmed for 15 seconds or more after the ball launch is stopped, the P platform 2 times out and the game is completed.

  Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are confirmed in a state where the fire of the balls is stopped. “0” indicates game ball indefinite (state where all balls are undetermined), and “1” indicates game ball definite (state where all balls are definite). Here, for example, if the game machine ball cannot be confirmed for 15 seconds or more after the P stand 2 has stopped firing the ball, it will time out and determine the game ball. Further, the P stand 2 is set in a state where the whereabouts of the game ball is fixed (game ball determination) when the power is turned on or the RAM is cleared.

  Bit 4 indicates whether or not there is a game ball count request (whether or not a count button is pressed). When “0”, there is no request, and when “1”, there is a count ball payout request at the start of counting. When the counting operation is detected, the P platform transmits this counting request ON state information response to the CU 3 and confirms whether or not the counting request has been received. When “1”, it is a count request. Bit 5 indicates the processing result of the game ball addition, which is addition OK when “0” and addition NG when “1”. In addition, when the P machine 2 makes an addition NG response, it notifies the addition serial number without updating it. Bit 6 indicates a pressed state of the firing stop switch. When “0”, the switch is released, and when “1”, the switch is pressed. Bit 7 is reserved.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 2” represents jackpot information jackpot 1 (all jackpots), and “1” is set during all jackpots. Bit 1 represents big hit 2 of big hit information (big hit + small hit), and sets “1” during all big hits and small hits. Bit 2 represents the big hit 3 of the big hit information (big hit of the big ball), and “1” is set during the big hit where the big ball is big. Bit 3 represents big hit 4 of big hit information (big hit of small ball), and “1” is set during big hit with small ball. Bit 4 represents a big hit 5 of the big hit information (a big hit in the outgoing ball), and “1” is set during the big hit in the middle of the outgoing ball. Bit5 to Bit7 are reserved.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 3” represents a big hit in the gaming state information + short time, and “1” is set in the big hit and short time. Bit1 represents the probability change of the game state information, and “1” is set during the probability change. Bit 2 represents the time of the game state information, and “1” is set during the time reduction. Bit 3 indicates that the game state information is changing, and “1” is set during the change. Bit4 to Bit7 are reserved.

  The “gaming table error state” indicates an error code that is occurring in the P table 2, and each error code is expressed using Bit0 to Bit5. Note that there is no error when Bit 0 to Bit 5 are all “0”. Bit 6 is information for specifying a place where an error has occurred, and represents payout control when “0” and main control when “1”. Bit 7 indicates an error output method. When “0”, only an alert is issued, and when “1”, an alert + output to the hall server 801 is indicated.

  The “fraud detection information” is information detected by the P machine 2 at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P machine 2, and includes “fraud detection state 1” and “fraud detection state 2”. , “Illegal detection information 1” to “fraud detection information 4” and “additional serial number” are included.

  The “fraud detection state 1” is fraud detection information of the main control board 16. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 1” indicates fraud detection information of radio wave sensor detection when “1”. Bit1 indicates that it is the positive detection information that the magnetic sensor is not detected when “1”. Bit2 represents fraud detection information for fraud detection when “1”. Bit3 to Bit7 are reserved.

  The “fraud detection state 2” is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 2” indicates fraud detection information for opening the glass plate when “1”. Bit 1 represents fraud detection information for opening the frame body when “1”. Bit 2 represents fraud detection information of radio wave sensor detection when “1”. Bit 3 represents fraud detection information of the proximity sensor abnormality when “1”. Bit 4 represents fraud detection information for detecting a prize ball goto when “1”. Here, the “goto” is an illegal act of acquiring a ball in an illegal manner in a pachinko machine or a slot machine. Bit 5 represents fraud detection information for complex goth detection when “1”. Bit 6 represents fraud detection information for fraud addition detection when “1”. Bit 7 represents fraud detection information for nighttime frame opening / monitoring SW abnormality detection when “1”.

  “Injustice detection information 1” is data indicating information on the detection of the winning ball sensor got (number of winning inconsistent balls). The “fraud detection information 1” is valid when Bit 4 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. The “injustice detection information 2” is data indicating information of composite sensor goto detection (launch / OUT inconsistent ball number). That is, it is data indicating information when an inconsistency between the number of shot balls and the number of out balls (the number of balls passing through the outlet) is detected. The “fraud detection information 2” is valid when Bit 5 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. “Falsification detection information 3” is data indicating information of fraud addition detection (number of fraud addition balls). The “fraud detection information 3” is valid when Bit 6 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. “Falsification detection information 4” is data indicating nighttime frame opening information. The “fraud detection information 4” is valid when the Bit 7 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”.

  Bit 7 of “illegal detection information 4” is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 4 has occurred, and indicates “normal” when “0” and abnormal 4 occurrence when “1”. Bit 6 is information indicating whether or not the nighttime monitoring switch abnormality 3 has occurred, and represents “normal” when “0” and abnormal 3 occurrence when “1”. Bit 5 is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 2 has occurred, and indicates “normal” when “0” and abnormal 2 occurrence when “1”. Bit 4 is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 1 has occurred, and represents “normal” when “0” and abnormal 1 occurrence when “1”. Bits 0 to 3 are information indicating the number of opening of the main body frame. When the bit is “0”, there is no opening, and “1” to “15” indicate the number of opening. The number of times of opening is counted up to 15 times, and the count after 16 times is held at 15 times.

  “Addition sequence number” is a sequence number for addition, and the addition sequence number received at the time of addition request is notified as it is. However, if the continuity of the addition sequence number is not established, the addition NG is notified.

  The “fraud detection state 3” is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 3” indicates fraud detection information of other store game ball detection when “1”. Bit1 to Bit7 are reserved. In addition, the other store game ball detection is, for example, a sensor is provided in the collection balls passing path of P units, the sensor reads identification information (such as a marking on the surface) provided on the game ball, the game ball of the own store It is determined whether or not it matches the identification information. If they do not match, the game ball of another store is mixed with the game ball, and Bit0 of “injustice detection state 3” is set to “1” and notified to CU3.

  The “game information” is information on the P device 2 at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P device 2, and “number of game information”, “type information 1” to “type information n”. , “Count information 1” to “count information n”.

  “Number of game information” is the number (n) of type information / count information, and n = 0 to 22 (variable length). “Type information 1” to “Type information n” indicate game type information 1 to game type information n, respectively. The type information is data type information from Bit 4 to Bit 7 and indicates the data type of the game information. When it is “0”, there is no information, when it is “1”, when it is “2”, it is a big prize opening. “3” is a winning opening, “4” is the number of symbol stops, “5” is a big hit, and “6” is a small hit. Bit 0 to Bit 3 are data number information, which indicates the data number for each data type of game information. When “0”, there is no information, and when “1” to “15”, each data number is indicated. . For example, when the data type is a big hit of “5”, the data number is “1”, the ball is large, “2” is the ball is small, “3” is the ball, “4” to “6” It is a spare time. Further, when the data type is a small hit of “6”, the data number is a small hit when “1”, and a spare when “2” to “15”.

  “Count information 1” to “Count information n” indicate game count information 1 to game count information n, respectively.

  Here, when the data type is a start opening, a large winning opening, and a small winning opening, the count information is information on the number of winning balls from Bit 4 to Bit 7, and the winning ball at the time of winning for each type information of game information. The numbers indicate the number of award balls when “1” to “15”. Bit 0 to Bit 3 are information on the number of wins, which indicates the number of wins (cumulative) for each type of game table information, and each of the numbers “1” to “15” represents data on the number of wins. In the count information, when the data type is the symbol stop count, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are fixed to “0”, Bit 0 to Bit 3 indicate the symbol stop count, and when “1” to “15”, the symbol stop count Represents. In the count information, when the data type is big hit or small hit, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are fixed to “0”, Bit 0 to Bit 3 indicate the number of hits, and when “1” to “15”, the number of hits is shown. It represents.

  Furthermore, the response of the state information response includes a “launch intensity signal”, a “passing area signal”, a “during fluctuation signal”, and a “handle touch signal”.

  The “fire strength signal” indicates the fire strength T that is the detection result of the fire strength sensor 19 described above. As described above, in the present embodiment, the firing intensity T is a variable value that varies from 0 (minimum value) to 99 (maximum value) in accordance with the amount of steering operation. In addition, when the communication interval (for example, 200 msec) between the P stand 2 and the CU 3 is shorter than the interval between the pachinko balls (for example, 0.6 sec), a firing intensity signal is basically output for each ball. become. Further, the firing intensity signal may be output as a set with data indicating whether or not it has actually been fired.

  “Passing area signal” indicates the above-described passing area signal. As described above, in the present embodiment, the pass area signal is one of the pass area signals A1 to A8. Each passing area signal is associated with the firing intensity T at the time when each passing area signal is detected.

  The “in-change signal” indicates that the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278 changes as the pachinko ball passes through one of the start winning holes 275, 276, and 277.

  The “handle touch signal” indicates that the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25.

<< 11. Card insertion notification, 12. Card insertion response >>
A card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2. This card insertion notification command notifies the P unit 2 of card insertion. In response to this card insertion notification, a response of the card insertion response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. The response of this card insertion response is a response indicating that the card insertion notification has been received with respect to the CU3.

  The card insertion notification command notifies the card ID and insertion time of the inserted card to the P base 2 when the card is inserted, and “sequential number”, “command”, “card ID”, “card insertion time”, Data of “store code” and “SC board ID” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “card ID” is identification ID information of the IC card inserted into the CU 3 and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2. “Card insertion time” is the time when the IC card is inserted into the card insertion / eject port 309 (see FIG. 1) of CU3. The year information is two digits YY, the month information is two digits MM, and the day information is two digits. The data is DD, time information is represented by two digits hh, minute information is represented by two digits mm, and second information is represented by two digits ss. The card insertion time is used to determine whether the game ball held by the P stand 2 is the current day ball or the past ball.

  The “store code” is a store identification code in which the CU 3 is installed, and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2. It is also used to determine whether or not the CU3 has been moved to the store. The CU 3 stores a store code where the CU 3 is installed. The store code is added to the security board 325 and notified to the P units. “SC board ID” is an SC board ID for identifying CU3, and is used to determine whether or not CU3 has been replaced. The SC board ID is notified by adding information from the security board 325 to the P board 2. The payout control unit 171 of the P table 2 stores information notified by the card insertion notification command such as the card ID (C-ID) and the card insertion time.

  The response of the card insertion response notifies the CU 3 that the card insertion notification has been normally received, and includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The operation of the P stand 2 at the time of card insertion / return notification will be described. First, a card or general card is inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309 of CU3, or a card is notified to the P stand 2 as a card insertion notification by depositing a general 0 yen 0 coin card. Information such as ID and card insertion time is notified. When there is a card insertion notification, the P base 2 backs up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. However, when a card insertion notification command is received and a status information request including information on the status of CU3 being in the state of card insertion (bit 0 = 1 in the CU status) is received (determined that the card is being inserted in the P unit 2 ), The P stand 2 transmits only a response without backing up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. When the card return button 322 of the CU 3 is pressed, a card return notification is made to the P base 2, and the P base 2 clears information such as the backed up card ID and card insertion time.

<< 13. Card return notice, 14. Card return response >>
A card return notification command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2. This card return notification command notifies the P unit 2 of a card return. In response to this card return notification, a response of a card return response is transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3. The response of this card return response is a response to the card return to CU3.

  The card return notification command is for notifying the P unit 2 of the card return, and the CU 3 transmits the notification when the “card return” button is pressed. The card return notification includes data of “serial number” and “command”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The response to the card return response is to send a response to the card return notification to the CU 3 and includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “card ID”, and “card insertion time”. “Serial number”, “command”, “card ID”, and “card insertion time” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. Note that CU3 does not return the card if the card ID included in the command does not match the ID of the card currently being inserted or if there is a problem with the card insertion time included in the command. , And processing such as prohibiting the writing of the holding ball to the card.

  Here, the operation of the P stand 2 at the time of card insertion notification or card return notification will be described. At the time of card insertion notification, if the CU 3 performs a membership card insertion, a general card insertion, or a deposit to a general 0 yen 0 coin card, the P stand 2 backs up the card ID and the card insertion time. When an operation of pressing the “card return” button is performed on the CU 3 at the time of the card return notification, the P stand 2 clears the card ID and the card insertion time.

<< 15. Communication test request, 16. Communication test response >>
A communication test request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. This communication test request command notifies the P unit 2 of test data. In response to this communication test request, a response of the communication test response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. The response of this card return response is a response of test data to CU3.

  The communication test request command notifies the P unit 2 of test data. Note that the test data notified to the P platform 2 is not encrypted. The communication test request command includes data of “serial number”, “command”, and “test data”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. “Test data” is test data notified to the P base 2 and is arbitrary data.

  The response of the communication test response notifies the CU 3 of test data. Note that the test data notified to the CU 3 is not encrypted. The response of the communication test response includes data of “serial number”, “command”, and “test data”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. “Test data” is test data notified to the CU 3 and is arbitrary data.

<Main sequence in communication between CU and P platform>
<< Send command and response >>
First, transmission of commands and responses between the CU 3 and the P base 2 will be described. A command is transmitted from CU3 (primary station) to P station 2 (secondary station), and P station 2 returns a response to CU3 in response to the command. In other words, the business message transmission is a command / response system in which the CU 3 is the primary station and the P stand 2 is the secondary station.

  The period from the transmission of the first command to the P unit 2 from the CU 3 to the transmission of the next command is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds. Further, the period from the transmission of the response from the P base 2 to the CU 3 until the transmission of the next response is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, both a command and a response are transmitted between the CU 3 and the P base 2 at an interval of 200 ms. On the other hand, by operating the hitting operation handle 25, the P platform 2 hits 100 pachinko balls into the game area 27 per minute, so the hitting time interval is 0.6 seconds. As a result, a plurality of commands and responses are transmitted and received while firing one ball.

  Therefore, responses for notifying the amount of change in the number of game balls are sequentially transmitted from the P platform 2 to the CU 3 at intervals shorter than the ball firing time interval. As a result, the P stand 2 can finely notify the CU 3 of the amount of change in the number of game balls.

  Here, the transmission interval of the command and the response is set to 200 ms, but the transmission interval may be longer or shorter than this. For example, the transmission interval may be a firing time interval of the P platform 2. It is also possible to match with

<< Communication line disconnection detection on CU side >>
Next, processing when communication disconnection is detected on the CU3 side will be described. When the response is not received within 200 ms after the CU 3 transmits a command to the P unit 2, the same command is transmitted to the P unit 2 again. Further, if a response cannot be received within 200 ms, a second retransmission is performed in which the same command is transmitted to the P unit 2. Resend the same command to P-unit 2 up to 14 times. If the response is not received from the P-unit 2 even after the 14th retransmission, the CU 3 determines that the communication is abnormal after 3 seconds and sets “communication interruption”. This communication abnormality may be caused when the connector of the CU 3 and the connector of the P base 2 are disconnected, or the connection wiring is disconnected or the power supply of the P base 2 is disconnected. CU3 does not increment the serial number when retransmitting the command.

<< Communication line disconnection detection on P side >>
Processing when communication disconnection is detected on the P platform 2 side will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2, and the P unit 2 returns a response to the CU 3 in response to the command. Thereafter, when the state in which the command from the CU 3 is not transmitted to the P stand 2 continues for 3 seconds, the P stand 2 determines that the communication is cut off, stops the driving of the firing motor 18 and stops the game. The cause of this communication disconnection may be the disconnection of the connector of CU3 and the connector of P base 2, disconnection of connection wiring, or power supply disconnection of CU3.

  It should be noted that the command and response for detecting communication disconnection on the P platform 2 side include recovery request / recovery response, recovery request 2 / recovery response 2, communication start request / communication start response, notification end request / communication end response, and communication Does not include test request / communication test response command and response.

<< Power-on >>
Next, connection sequence processing at power-on will be described. The sequence process shown in FIG. 8 is a process executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU 3 and the P platform 2 is normally completed. More specifically, it is executed when communication is resumed after the power of the CU 3 is turned off while the card is not inserted. A typical example is a case where the power supply is turned off at the amusement hall after one day of business is finished, and the power supply is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, power is turned on. When the power is turned on, communication is started after the firing motor 18 is stopped on the P stand 2 to stop the game. Thereafter, an authentication sequence is started, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the previous last transmission sequence number and the previous last transmission count sequence number to the P unit 2 and requests recovery information from the P unit 2. The P unit 2 refers to the previous last transmission count sequence number notified from the CU 3 and executes count recovery processing. Specifically, the P-unit 2 refers to the last transmission count sequence number last time, and if the CU 3 has not performed the counting process, it is assumed that no counting request has been made, and if the CU 3 has already performed the counting process, Subtract the number of balls from the previous number of game balls to determine the game balls.

  After executing the count recovery process, the P table 2 returns the game information recovery data backed up inside the P table 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response (recovery response). The recovery information includes a previous last transmission sequence number, a previously inserted card ID, a previous card insertion time, a previous last transmission addition sequence number, a previous game machine information, and the like.

  When the CU3 that has received the recovery response has not executed the process of the last transmission addition serial number included in the recovery information, the CU3 performs the additional recovery process of the CU3 using the previous game machine information included in the recovery information. When the addition ball recovery process is performed, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request 2 to the P base 2 and transmits recovery data to the P base 2. This recovery data includes the previous last transmission serial number and the number of additional balls.

  In response to this, the P platform 2 executes an addition recovery process based on the received recovery data, and returns the result as a response to the CU 3 (recovery response 2). When the P stand 2 cannot receive the additional balls, the recovery process NG is returned as a recovery result.

  This recovery process is a process for recovering the consistency of each other's data between the CU 3 and the P stand 2 and is not only executed at power-on, but also when a trouble occurs and is recovered. Executed.

  The CU 3 counts up the serial number each time a command such as a recovery request is transmitted. However, it does not count up when retransmitting a command. When the P unit 2 receives a command having the same serial number as the previously received serial number, it determines that a communication failure has occurred and the CU 3 has retransmitted the command. The CU 3 transmits a command, and backs up the serial number when a response with the same serial number is notified from the P unit 2. When transmitting the response corresponding to the received command, the P platform 2 notifies the CU 3 of the received serial number as it is. The P unit 2 backs up the serial number when the response is transmitted.

  After the authentication sequence is completed, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request command to the P unit 2 with the serial number “1”. The P platform 2 returns the received serial number “1” as it is to the CU 3 as a response to the recovery response. Further, the CU 3 transmits the command of the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2 with the serial number “2”. The P base 2 returns the response of the recovery response 2 to the CU 3 as it is with the received serial number “2”.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 counts up the serial number to “3”, and transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2. When the CU 3 does not transmit the recovery request 2, the serial number is “2” which is one countdown (−1). In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response to the communication start response to the CU 3 with the received serial number “3”. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  The CU 3 counts up the serial number to “4”, and transmits a status information request command to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 updates the game table information, the game information, and the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the updated data every time a response of the status information response is transmitted. Then, the P platform 2 returns the response of the status information response to the CU 3 with the received serial number “4”.

  In response to this, the CU 3 updates the previous last transmission sequence number, and backs up the updated data every time a response to the status information response is received.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 counts up the serial number to “5” and transmits a status information request command to the P base 2, and the P base 2 sends the response of the status information response to the CU 3 with the received serial number “5”. Reply to

<< Card insertion >>
Processing of the CU 3 and the P stand 2 when a card is inserted will be described. The CU 3 shown in FIG. 9 transmits a command for status information request including the serial number = n and the card return ready state = OFF to the P unit 2 before the card is inserted. In response to this, the P unit 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n and the game prohibition to the CU 3.

  Thereafter, in CU3, when the card is inserted, the card reader / writer outputs a command signal for taking the card into the card reader / writer, and the card reader / writer reads information (card ID, etc.) recorded in the taken-in card. A process at the time of card insertion, such as receiving the read information, is executed. Note that information recorded on the card read by the card reader / writer (such as a card ID) may be stored in the CU3.

  The CU 3 is in a card information inquiry state for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is in the middle of verifying whether the inserted card is appropriate, whether it is a membership card registered at the amusement hall, or inquiring the hall server 801 about the holding ball, storage ball, remaining card amount, etc. This means that the process of displaying the fact on the display 312 and the display on the display 54 on the P platform 2 side is being executed.

  Since the CU 3 does not authenticate the inserted card while displaying that the inserted card is being inquired on the display 312, a status information request including serial number = n + 1, card return ready state = OFF Is sent to the P-unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n + 1 and game prohibition to the CU3. The display 54 on the P platform 2 side is controlled by the display control unit 350 of the CU 3 to display that the card is being inquired.

  Thereafter, when the inserted card is authenticated, the CU 3 stores the card ID and the card insertion time of the card in the RAM of the CU control unit 323, and the serial number = n + 2, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the store code. And a card insertion notification command including the SC board ID is transmitted to the P base 2. The store code and the SC board ID are information added to the command when the card insertion notification command passes through the security board 325. In response to this, the P unit 2 backs up the received card ID, card insertion time, store code, and SC board ID data in the RAM of the payout control unit 171 and a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 2 Is returned to CU3. Also in CU3, the card ID of the inserted card is stored in the RAM or the like of the CU control unit 323.

  In response to this, the CU 3 sends a status information request command including a serial number = n + 3 and a card return ready state = ON to the P unit 2 to notify the P unit 2 of the card being inserted. . The P table 2 receives the notification that the card is being inserted, permits the game, and returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 3 and the game permission to the CU3, thereby indicating that the game is being permitted. To notify.

  While the card is being inserted, the CU 3 sends a command for status information request including the serial number = n + 4 and the card return ready state = ON to the P unit 2, and the P unit 2 responds to the status information response including the serial number = n + 4 and the game permission. Is returned to CU3.

  Further, a case where a card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2 during card insertion will be described. First, the CU 3 transmits a card insertion notification command including the serial number = n + x, the card ID, the card insertion time, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2. When a card insertion notification command is transmitted during card insertion, the transmitted card ID and card insertion time are often different from the card ID and card insertion time of the card being inserted, and are stored in the P base 2. There is a high possibility that fraud that intentionally changes the current card ID or the card insertion time has been performed.

  Therefore, the P table 2 does not back up the received card ID, card insertion time, store code, and SC board ID data to the RAM or the like of the payout control unit 171. Whether or not the card is being inserted in the P stand 2 can be easily determined based on the card return preparation state = ON information included in the state information request command.

  Next, the P platform 2 returns a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + x to the CU 3 without backing up the received card ID, card insertion time, and the like. Note that the CU3 also does not store the card ID, the card insertion time, and the like transmitted by the card insertion notification command in the RAM or the like of the CU control unit 323. As a result, the card ID is intentionally transmitted to the P unit 2 during card insertion, and the fraudulent act such as falsification of the card ID stored in the P unit 2 can be prevented, and security is improved. Can do.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing processing at the time of insertion performed by the CU 3 when a card is inserted into the CU 3. In the present embodiment, the steps indicated by broken lines indicate the control contents of the modification. The solid arrows indicate the flow of control, and the two-pointed arrows indicate the flow of information to be transmitted. In FIG. 10, each step of S1 to S7 is executed by CU3. In addition, the P stand 2 executes S8 to S10 and S12 to S15. More specifically, the deletion process of S8 to S10, S12, S13, and S15 is executed by the effect control board 15 provided in the P stand 2, and the transmission process of S14 and S15 is provided by the effect control unit 151. The produced effect control board 15 transmits to the payout control unit 171, and the payout control unit 171 transmits to the CU3.

  First, in step (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1, the CU determines whether or not it is interrupted. Whether or not the game is being interrupted is determined based on whether or not an interrupt operation has been performed and a game interruption sequence has been executed. If it is suspended, it is determined in S2 whether or not the C-ID and type of the inserted card matches the C-ID and type of the suspended card. If not, the process proceeds to S5. The inserted card is ejected and a transition is made to standby. In FIG. 10, the “type” is not shown.

  On the other hand, if the C-ID and type of the inserted card and the C-ID and type of the interrupted card match, the interrupted player returns to the gaming machine and starts the game. Therefore, the control advances to S4, the suspended state is canceled, and the process of restarting the game is executed in S6.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1 that it is not interrupted, it is determined in S3a whether or not a card is already inserted. Whether or not the card is being inserted is determined based on whether or not the card reader provided in the card insertion / discharge port 309 accepts the card. If it is determined in S3a that the card is not being inserted, the process of storing the C-ID and type of the inserted card and transmitting it to the P unit 2 is performed in S3. In the P stand 2, the C-ID and type are received and stored in the received C-ID, type and backup area (for example, a backup data storage unit provided in the effect control board 15 shown in FIG. 4). The C-ID and type are compared (S8). Then, in S9, it is determined whether or not the comparison results match. If they do not match, it is determined that a player different from the player who has left the seat has started playing, and the subroutine program for this insertion processing ends. .

  If it is determined in S3a that the card is being inserted, in order to prevent the C-ID and type different from the C-ID and type of the card being inserted from being overwritten and stored in the CU3 or P stand 2, S3 Skip processing in.

  In this way, the player identification information storage means (current player game history data storage section) for storing the player identification information (C-ID) and the same determination means (S8, S9) for performing the same determination processing are used. Display control means (the effect control board 15 provided with the effect control unit 151), the communication means side (the payout control unit 171 side) need not be provided with the same determination processing function, and display control is sufficient. A common communication means can be used between the gaming machine having the means and the gaming machine not having the display control means, and it is possible to mass-produce small quantities of the communication means.

  In addition, you may perform the process of S15 and S7 as control content of a modification. Through S15, the game history data, C-ID and type stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are transmitted to CU3 and then deleted. The CU 3 receives it and transmits the received data to the upper server 801. The host server 801 backs up the received game history data, C-ID, and type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that they match in S9, the process proceeds to S12, and the game history data in the backup area (backup data storage) is stored in the current area (for example, the backup data storage unit provided in the effect control board 15 shown in FIG. 4). The game history data is newly updated from the game history data.

  In addition, you may perform the process of S10, S13, and S14 as a control content of a modification. If YES in S9, the control proceeds to S10, where it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed since the previous card was ejected. If it is determined that the game history data, the game history data, the C-ID, and the type in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are deleted in S13. Further, after S12, a notification that the players are the same is transmitted to the CU in S14. In addition, as a control content of a modification, you may control to perform all the processes of S10, S13, S14 and the processes of S15, S7.

<< Prepaid loan >>
Next, a process for lending a game ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card will be described. In the sequence process shown in FIG. 11, the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted card is 500 yen, and the number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU3. In this way, the addition sequence number is not updated while the addition request is not generated.

  Thereafter, when the player performs a lending operation (ball lending operation) in which the “lending” button is pressed once, the CU 3 lends the remaining amount of 500 yen, that is, 125 balls. When the ball lending button (lending button) 321 is pressed, the CU 3 confirms prepaid consumption for 500 yen and backs up the data of the number of added balls = 125. In this way, the remaining amount consumption is determined by the CU 3 alone at the stage where the lending operation is performed. Thereafter, CU3 is in the display of addition. During the addition display, the display unit 54 displays that 125 balls are withdrawn from the remaining amount and added to the game balls.

  Next, the CU 3 makes a game ball addition request to the P stand 2. Therefore, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2. The serial number is incremented to “n + 1” and the addition number of game balls is requested, so that the additional serial number is also incremented to “m + 1”. The CU 3 counts up the addition sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission addition sequence number to “m + 1”, and backs up the data. In response to this, P 2 updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1” last time. Back up the data. And since the P stand 2 notifies CU3 of the number of game balls = 175 and the game ball addition result = OK, the serial number = n + 1, the number of addition balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the addition serial number = m + 1. The response of the status information response including it is returned to CU3. Since it is a response to the game ball addition request, the addition serial number is not counted up and is set to “m + 1” as it is.

  Thereafter, CU3 transmits a command of status information request including serial number = n + 2, game ball addition request = OFF and addition serial number = m + 1 to P unit 2, P unit 2 has serial number = n + 5, number of additional balls = 175 and A response of the status information response including the addition serial number = m + 1 is returned to CU3. When the game ball addition request is OFF, the status information request and the status information response count up the serial number, but do not count up the additional serial number.

≪Mochitama payout and savings ball payout (replay) ≫
Next, the process of paying out and holding out the stored balls will be described. In FIG. 12, the initial number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU3. In this way, the addition sequence number is not updated while the addition request is not generated.

  Thereafter, when the player presses the holding ball payout button or the replay button 319 in a state where there is a holding ball or a storage ball, the CU 3 determines the consumption of 125 balls from the holding ball or the storage ball. As described above, the consumption of the possession balls or the storage balls is determined by the CU 3 alone when the operation of depressing the possession ball payout button or the replay button 319 is performed. In addition, when both the holding ball and the storage ball exist, consumption of the holding ball is given priority.

  In place of the control to prioritize the holding ball, a storage ball replay button and a holding ball replay button are provided, and the player can select and operate either the storage ball consumption or the holding ball consumption by operating the selection. You may do it. In other words, the replay button is used to obtain a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) and a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) replay button. You may comprise two with a holding ball (pointing) replay button.

  CU3 notifies the addition request | requirement of the number of addition balls = 125 to the P stand 2 after confirming the consumption from a holding ball or a storage ball. Specifically, CU3 displays that a game ball addition process is in progress, and issues a status information request command including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125, and addition serial number = m + 1. Transmit to P-station 2. In order to make a game ball addition request, the serial number is counted up to “n + 1”, and the additional serial number is also counted up to “m + 1”. Further, the CU 3 updates the previous last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. In response to this, P 2 updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1” last time. Back up the data. And the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of additional balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the additional serial number = m + 1 to the CU3. Since this is a response to a game ball addition request, the addition serial number is not counted up and remains “m + 1”.

  Thereafter, CU3 transmits a command of status information request including serial number = n + 2, game ball addition request = OFF and addition serial number = m + 1 to P unit 2, P unit 2 has serial number = n + 2, number of additional balls = 175 and A response of the status information response including the addition serial number = m + 1 is returned to CU3.

<< Game Ball Count (Normal) >>
Next, the normal counting process of counting and subtracting a part of the game balls will be described. FIG. 13 shows a case where the counting button is pressed without detecting a card return operation. Therefore, the card return ready state bits transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2 are all OFF (= 0). For this reason, description of the bits in the card return preparation state is omitted below.

  Also, in FIG. 13, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or visitor card) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “800” balls. Yes.

  Here, an example will be described in which counting in units of 100 points continues while the operation of the counting button is detected, and the counting operation ends when the operation of the counting button is no longer detected.

  First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a card return ready state = OFF, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of gaming balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU3.

  In response to the serial number n transmitted from the CU 3, the serial number n + 1 is returned from the P unit 2. The same counting sequence number m is returned from the P base 2 to the counting sequence number m transmitted from the CU 3. This is because the counting sequence number is a special sequence number that is updated when a counting request is generated, and is updated when the counting is completed.

  Thereafter, the player presses the counting button 28. In FIG. 13, immediately after the operation of pressing the count button 28 once, a command for status information request including a serial number = n + 1, a card return ready state = OFF, a count serial number = m, and a count response = OFF is sent from the CU3. It has been transmitted to P-station 2

  When the operation of the counting button 28 is detected, the P platform 2 transmits a status information response of the serial number n + 1 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 as a response to the command of the status information request to the CU 3. However, at this stage, the P base 2 does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Since this status information response is a message indicating a counting request, the counting sequence number is counted up to “m + 1”. At this time, the P unit 2 updates the previous last transmission count sequence number and backs up the updated last transmission count sequence number and the count request state ON data.

  CU3 which received the status information response of serial number n + 1 adds the number of balls equivalent to the requested number of balls and updates the display of balls to 100. That is, the CU control unit 323 transmits a count display command to the display control unit 350. The display controller 350 receives the command and controls the display 54 on the P platform 2 side. As a result, the display 54 displays an image in which the number of game balls is counted and the number of balls is decreased, while the number of balls is increased.

  In this case, it is conceivable to perform an effect display such that game balls are guided and counted by each counter one by one. Another example of the effect display may be a display in which the number of game balls is converted to the number of balls in time. For example, the data for the number of balls and the data for the number of balls are shown in a bar graph, and the number of balls in the game ball number is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is decreased. The display to move to the bar graph may be repeated. In addition, as another example of the effect display, the current game ball number data and the number of possession balls data are digitally displayed as they are, and the number of possession balls is increased while decreasing the number of game balls, or a part of the number of game balls It is possible to repeat the display for moving the number of balls to the number of balls, and various display effects.

  Further, the CU 3 updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3 transmits a status information request of serial number n + 2, counting serial number m + 1, and counting response = ON to the P base 2 to notify that the requested counting has been completed.

  The P table 2 that has received this status information request finally subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of balls counted = 100, and updates the display on the game ball number display 29 from 800 to 700. At this stage, the count request state of the P base 2 is OFF, but since the count button is continuously pressed, the P base 2 transmits a second count request to the CU 3. That is, a status information response of serial number n + 2 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 is transmitted to CU3. However, even at this stage, the P base 2 does not perform counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the status information response of the serial number n + 2, the number of game balls = 700. Since this status information response is a message transmitted as a new count request, the count sequence number is incremented to “m + 2”, the previous last transmission count sequence number is updated, and the updated last transmission count sequence number is updated. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  CU3 which received the status information response of serial number n + 2 adds the number of balls equivalent to the requested number of balls, and updates the display of balls to 200. Further, the CU 3 updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 2” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3 transmits a status information request with a serial number n + 3, a count serial number m + 2, and a count response = ON to the P platform 2 to notify that the requested count has been completed.

  The P table 2 that has received this status information request subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of balls counted = 100, and updates the display of the game ball number display 29 from 700 to 600. However, at this stage, the player's hand is separated from the counting button, and the counting operation is completed. For this reason, the P platform 2 notifies the CU 3 of the completion of counting with a status information response of serial number n + 3. That is, with the current number of game balls = 600, a status information response of count request = OFF and count ball count = 0 is transmitted to CU3. In addition, since all the counting operations corresponding to the counting request have been completed, the counting sequence number included in this status information response remains m + 2 and is not updated.

  The CU 3 that has received this status information response determines that the counting is complete. Although not shown, the CU 3 transmits a status information response of serial number n + 4, counting serial number m + 2, card return ready state = OFF, and counting response = OFF to the P base 2.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the information state response for notifying the number of balls to be counted is transmitted from the P cars to the CU, the game balls for the counting balls are subtracted quickly on the P cards side. In the stage where the information status response for notifying the number of balls is transmitted and the receipt confirmation is received from the CU, the P machines subtract the game balls.

<< game ball counting (automatic counting) >>
When the store is closed, if a card is not inserted and a game ball remains in the P stand 2, the store clerk goes around the P stand 2 with the game ball remaining and inserts a store card into one of them and performs a counting operation. It was necessary to collect the remaining game balls, and the work at the time of closing the store was complicated. In addition, if the game machine and the card unit are configured so that physical game balls are paid out as in the past, the work at the time of closing the store can be performed simply by collecting the remaining game balls and resetting the card unit. Can be done. However, in the configuration in which the P stand 2 and the CU 3 communicate with each other by performing mutual authentication as in the present embodiment to manage the game balls (game points), the remaining game balls are collected by simply resetting the card unit. It is not possible to do the work at the time of closing. Then, with reference to FIG. 14, the automatic counting process of the game ball at the time of a store closing is demonstrated.

  FIG. 14 is a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process that is automatically performed when the game hall is closed. First, CU3 is in a state where there is no stock card with card holding ball = 0 balls. On the other hand, the P stand 2 recognizes that a game ball = 50 balls and no card is inserted in the CU 3. Then, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n, the CU opening state = ON, the card insertion state = OFF, the counting serial number = m, and the counting response = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 3.

  When closing is set at the game hall where the CU 3 and the P stand 2 are installed, if it is determined that no card is inserted and a game ball remains in the P stand 2, processing described below is performed. The fact that no card is inserted can be determined from the information of the card insertion state = OFF included in the command for requesting the status information, and the fact that the game ball remains in the P stand 2 indicates that the status information response It can be determined from the information of the number of game balls included in the response = 50.

  The CU 3 transmits a card insertion notification command including the serial number = n + 1, the card ID = 0, and the card insertion time = 0 to the P unit 2. In other words, the P card 2 is notified that the card with card ID = 0, which is a virtual card, has been inserted into the card reader of CU3 at the card insertion time = 0. Since the virtual card is inserted into the CU 3 in this manner, the store clerk does not need to go around the P table 2 where the game balls remain and insert the store card into one unit. In response to this, the P base 2 recognizes that a card has been inserted into the CU 3 and executes the following processing. In response to this, the P base 2 returns a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 1 to the CU 3.

  Next, the CU 3 notifies the P stand 2 of the CU opening state OFF. Specifically, a status information request including serial number = n + 2, CU opening status = OFF, card return preparation status = ON, counting sequence number = m, and counting response = OFF is transmitted to P unit 2.

  Note that the closing setting in the game hall is, for example, that the CU control unit 323 distributes a closing command to the CU 3 from the hall management computer or the hall server 801 installed in the game hall, so that the CU control unit 323 has the game hall. It is done by judging the end of business in Japan. Specifically, when a staff member closes the hall management computer or hall server 801, a closing command for closing the store is distributed to each CU3. Alternatively, the closing time may be set and stored in the hall management computer or hall server 801, and the closing command may be automatically distributed to each CU 3 at the closing time. As another method, a sales end signal may be transmitted to the IR photosensitive unit 320 by a remote control operation of a business end by a store clerk, and the CU control unit 323 may determine the end of business at the game hall. As yet another method, each CU 3 is provided with a clock function, and when it is a closing time (for example, 10 o'clock), the time after the predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) of the closing time has elapsed (for example, 10:20) When timed by the function, control may be performed so that each CU 3 transmits a status information request including the CU opening status = OFF to the P stand 2.

  In response to this, in the P-unit 2, the serial number = n + 2, the number of game balls at the current time = 50, the count serial number of m + 1 updated by adding “1” to the received count serial number m, the count ball number = 50 and the count request = ON A state information response including “” is transmitted to CU3. That is, since the P-unit 2 requests the CU 3 to count the remaining game balls, the P-unit 2 notifies the CU 3 of the number of game balls = 50, the count acceptance request, and the counting sequence number count-up, and the last final transmission count Back up the serial number update and counting ball request status ON information.

  CU3 which received it adds count ball number = 50 sent from P stand 2 to the number of balls. It should be noted that the number of counting balls = 50 added to the number of holding balls is not fixed, and the CU 3 backs up the information of the last last transmission counting number update while keeping the current number of holding balls = 0. And CU3 returns to the P stand 2 in order to notify receipt of the counting ball. Specifically, a status information request including a serial number = n + 3, a CU opening state = OFF, a card return ready state = ON, a counting serial number = m + 1, and a counting response = ON is transmitted to the P unit 2. The counting balls received from the P stand 2 are stored in the storage means (for example, RAM) of the CU 3 as the number of balls held by the card ID = 0, which is a virtual card, and the card insertion time = 0.

  In the P-unit 2 that has received it, the counted number of balls is subtracted from the number of gaming balls (number of gaming balls = 50−number of counting balls = 50), and the number of gaming balls = 0 is displayed. The P stand 2 subtracts the number of balls from the number of game balls, and there is no remaining game balls (number of game balls = 0) to notify that a count request is unnecessary (count request state OFF). = N + 3, the number of game balls = 0, the counting sequence number = m + 1, the counting ball number = 0, and the status information response including the counting request = OFF is transmitted to the CU3.

  When all the remaining game balls are counted, a process of returning the virtual card (card ID = 0, card insertion time = 0) inserted in CU3 is performed. Specifically, the CU 3 transmits a card return notification including a serial number = n + 4 to the P unit 2 in order to notify the P unit 2 that the virtual card (card ID = 0, card insertion time = 0) has been returned. Upon receiving this, the P platform recognizes that the virtual card inserted into CU3 has been returned, and transmits a response to the card return response including serial number = n + 4, card ID = 0, and card insertion time = 0 to CU3.

  Next, the CU 3 notifies the P stand 2 that the CU state is the card insertion state = OFF. Specifically, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including a serial number = n + 5 and a card insertion status = OFF to the P base 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 transmits a status information response including the serial number = n + 5, the number of game balls = 0, the counting sequence number = m + 1, and the counting ball number = 0 to the CU3.

  As described above, in the counting process at the time of closing in the game hall, the counting process is automatically performed without the store clerk inserting the card and pressing the counting button 28, and the remaining game balls All the numbers can be collectively counted as the number of balls in the virtual card (card ID = 0, card insertion time = 0) and stored in the storage unit of CU3. Note that the CU 3 may transmit the number of possessed balls obtained by counting the number of remaining game balls to the upper server 801 together with the identification information of the P unit 2 or the CU 3. The host server 801 stores the number of possessed balls sent from the CU 3 for each date, P stand 2 or CU 3, so that the retained balls can be returned to the player at a later date. Further, the CU 3 may transmit the card ID inserted immediately before closing the store to the upper server 801 in association with the counted number of remaining balls (remaining game balls). The remaining game balls are likely to be game balls of the player with the card ID that was inserted immediately before closing the store, so it is possible to reduce the work of identifying the owner of the counted number of balls. Returning the number of held balls to the player can be performed more easily.

  In the above-described embodiment, the closing process in the case where a card is not inserted and a game ball remains in the P stand 2 has been described. However, the closing process in the case where a card is inserted is described later as “game ball counting ( The same processing as the processing of “card return” ”(see FIG. 15) is executed. However, regarding the counting process of the remaining game balls, the store clerk may perform the counting process by depressing the counting button 28 or may automatically perform the counting process according to the closing setting. In any case, when a card is inserted, the card is returned by the closing process and is in a waiting state for removal, so the store clerk needs to collect the card.

<< Game Ball Count (Card Return) >>
Next, the game ball counting process when returning the card will be described. FIG. 15 is a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the player performs a card return operation. In FIG. 15, the number of card possessions specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is 0, and the initial number of game balls is 800. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a CU opening state = ON, a card return preparation state = OFF, a counting sequence number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU3.

  Thereafter, when the player stops the game or moves to another game table, the player presses the “card return” button. However, at the time when the player presses the “card return” button, the number of game balls in the P unit 2 is 800 balls, and the CU 3 determines that the number of game balls in the P unit 2 is not 0. In addition, since the player presses the “card return” button, the CU 3 sets the card return ready state = ON, the state information request including the serial number = n + 1, the CU opening state = ON, the counting sequence number = m, and the counting response = OFF. A command is transmitted to the P unit 2. Note that the CU 3 notifies the P stand 2 of the card return preparation state = ON notification for 10 seconds. Furthermore, since the number of game balls in the P stand 2 is 800 balls and not 0 balls, the CU 3 displays a display for prompting a counting operation on the display 54 or the like as a card return standby.

  In response to the display prompting the counting operation, the player presses the counting button 28 to perform an operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball. The P stand 2 determines that the counting operation for depressing the counting button 28 is a counting operation with the card return preparation state = ON, and processes the counting in a lump instead of counting in units of 100 balls, for example.

  In order to notify the CU 3 of the counting ball number 800 balls obtained by collectively counting the 800 ball balls, the P stand 2 has a serial number = n + 1, a game ball number = 800, and a counting serial number = The response of the status information response including m + 1, the number of counting balls = 800 and the counting request = ON is returned to the CU3. However, at this stage, the P base 2 does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Since this status information response is a count request message, the P platform 2 counts up the count sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission count sequence number, and updates the previous last transmission count sequence number. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  In response to this, CU3 adds 800 counting balls to the number of holding balls, and subtracts 800 counting balls from 800 gaming balls to 0. Further, the CU 3 backs up the data of the updated last transmission count sequence number. Then, in order to notify receipt of the counting ball, the CU 3 sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 2, CU opening state = ON, card return preparation state = ON, counting serial number = m + 1 and counting response = ON. Send to.

  In response to the response from the CU 3, the P stand 2 subtracts 800 counting balls from the 800 gaming balls and displays 0 gaming balls on the display 54 or the like. Further, the P stand 2 notifies the CU 3 that the number of game balls is 0 and the counting is completed, so that the sequence number = n + 2, the number of game balls = 0, the count sequence number = m + 1, the count ball number = 0, and the count request = OFF. A response of the status information response including is returned to CU3. Since the counting request is turned OFF, the counting sequence number remains m + 1 and is transmitted to CU3 without counting up.

  CU3 counts the number of game balls by pressing the count button 28 and counting the number of game balls in a lump before 10 seconds have elapsed since the player pressed the card return button 322, that is, in the card return preparation state. Card is returned to 0, so card return processing is executed. That is, the CU 3 transmits a card return notification command including the serial number = n + 3 to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the card return response including the serial number = n + 3, the card ID held on the payout control board 17 and the card insertion time to the CU 3. After returning the card ID and the card insertion time to the CU 3, the card ID and the card insertion time data held on the payout control board 17 are cleared.

  In response, the CU 3 determines whether the card ID stored in the inserted card and the card ID received from the P-unit 2 match, and if they match, returns the inserted card. If they do not match, error processing is performed and reported to the hall server 801 or the like. When the card IDs match, the CU 3 stores the number of balls 800 in the card (inserted card) that has been inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309 and returns the card to the player. Further, when the player has started the game by depositing without inserting the card into the card insertion / discharge slot 309, the card (stock card) stocked in the card stock section provided in CU3 Store the number of balls 800 and return the card to the player. When the inserted card or stock card is returned, the CU 3 transmits the card ID of the card and the data of the number of balls to the hall server 801, and the hall server 801 associates the card ID of the card with the data of the number of balls. May be stored.

  Thereafter, since the card returned from the CU 3 can be extracted from the card insertion / discharge port 309, a part of the card is held in a state of protruding from the card insertion / discharge port 309 (card extraction possible state). The CU 3 is attached with a sensor capable of determining whether or not the card can be removed in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309, and when the signal of the sensor is in the ON state, the card is determined to be ready for card removal. If it is in the OFF state, it is determined that the card removal is complete.

  Then, when the card return process is executed and the card can be removed, the CU 3 notifies the P unit 2 of information indicating that the card return preparation state is OFF and the card is waiting to be removed. Therefore, the CU 3 sends a command for status information request including the serial number = n + 4, the CU opening state = ON, the card return ready state = OFF, waiting for card removal = ON, the counting serial number = m + 1, and the counting response = OFF to the P unit 2 Send. In response to this, the P stand 2 displays a message “Please remove the card” on the variable display device 278 to prevent the player from forgetting to remove the card. Further, in order to notify the card removal, the P platform 2 may turn on the LED or output a voice message “Please remove the card” from the speaker 270. Further, the P stand 2 transmits a command of a status information response including the serial number = n + 4, the number of game balls = 0, the counting serial number = m + 1, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting response = OFF to the CU3.

  If the sensor attached in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309 is in the ON state, the CU 3 transmits a command for a status information request including “Waiting for card removal = ON” to the P unit 2. However, when the player pulls out the card from the card insertion / discharge slot 309, the sensor attached in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge slot 309 is turned off, so that CU3 is waiting for card number = n + 5 and card removal = OFF A command for requesting the state information including is transmitted to the P unit 2.

  In response to this, the P platform 2 stops displaying “please remove the card” displayed on the variable display device 278 and ends the notification of the card removal. The notification of card removal is continued until a status information request command including ON card waiting = ON is received until a status information request command including OFF card waiting = OFF is received. Furthermore, the P platform 2 transmits a status information response command including a serial number = n + 5 to the CU 3.

  The sequence of the game ball counting process when returning the card described with reference to FIG. 15 is not limited to when the card is returned, and the same process can also be applied during simple leaving and meal breaks. Here, the simple leaving means that the game is interrupted for a short time of about 5 to 10 minutes in order to allow the player to make a small use. A meal break is a meal or break that is interrupted by a game such as 30 minutes longer than a simple leave.

<< Abnormal Sequence 1 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, a description will be given of the recovery processing of the number of game balls when the status information request is unreached due to power interruption / communication line interruption. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break, and a status information request command from the card unit to the pachinko machine has not yet reached. In particular, there is a power disconnection / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of the P unit 2 is once turned off and then turned on again), and the status information request has not arrived (the command has not reached the P unit 2 from the CU3) ) Shows a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the communication counterparts after recovery match.

  Referring to FIG. 16, CU 3 transmits a status information request including serial number = n to P unit 2 before the power interruption occurs during the game. In response to this, in order to notify the gaming machine information CU3, the P machine 2 transmits a status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23 to the CU3. . The P table 2 updates the previous last transmission serial number as the previous game table information to “n”.

  CU3 receives the status information response of serial number = n, updates the previous last transmission serial number to “n”, and backs up. Further, based on the information of the number of game balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23, the number of game balls, the number of added balls, and the number of subtracted balls stored therein are updated.

  Then, after a power interruption occurs in the P stand 2 during the game, when a status information request including a serial number = n + 1 is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2, the P stand 2 is in a power cut off state. Status information request cannot be received. Thereafter, since the status information response from the P stand 2 is not transmitted, the CU 3 performs control to detect and stop the communication line disconnection after 3 seconds. From the time when the P table 2 transmits the response of the status information response to the CU 3 until the power interruption occurs, the game is continued in the P table 2 and the game table information is changed. The number of game balls = 450, the number of additional balls = 6. Number of balls to be subtracted = 36, which is the latest game table information. On the other hand, the game table information of the number of game balls already transmitted = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is the previous game table information.

  Thereafter, the power failure of the P stand 2 is restored and the P stand 2 starts to operate. When the P table 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P table 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3. The The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800 via the hall server 801), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the previous last transmission serial number = n, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P stand 2 first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held in the P stand 2. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. In the P unit 2, whether or not the previous last transmission sequence number = n of the received recovery request matches the previous last transmission sequence number = n backed up inside the P unit 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17). Determine whether. If they match, it can be determined that the last status information response sent from the P-unit 2 to the CU3 before the communication interruption has reached the CU3. In this case, the status information response is included in the status information response. The game information is updated on the CU 3 side based on the game information to be played. Therefore, in this case, the P stand 2 returns a recovery response (serial number = 1) to the CU 3 as no game information storage (specifically, no previous game stand information). If the previous last transmission sequence number = n of the received recovery request does not match the previous last transmission sequence number = n backed up inside the P unit 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17), the communication is interrupted. Since it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3 before the CU 3 has not reached the CU 3, in this case, the game information is stored (specifically, the previous game stand information) A recovery response (sequence number = 1) including game information is returned to CU3. Note that the “store code” and the “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3 and the “store code” and the “SC board ID” held by the P board 2 do not match the P board 2. In this case, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  In FIG. 16, CU3 does not store the game information included in the recovery response, and therefore does not perform addition recovery processing. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as the recovery response is an appropriate value. The first check process is executed. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since there is no game information storage, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request including the serial number = 2 to the P unit 2 without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2. When the CU 3 transmits a communication start request command to the P base 2, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2 receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P platform 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and also clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P table 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P table 2. In response to this, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of unreported game table information (the number of game balls as the latest game table information = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36) as a status information response. Update the last transmission serial number and back up the data. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. In response to the status information response including unnotified gaming machine information, the CU 3 updates the previous last transmission serial number and backs up the data. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Abnormal sequence 2 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a description will be given of the recovery processing of the number of game balls when the status information response has not reached yet due to power interruption / communication line interruption. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break, and the response of the status information response from the pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of the P base 2 is once turned off and then turned on again), and the status information response does not reach (the command does not reach the CU 3 from the P base 2) ) Shows a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the communication counterparts after recovery match.

  Referring to FIG. 17, after a power interruption occurs during a game, a status information response including serial number = n, number of game balls = 480, number of additional balls = 3 and number of subtracted balls = 23 is sent from P unit 2 to CU. When transmitted, the CU cannot receive the status information response because the CU is in a power-off state. After that, since the status information request from the CU 3 is not transmitted, the P stand 2 performs control to detect the communication line disconnection and stop the game after 3 seconds. Specifically, the payout control unit 171 transmits a stop command to the firing control board 31, and the firing control board 31 stops the rotational drive of the firing motor 18. During this 3 seconds, the game is continued in the P table 2 and the game table information is changed, and the number of game balls = 450, the number of additional balls = 6, and the number of subtraction balls = 36, which becomes the latest game table information. On the other hand, the game table information of the number of game balls already transmitted = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is the previous game table information.

  On the other hand, CU3 performs control to forcibly eject the inserted card and return it to the player because the power is cut off. At that time, the number of balls currently held is stored in the card and discharged. If the number of possessed balls cannot be stored in the card due to a failure of the CU or the like, the hall server 801 periodically receives the number of retained balls from the CU 3 (for example, every 5 seconds) and stores it in a backup manner. The loss may be compensated for by the player based on the stored data (the number of balls). Thereafter, the power-off of the CU 3 is restored, and the CU 3 starts operating. When the CU 3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800 via the hall server 801), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the previous last transmission serial number = n−1, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P stand 2 first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held in the P stand 2. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. The P unit 2 compares and determines the previous last transmission sequence number = n−1 of the received recovery request and the last final transmission sequence number = n backed up inside the P unit 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17). . As a result, since they do not match, it is determined that the state information response transmitted last before the occurrence of the power interruption has not reached CU3. Therefore, the P stand 2 returns a recovery response (serial number = 1) including the game information storage presence (specifically, the previous game stand information presence) to the CU 3 as having unreported game information to the CU 3. To do. That is, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23, which are the previous game table information, are included in the recovery response and transmitted to the CU3. Note that the “store code” and the “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3 and the “store code” and the “SC board ID” held by the P board 2 do not match the P board 2. In this case, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  The CU 3 executes the recovery process based on the game information included in the recovery response. However, since the game ball addition request is not transmitted immediately before the communication line disconnection is detected, the addition recovery process is unnecessary. For this reason, after receiving the recovery response, the communication start request is transmitted without transmitting the recovery request 2. The CU 3 executes a first check process before transmitting this communication start request. In the first check process, whether or not the number of game balls included in the game machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as the recovery response by the CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response is an appropriate value Is checked. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. The CU 3 transmits a communication start request including the serial number = 2 to the P unit 2 without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2. Note that the CU 3 processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3 transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2 receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P platform 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and also clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P table 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P table 2. In response to this, in the P-unit 2, the unreported game table information (the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls) included in the state information response that did not reach the CU 3 before the power failure occurred. = 36) is notified to the CU 3 by a status information response, and the last transmission serial number is updated last time to back up the data. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. In response to the status information response including unnotified gaming machine information, the CU 3 updates the previous last transmission serial number and backs up the data. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the card ID of the reinserted card is properly read by the card information reading process, whether the read card ID matches the card ID included in the recovery response or not Is determined by the CU control unit 323 of the CU3, and the insertion time of the card inserted at the start of the game before the power interruption occurs is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323, and the stored card insertion time and recovery The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 may determine whether or not the card insertion times included in the response match. In this case, it is determined that both match, and if there is no addition recovery, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and returns a communication start response to the CU 3.

  In this embodiment, a card ID and a card insertion time are used as player specifying information that can specify a player when determining the identity of the player. This card ID includes not only the card ID of the member card that identifies the individual player of the member but also the card ID of the visitor card used by the player who visited the store as a visitor. In the case of this visitor card, it is used for an unspecified player and does not specify a specific player individual. That is, in the case of this card ID, whether the player who played the game before the occurrence of the power interruption / communication line disconnection and the player who intends to play the game after the power interruption is restored are the same player. It can be specified whether or not, but it cannot be specified to which specific individual the player is. Therefore, the above “player identification information” is not limited to identifying a specific individual player, and the player who played the game before the occurrence of the power interruption / communication line interruption and the game after the power interruption recovery is performed. It is a broad concept that includes information that can be used to determine the identity of the player who is trying to correct.

<< Abnormal sequence 3 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 18, another recovery process of the number of game balls when the status information response is unreached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing another example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break, and the response of the status information response from the pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of CU3 is once turned off and then turned on again), and the status information response has not arrived (a command has not arrived from P unit 2 to CU3). The sequence diagram for demonstrating the counting process in case the communication partners after a mismatch do not correspond is shown. This power OFF / ON can also be turned OFF / ON, for example, by failure of the CU3, manually turning the power OFF / ON, or by inserting / removing the CU3 from / from the card unit holder.

  Referring to FIG. 18, after a power interruption occurs during the game, a status information response including serial number = n, number of game balls = 480, number of additional balls = 3 and number of subtracted balls = 23 is sent from P unit 2 to CU. When transmitted, the CU cannot receive the status information response because the CU is in a power-off state. After that, since the status information request from the CU 3 is not transmitted, the P stand 2 performs control to detect the communication line disconnection and stop the game after 3 seconds. Specifically, the payout control unit 171 transmits a stop command to the firing control board 31, and the firing control board 31 stops the rotational drive of the firing motor 18. During this 3 seconds, the game is continued in the P table 2 and the game table information is changed, and the number of game balls = 450, the number of additional balls = 6, and the number of subtraction balls = 36, which becomes the latest game table information. On the other hand, the game table information of the number of game balls already transmitted = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is the previous game table information.

  On the other hand, CU3 performs control to forcibly eject the inserted card and return it to the player because the power is cut off. Thereafter, the power failure of the CU 3 is restored and the power is turned on, and the CU 3 is replaced and a new CU 3 starts operating.

  In addition, when CU3 which was operating before CU replacement has stored the number of balls, the number of balls may be stored in another card (for example, a card inside the CU) and discharged. At that time, if the number of balls cannot be stored in the card due to a failure of the CU, etc., the number of balls is received regularly from the CU3 (for example, every 5 seconds) and stored in a backup. The player may be compensated for the loss based on the data stored in the server 801 (the number of holding balls).

  When the exchanged CU3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU3. Is done. The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800 via the hall server 801), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. However, since CU3 has been exchanged, it does not have a previous last transmission serial number. In response to this, the P stand 2 first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held in the P stand 2. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. The P base 2 compares the previous last transmission serial number = 0 transmitted from the CU 3 after replacement with the previous final transmission serial number = n backed up inside the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17). To do. As a result, since the two do not match, the game information stored in the P stand 2 is transmitted to the CU 3 for performing the recovery process. Specifically, the P base 2 returns a recovery response (serial number = 1) including the presence of game information storage to the CU 3 as having game information to perform recovery processing for the CU 3 after replacement. The recovery information notified to the CU 3 by this recovery response includes the last final transmission sequence number = n, the card ID of the inserted card, the card insertion time, the last final transmission addition sequence number = m as the previous gaming machine information, and the previous gaming machine information. It is included. The previous game table information includes the number of game balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23. Note that the “store code” and the “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3 and the “store code” and the “SC board ID” held by the P board 2 do not match the P board 2. In this case, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as the recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. The CU 3 transmits a communication start request including the serial number = 2 to the P unit 2 without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2. CU3 performs recovery processing (game balls = 480, cumulative ball count = + 3, subtractive ball count = + 23) using the previous game machine information received from P machine 2, and sets the last transmission serial number of the previous game. Update and back up the data, card ID, and card insertion time. When the CU 3 transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2 receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P platform 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and also clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P table 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P table 2. In response to this, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of unreported game table information (the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36) as a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. Upon receiving a status information response including unnotified gaming machine information, the CU 3 waits for insertion of a card that was being inserted last time or waits for a store clerk remote control operation (game ball count). When a card is inserted in this state, the CU 3 reads the ID of the inserted card with a card reader / writer. Then, it is determined whether or not the read card ID matches the recovery card ID stored based on the recovery response (the card ID of the previously inserted card). If it is determined that they match, the store clerk waits for a remote control operation to resume the game. If there is a remote control operation, a card insertion notification command including the store code and the SC board ID is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2. The P unit 2 backs up the store code and SC board ID data received at the time of the previous card insertion before the communication interruption to the RAM or the like of the payout control unit 171 and is transmitted from the backed up data and the CU3. The store code and the SC board ID are compared to determine whether or not they match. If they match, the game can be resumed. Note that a card insertion notification command including a store code and an SC board ID may be transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2 without waiting for a remote control operation. In the case of mismatch, error processing such as invalidating the game ball number data of the P unit 2 is performed, for example. Alternatively, an error notification may be made instead of or in addition to this. Further, it may be controlled to forcibly eject the inserted card and return it to the player.

  The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Abnormal sequence 4 >>
Next, the recovery process of the number of balls to be added when the addition request is not reached due to power-off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break, and an addition request command from the card unit to the pachinko machine has not yet reached. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process in the case where the addition request has not yet reached (addition request command from CU3 to P stand 2 has not reached) due to power-off or communication line disconnection, and the communication counterparts after recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 19, the initial number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU3. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3 without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of the stored ball, and sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125 balls, and addition serial number = m + 1 to P unit 2, Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At this time, the CU 3 confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of balls to be added = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  However, after the player presses the replay button and before receiving the command for requesting the state information, the P stand 2 is turned off and stops operating. Therefore, the P base 2 cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3.

  CU3 cannot retransmit the response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because P-station 2 is stopped, and therefore retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU 3 detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2, and the P base 2 starts operating. When the P table 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P table 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3. The The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P machine 2 returns the recovery information backed up inside the P machine 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command. Here, the last last transmission addition serial number = m is transmitted.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the previous last transmission addition sequence number of the recovery information matches the stored previous last transmission addition sequence number. When CU3 has a larger value (newer) than the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in CU3 being backed up compared to the final transmission addition sequence number = m of the recovery data of P unit 2 (mismatch) Then, it is determined that the previous status information request command has not been reached, and the addition recovery process is performed.

  As a specific addition recovery process, recovery of the number of added balls = 125 balls is requested to the P unit 2. Therefore, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request 2 (number of balls to be added = 125, previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1) to the P unit 2.

  The P table 2 performs an addition process to the number of balls to be added included in the recovery request 2, updates the previous last transmission addition serial number, and backs up the data. At this timing, an addition process that has not been realized due to power-off is realized, and the number of game balls matches on the CU3 side and the P stand 2 side. Further, the P platform 2 returns a response 2 indicating that the addition processing is OK to the CU 3 (recovery response 2 (processing result = processing OK)). CU3 which received it clears the addition request state. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response 2 determines whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as the above-described recovery response is an appropriate value. The third check process for checking is executed. This third check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and returns a communication start response to the CU 3. Further, the CU 3 transmits a status information request to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 175) as a status information response. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal sequence 5 >>
Next, the recovery process of the number of balls to be added when the addition response is not reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break and the response of the addition response from the pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, the sequence for explaining the counting process when the addition response has not yet reached due to the power interruption or the communication line disconnection (the response of the addition response from the P unit 2 to the CU 3 has not yet reached) and the communication counterparts after the recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 20, the initial number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU3. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3 without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of the stored ball, and sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125 balls, and addition serial number = m + 1 to P unit 2, Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At this time, the CU 3 confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of balls to be added = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  Thereafter, a power failure occurs at CU3, and the operation of CU3 stops. However, the P stand 2 cannot detect that the operation of the CU 3 is stopped immediately after the power failure occurs in the CU 3. In order for the P unit 2 to detect a communication line disconnection, a period in which the next command cannot be received from the CU 3 for one second or longer is required.

  For this reason, the P unit 2 does not know that the operation of the CU3 is stopped, receives the command for requesting the status information of the CU3, the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the addition serial number. Response of the status information response including = m + 1 is returned to CU3. However, the response of the status information response sent back to CU3 does not reach CU3 because the operation of CU3 is stopped. The P machine 2 returns a response of the status information response to the CU 3, updates the last transmission addition serial number last time, and backs up the updated data and the number of game balls = 175.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3, and CU3 starts operating. When the CU 3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the last final transmission sequence number = n + 1 to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). (Previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, Previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1)). The recovery information includes the last last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the last last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the card ID and card insertion time of the recovery information match the stored card ID and card insertion time. If the card ID and the card insertion time match and CU3 matches the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 of the recovery data of P unit 2 and the last final transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in CU3, the addition recovery Clear the addition request state without requesting processing. In addition, the CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as a recovery response is an appropriate value. The first check process is executed. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The CU3 matches the card ID and the card insertion time, and whether or not the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 of the recovery data of the P unit 2 matches the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the CU3. In addition, an addition recovery process determination as to whether or not to perform an addition recovery process is performed. In the addition recovery process determination, the card ID and the card insertion time match, and the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 of the recovery data of the P unit 2 matches the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the CU3. Therefore, it is determined that the addition recovery process is not performed, and it is determined that the addition recovery process is performed otherwise.

  If the CU 3 basically determines that the addition recovery process is not performed in the addition recovery process determination, the CU 3 does not transmit the command of the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2. However, although the CU 3 determines that the addition recovery process is not performed in the addition recovery process determination, if the command of the recovery request 2 is erroneously transmitted to the P unit 2, the recovery process is performed. There is an inconvenience of being changed to a different number of game balls.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the CU 3 transmits the recovery request 2 command to the P unit 2 after the determination of the addition recovery process determination, the P unit 2 uses the previous last transmission addition serial number included in the recovery request 2 command. Then, it is determined whether or not the previous last transmission addition serial number stored in the P unit 2 matches, and it is determined again whether or not the addition recovery processing is performed.

  Specifically, the CU 3 transmits a command of the recovery request 2 including the serial number = 2, the previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1, and the number of additional balls = 125 to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 adds the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 included in the recovery request 2 command of the CU 3 and the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the P unit 2. It is determined that the recovery process is not performed, and information on the process NG is notified to the CU 3. Therefore, the P platform 2 transmits a recovery response 2 including a serial number = 2 and a processing result = processing NG to the CU 3.

  Further, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P base 2 returns a communication start response to the CU 3.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal Sequence 6 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of balls to be added when the addition response is not reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing another example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break and the response of the addition response from the pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, the sequence for explaining the counting process when the addition response has not yet reached due to the power interruption or the communication line disconnection (the response of the addition response from the P unit 2 to the CU 3 has not yet reached) and the communication counterparts after the recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 21, the initial number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU3. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3 without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of the stored ball, and sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125 balls, and addition serial number = m + 1 to P unit 2, Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At this time, the CU 3 confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of balls to be added = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  Thereafter, a power failure occurs at CU3, and the operation of CU3 stops. However, the P stand 2 cannot detect that the operation of the CU 3 is stopped immediately after the power failure occurs in the CU 3. In order for the P unit 2 to detect a communication line disconnection, a period in which the next command cannot be received from the CU 3 for one second or longer is required.

  For this reason, the P unit 2 receives the command for requesting the status information of the CU3 and processes the addition request without knowing that the operation of the CU3 is stopped. However, for some reason (for example, the number of game balls has reached the upper limit), a situation in which game balls cannot be added occurs. In this case, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 50, the game ball addition result = NG and the addition serial number = m to the CU 3. However, the response of the status information response sent back to CU3 does not reach CU3 because the operation of CU3 is stopped. In addition, since the game ball addition abnormality has occurred in the P unit 2, the addition ball from the CU 3 cannot be processed, and the previous last transmission addition serial number = m is not updated.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3, and CU3 starts operating. In addition, in P stand 2, it is in the state of game ball addition abnormality. When the CU 3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the last final transmission sequence number = n + 1 to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). (Previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, Previous last transmission addition sequence number = m)). The recovery information includes the last last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the last last transmission addition sequence number = m.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the card ID and card insertion time of the recovery information match the stored card ID and card insertion time. If the card ID and the card insertion time match and CU3 does not match the last transmission addition sequence number = m of the recovery data of P unit 2 and the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in CU3, the addition recovery Request processing. For this reason, the CU 3 transmits the recovery request 2 including the last final transmission addition serial number = m + 1 and the number of additional balls = 125 to the P unit 2.

  In response to this, the P stand 2 notifies the recovery response 2 that the game ball addition is not processed (game ball addition NG) due to the game ball addition abnormality. The recovery response 2 includes recovery result = processing NG.

  Upon receiving the recovery response 2 including the recovery result = processing NG, the CU 3 receiving it clears the game ball addition request state and turns it off, and performs a third check described later. Further, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P base 2 returns a communication start response to the CU 3.

  Further, since the CU3 has cleared the game ball addition request state and is in the OFF state, the state information including the game ball addition request = OFF and the addition serial number = m + 1 without notifying the P table 2 again of the addition request. The request is transmitted to the P table 2. In response to this, the P-unit 2 is in an abnormal addition state, and if it cannot add the number of balls of recovery request 2 = 125 to the number of game balls = 50, it notifies the CU 3 of the current number of game balls = 50 without adding. To do. Specifically, the P stand 2 transmits a status information response including the number of game balls = 50 and the addition serial number = m to the CU 3. The addition serial number remains “m” without being updated to “m + 1” transmitted in the status information request because the game ball addition result is NG. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG. The CU 3 performs a process of canceling the consumption of the determined storage ball based on the information of the current number of game balls = 50 included in the state information response transmitted from the P stand 2.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal sequence 7 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of balls to be added when the addition request has not been reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing another example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break, and an addition request command from the card unit to the pachinko machine has not yet reached. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process when the addition request has not yet reached due to a power interruption or communication line disconnection (addition request command from CU3 to P stand 2 has not been reached) and the communication counterparts after the restoration do not match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 22, the initial number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU3. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3 without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of the stored ball, and sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125 balls, and addition serial number = m + 1 to P unit 2, Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At this time, the CU 3 confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of balls to be added = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  However, after the player presses the replay button and before receiving the command for requesting the state information, the P stand 2 is turned off and stops operating. Therefore, the P base 2 cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3.

  CU3 cannot retransmit the response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because P-station 2 is stopped, and therefore retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU 3 detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2, and the P base 2 is further replaced and the new P base 2 starts operating. When the P table 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P table 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3. The The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained. Note that the CU 3 performs addition recovery even when the P stand 2 is replaced.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P machine 2 returns the recovery information backed up inside the P machine 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command. However, since the P base 2 is newly exchanged, the previous last transmission addition serial number is not backed up, and the initial value “0” is transmitted to the CU 3.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the previous last transmission addition sequence number of the recovery information matches the stored previous last transmission addition sequence number. If the last transmission addition sequence number = 0 of the recovery data of P unit 2 and the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the CU3 being backed up do not match, CU3 has not issued a previous status information request command. It is determined that it has been reached, and addition recovery processing is performed. As a specific addition recovery process, recovery of the number of added balls = 125 balls is requested to the P unit 2. Therefore, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request 2 (number of balls to be added = 125, previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1) to the P unit 2.

  The P table 2 performs an addition process to the number of balls to be added included in the recovery request 2, updates the previous last transmission addition serial number, and backs up the data. Further, the P platform 2 returns a response 2 indicating that the addition processing is OK to the CU 3 (recovery response 2 (processing result = processing OK)). CU3 which received it clears the addition request state. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response 2 determines whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as the above-described recovery response is an appropriate value. The third check process for checking is executed. This third check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and returns a communication start response to the CU 3. Further, the CU 3 transmits a status information request to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 175) as a status information response. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal sequence 8 >>
Next, the recovery process of the number of balls when the count response is not reached due to power-off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break and the response of the count response from the pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process when the counting response is unreached (the counting response command from the CU 3 to the P unit 2 has not reached) due to power-off or communication line disconnection, and the communication counterparts after recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 23, the initial number of possessed balls is 0 and the number of game balls is 500. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a sequence number = n, a count sequence number = m, and a count response = OFF to the P unit 2. Thereafter, in the P platform 2, the count button 28 is pressed, and a count request is transmitted to the CU3. Specifically, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 500, the counting serial number m + 1, the counting ball number = 100, and the counting request = ON to the CU3. In addition, the P-unit 2 notifies the CU 3 of the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of counting balls = 100, and the counted counting sequence number = m + 1, updates the previous last transmission counting sequence number, and updates the updated data and counting request state ON. Back up your data.

  In response to this, the CU 3 adds the number of balls to the number of balls and sets the number of balls to 100, updates the last transmission count sequence number last time, and backs up the updated data. However, after the P table 2 receives the status information request command, the power supply is cut off and the operation stops. For this reason, the P base 2 cannot receive a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the count serial number = m + 1, and the count response = ON from the CU 3. That is, in the P base 2, the count response from the CU 3 is not reached.

  CU3 cannot retransmit the response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because P-station 2 is stopped, and therefore retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU 3 detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2, and the P base 2 starts operating. When the P table 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P table 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3. The The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the last transmission count serial number = m + 1, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P stand 2 first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held in the P stand 2. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. In the P unit 2, the previous last transmission count sequence number = m + 1 of the received recovery request matches the previous last transmission count sequence number = m + 1 backed up in the P unit 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17). Therefore, it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P platform 2 to the CU 3 before the communication interruption has reached the CU 3. In this case, the P stand 2 executes a process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of game balls, and turns off the counting request state. That is, the P stand 2 is updated from the number of game balls = 500 to the number of game balls = 400 at this time. Further, the P base 2 returns a recovery response as a response to the CU 3 based on the received recovery request command. Note that the “store code” and the “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3 and the “store code” and the “SC board ID” held by the P board 2 do not match the P board 2. In this case, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as the recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since CU3 does not perform addition recovery processing, CU3 transmits a communication start request including serial number = 2 to P unit 2 without transmitting recovery request 2 to P unit 2. Note that the CU 3 processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3 transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2 receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P platform 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and also clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P table 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P table 2. In response to this, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 400) as a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3 and number of game balls = 400. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Abnormal system 9 >>
Next, a recovery process for the number of counting balls when the count request is not reached due to power-off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break, and a count request command from the pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process when the counting request is not reached (the counting request command from the P unit 2 to the CU 3 has not reached) due to power interruption or communication line disconnection, and the communication counterparts after the recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 24, the initial number of balls is 0 and the number of game balls is 500. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a sequence number = n, a count sequence number = m, and a count response = OFF to the P unit 2. Thereafter, in the P platform 2, the count button 28 is pressed, and a count request is transmitted to the CU3. Specifically, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 500, the counting serial number m + 1, the counting ball number = 100, and the counting request = ON to the CU3. In addition, the P-unit 2 notifies the CU 3 of the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of counting balls = 100, and the counted counting sequence number = m + 1, updates the previous last transmission counting sequence number, and updates the updated data and counting request state ON. Back up your data.

  However, before the CU 3 receives the status information response command, the power is cut off and the operation stops. That is, CU3 does not reach the count request from P table 2. Thereafter, since the status information request from the CU 3 is not transmitted, the P stand 2 performs control to detect the communication line disconnection and stop the game after 3 seconds. Specifically, the payout control unit 171 transmits a stop command to the firing control board 31, and the firing control board 31 stops the rotational drive of the firing motor 18.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3, and CU3 starts operating. When the CU 3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the last transmission count serial number = m, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P stand 2 first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held in the P stand 2. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. In the P unit 2, the previous last transmission count sequence number = m of the received recovery request matches the previous last transmission count sequence number = m + 1 backed up in the P unit 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17). Since there is no (mismatch), it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3 before the communication disconnection has not reached the CU 3. In this case, the P stand 2 does not execute the process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of game balls, and turns off the counting request state. That is, the P table 2 cancels the count request transmitted immediately before the occurrence of the power interruption, and maintains the number of game balls = 500 at this time. Further, the P base 2 returns a recovery response as a response to the CU 3 based on the received recovery request command. Note that the “store code” and the “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3 and the “store code” and the “SC board ID” held by the P board 2 do not match the P board 2. In this case, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as the recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since CU3 does not perform addition recovery processing, CU3 transmits a communication start request including serial number = 2 to P table 2 without transmitting recovery request 2 to P table 2. Note that the CU 3 processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3 transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2 receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P platform 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and also clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P table 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P table 2. Receiving it, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 500) by a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes a transmission sequence number = 3 and the number of game balls = 500. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Abnormal Sequence 10 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of counting balls when the counting response is not reached due to the power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing another example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break and the response of the count response from the card unit to the pachinko machine has not yet reached. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process when the counting response is unreached (the counting response command from the CU 3 to the P unit 2 has not reached) due to power-off or communication line disconnection, and the communication counterparts after recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 25, the initial number of balls is 0 and the number of game balls is 500. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a sequence number = n, a count sequence number = m, and a count response = OFF to the P unit 2. Thereafter, in the P platform 2, the count button 28 is pressed, and a count request is transmitted to the CU3. Specifically, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 500, the counting serial number m + 1, the counting ball number = 100, the counting serial number m + 1, and the counting request = ON to the CU3. . In addition, the P-unit 2 notifies the CU 3 of the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of counting balls = 100, and the counted counting sequence number = m + 1, updates the previous last transmission counting sequence number, and updates the updated data and counting request state ON. Back up your data.

  In response to this, the CU 3 executes a process of adding the number of balls to the number of balls, but some abnormality occurs and the addition process cannot be performed. For this reason, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a counting sequence number = m and a counting response = OFF (because of an abnormal counting state). However, after receiving the command for requesting the status information, the P base 2 has been powered off and has stopped operating. Therefore, the P base 2 cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3. That is, in the P base 2, the count response from the CU 3 is not reached.

  CU3 cannot retransmit the response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because P-station 2 is stopped, and therefore retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU 3 detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2, and the P base 2 starts operating. When the P table 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P table 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3. The The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the last transmission count serial number = m, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P stand 2 first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held in the P stand 2. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. In the P table 2, the last transmission count sequence number of the received recovery request = m (“m” is not updated due to a count error) and the inside of the P table 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17). Since the last transmission count sequence number that was backed up last time = m + 1 does not match (disagreement), the state information response that was last transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU3 before the communication interruption does not reach the CU3 I can judge. In this case, the P stand 2 does not execute the process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of gaming balls, turns off the count request state, and decreases the previous last transmission count number by 1 (−1). At this time, the P stand 2 cancels the count request before the occurrence of the power interruption and maintains the number of game balls = 500. Further, the P base 2 returns a recovery response as a response to the CU 3 based on the received recovery request command. Note that the “store code” and the “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3 and the “store code” and the “SC board ID” held by the P board 2 do not match the P board 2. In this case, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as the recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since CU3 does not perform addition recovery processing, CU3 transmits a communication start request including serial number = 2 to P table 2 without transmitting recovery request 2 to P table 2. Note that the CU 3 processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3 transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2 receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P platform 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and also clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P table 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P table 2. Receiving it, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 500) by a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes a transmission sequence number = 3 and the number of game balls = 500. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Addition request error >>
Next, processing for abnormal addition request will be described. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing when the game ball addition result is abnormal at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout. In particular, there is shown a sequence diagram for explaining the processing when the addition result of game balls at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout is abnormal.

  In FIG. 26, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU3. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3 without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the possession payout button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of holding balls / storing balls, and sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125 balls, and addition serial number = m + 1 to P unit 2. Then, the information (addition number of balls = 125 balls) of converting the possession balls / storage balls into game balls is notified. At this time, the CU 3 backs up the data of the number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of add balls) = 175, the updated last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  Thereafter, an abnormality occurs in the process of adding game balls on the P platform 2. Therefore, upon receiving the CU3 status information request command, the P stand 2 sets the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before game ball addition), the game ball addition result = NG, and the addition serial number = m + 1. The response of the status information response including it is returned to CU3. The P stand 2 notifies the CU 3 of the game ball addition result = NG and the last transmission addition serial number information.

  The CU3 that has received the response of the status information response including the game ball addition result = NG receives the command of the status information request including the serial number = n + 2, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1. Resend to table 2. Although CU3 is a retransmission of the status information request command, the serial number is updated and counted up from n + 1 to n + 2, and the additional serial number remains m + 1 and the status information request command is retransmitted.

  However, the P stand 2 remains in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the process of adding game balls. Therefore, upon receiving the retransmitted status information request command of CU3, the P platform 2 receives a serial number = n + 2, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before game ball addition), a game ball addition result = NG and an addition sequence number = A response of the status information response including m is returned to CU3.

  Further, the CU3 that has received the response of the state information response including the game ball addition result = NG again receives the status information request including the serial number = n + 3, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1. The command is retransmitted to P stand 2 for the second time. Although CU3 is a retransmission of the status information request command, the serial number is updated and counted up from n + 2 to n + 3, and the status information request command is retransmitted with the addition sequence number remaining m + 1.

  P stand 2 is still in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the process of adding game balls. Therefore, upon receiving the retransmitted status information request command from CU3, the P stand 2 receives a serial number = n + 3, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before game ball addition), a game ball addition result = NG and an addition serial number = A response of the status information response including m is returned to CU3.

  Processing for adding a game ball in the P table 2 when the CU 3 receives a response of a response of a status information response including the game ball addition result = NG from the P table 2 even if the command for requesting the state information is retransmitted twice As a result, it becomes a state of waiting for addition abnormality recovery.

  After the addition abnormality is restored in the P unit 2, the CU 3 retransmits to the P unit 2 a status information request command including a serial number = n + X, a game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and an addition serial number = m + 1. . In the P 2, since the addition abnormality has been recovered, the addition processing to the game balls is performed and the number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before game ball addition) +125 (number of added balls) = 175 The last transmission addition serial number is updated and the data is backed up.

  After performing the addition processing to the game balls, the P stand 2 transmits a state information response including the serial number = n + X, the number of game balls = 175, the addition serial number = m + 1, and the game ball addition result = OK to the CU 3. In response to this, the CU 3 turns off the addition request state.

<Operation related to addition serial number>
FIG. 27 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the operations of the P base 2 and the CU 3 regarding the addition serial number. When a game ball addition request is not generated, a message including a normal serial number and an additional serial number as shown in (1) to (4) of FIG. 27 is transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P stand 2.

  In (1), a message including a normal serial number n and an additional serial number m is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. The P table 2 that has received the message (1) returns a message (2) that includes the same normal serial number n and the additional serial number m as the received message, as in (2).

  The CU 3 that has received the message (2) transmits the message (3) (ordinary sequence number n + 1, addition sequence number m) with one updated normal sequence number. The P table 2 that has received the message (3) returns the message (4) including the same normal serial number n and the additional serial number m as the received message.

  As described above, every time the CU 3 receives a message from the P platform 2, the CU 3 updates one normal serial number and transmits the next message. On the other hand, the P platform 2 does not update the normal serial number. Further, unless an addition request is generated, the addition sequence number is not updated.

  Next, when an addition request (due to a ball lending operation or a withdrawal operation for a stored ball) occurs, a request message of (5) in which one addition serial number is updated is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2 (normal serial number n + 2). , Addition serial number m + 1). This request message includes data in which the addition request bit is turned ON. At this stage, the CU 3 has already confirmed the processing for the addition request (card balance withdrawal or savings withdrawal).

  The P platform 2 receives the request message (5) and recognizes the addition request based on the fact that one addition serial number has been updated from the previous time. Then, it is determined whether or not to accept the current addition request. This determination is performed by, for example, the payout control unit 171 of the P stand 2. The payout control unit 171 determines whether or not processing for adding game balls is possible on the P platform 2 side. The case where the game ball addition process is not possible is, for example, a case where the game ball has already reached a predetermined upper limit value.

  When the request is accepted, an acceptance message of the two messages (6) is transmitted, and when the request is rejected, a rejection message of the two messages (6) is transmitted. In the acceptance message, the addition sequence number is the addition sequence number m + 1 included in the request message of (5). On the other hand, in the rejection message, the addition sequence number is the addition sequence number m included in the message transmitted / received immediately before (6). The normal serial number is n + 2 included in the request message in (5) for both the acceptance message and the rejection message.

  The CU 3 includes an area for backup storage of the addition sequence number included in the immediately preceding transmission message, and an area for backup storage of the normal sequence number included in the reception message. These areas are provided, for example, in the microcomputer of the CU control unit 323 of the CU3. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the message (6) compares and determines the addition sequence number stored in the backup and the addition sequence number included in the message (6). As a result, if the stored addition sequence number is the same as the addition sequence number included in the transmitted message (m + 1 in this example), it is determined that the request has been accepted. On the other hand, when the transmitted addition serial number is delayed by one (m in this example), it is determined that the request has been rejected.

  (5) 'of FIG. 27 shows a case where the request message has not reached P table 2 due to noise or other factors. In this case, since the P base 2 waits for a message from the CU 3, no message is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 waits for a predetermined period (200 ms) after transmitting the request message (5) ′, and retransmits the same request message (5) ″ because there is no response from the P-unit 2.

<Operation related to counting serial number>
FIG. 28 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the operations of the P platform 2 and the CU 3 regarding the counting sequence number. When no counting request is generated, a message including a normal serial number and a counting serial number as shown in (1) to (3) of FIG. 28 is transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P stand 2.

  In (1), a message including a normal serial number n and a counting serial number m is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. The P table 2 that has received the electronic message (1) returns the electronic message (2) including the same normal serial number n and the counting serial number m as the received electronic message, as shown in (2).

  The CU 3 that has received the message (2) transmits the message (3) (ordinary sequence number n + 1, counting sequence number m) with one updated normal sequence number. As described above, every time the CU 3 receives a message from the P platform 2, the CU 3 updates one normal serial number and transmits the next message. On the other hand, the P platform 2 does not update the normal serial number. Further, the counting sequence number is not updated unless a counting request is generated.

  Next, when a counting request (detection of counting operation) is generated, the request message (4) in which one counting sequence number is updated is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3 (normal sequence number n + 1, counting sequence number m + 1). ). This request message includes data in which the count request bit is turned ON. Note that the P platform 2 does not execute the counting process at this stage.

  The P table 2 receives the request message (4) and recognizes the counting request based on the fact that the counting sequence number has been updated by one from the previous time. Then, it is determined whether or not to accept the current counting request. This determination is made, for example, by the CU control unit 323 of the CU3. The CU control unit 323 determines whether or not the counting process (the adding process of the holding balls) is possible. The case where the counting process is not possible is, for example, a case where the process using a holding ball (such as a wagon service) is in progress.

  When the request is accepted, an acceptance message of the two messages (5) is transmitted, and when the request is rejected, a rejection message of the two messages (5) is transmitted. In the acceptance message, the counting sequence number is set to the counting sequence number m + 1 included in the request message of (4). On the other hand, in the rejection message, the counting sequence number is set to the counting sequence number m included in the message transmitted / received immediately before (4). The normal serial number is updated from the request message in (5) for both the acceptance message and the rejection message, and is n + 2.

  The P table 2 includes an area for backup storage of the counting sequence number and the normal sequence number included in the immediately preceding transmission message. Such an area is provided, for example, in the microcomputer of the payout control unit 171 of the P table 2. The payout control unit 171 of the P table 2 that has received the message (5) compares and determines the count sequence number stored in the backup and the count sequence number included in the message (5). As a result, if the stored counting sequence number is the same as the counting sequence number included in the transmitted message (m + 1 in this example), it is determined that the request has been accepted. On the other hand, if the transmitted counting sequence number is delayed by one (m in this example), it is determined that the request has been rejected.

  (4) ′ in FIG. 28 shows a case where the request message does not reach the P table 2 due to noise or other factors. In this case, the CU 3 waits for a predetermined period (200 ms) after transmitting the message (3), and retransmits the same message (3) because there is no response from the P platform 2. The P-station 2 that has received the retransmitted message (3) has the normal sequence number included in the message n + 1, and the normal sequence number is transmitted even though the request message (4) ′ has been transmitted first. Therefore, it is determined that the request message (4) ′ has not arrived. Then, the P platform 2 retransmits the same request message (4) ″ as (4) ′.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a request sequence number (additional sequence number, counting sequence number) different from the normal sequence number is included in the message and transmitted. These request serial numbers are added and updated when an operation such as an addition request or a count request is requested to the communication partner, and otherwise, the addition and update are not performed even if a message is transmitted / received.

  On the other hand, the normal serial number is updated every time a message is transmitted from the CU 3 regardless of whether there is a request to the communication partner (the normal serial number is updated by both the CU 3 and the P unit 2). You may act.)

  For this reason, in the case of a normal serial number, whether or not the transmitted request message has arrived at the other party can be determined using the serial number included in the received message from the other party, but is the received message an acknowledgment message indicating request acceptance? It cannot be specified whether the message is a rejection message indicating a request rejection.

  However, as described above, a request message with an updated request sequence number is transmitted using a request sequence number such as an addition sequence number or a counting sequence number as in this embodiment, and the request sequence number included in the request message as a response to this request message If a message containing the same request serial number is received, depending on the value of the serial number, not only whether the transmitted request message has arrived at the other party, but whether the message returned from the other party is an acceptance message. Can be specified. Of course, as in the present embodiment, since the request message includes data with the request bit (addition request bit or count request bit) turned ON, the received message is an acceptance message even by determining this data. It is possible to identify whether the message is a rejection message. However, if the request sequence number is used, such request bits can be deleted from the message. As a result, the amount of message data can be reduced, and the processing for determining the request bit of the message data can be made unnecessary.

  In this embodiment, the update value for the request sequence number when a request is generated is +1. However, this is an example, and other update values such as +2, +3, -1, and -2 are adopted. May be.

<First to third check processing>
Next, the first check process, the second check process, and the third check process executed by the CU control unit 323 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 (a), 29 (b), and 30. FIG.

  First, the first check process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 300, it is determined whether or not game table information is stored. This is to determine whether or not the game table information is included in the recovery response transmitted from the P table 2. In the case of FIGS. 17 and 18, the game table information (specifically, Is included in the previous game table information), YES is determined in S300. If it is determined that the game table information is not included, the first check process ends.

  If it is determined that there is storage of gaming machine information, the control proceeds to S301, and the added ball number included in the received gaming machine information (specifically, previous gaming machine information) is a predetermined threshold value. A determination is made whether N1 or greater. This threshold value N1 is the maximum number of game balls to be added during a period (200 ms) between the state information request and the state information response between the CU 3 and the P stand 2 (for example, the maximum addition ball at the time of big hit) It is set to a value (for example, 125) that is slightly larger than the equation (120). Therefore, in the normal case, the received number of added balls should be smaller than the threshold value N1. However, the number of added balls larger than the threshold N1 means that the game table information including the number of added balls and the number of game balls illegally increased due to fraud etc. being performed on the P table 2 while offline is a recovery response. May be transmitted to CU3. In that case, the control advances to S304, and control for notifying the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the display 312 is performed, and control for transmitting an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred to the hall server 801 is performed. (In this case, error notification may be performed by the hall server 801). Instead of or in addition to the hall server 801, it may be controlled to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, the control advances to S305, and the CU control unit 323 enters a reset waiting state. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control unit 323 stops the control until a reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320 by a remote control operation by an attendant at the game hall, and when the reset signal is input, the CU The control unit 323 is reset and returns to the same state as when the power is turned on (see FIG. 8).

  Even if an abnormality is determined as a result of the check processing in S301 and S303, the information stored on the CU3 side is that the cause is that the CU3 or the P stand 2 is replaced with a new one after communication disconnection, and then the communication is restored. And the information transmitted from the P base 2 during the recovery process may be completely different. Even though it is not such a fraudulent act, it may be determined that there is an abnormality, and for this reason, it is possible to cancel the reset waiting state by operating the remote control by the game hall staff, and intervene by human judgment by the game hall staff So that they can respond normally.

  On the other hand, if NO is determined in S301, the control proceeds to S302, and the number of added balls received from the P units is added to the number of game balls stored in the CU control unit 323, and the number of subtracted balls is set. An operation for subtracting and calculating R1 as the calculation result is performed. That is, when it is determined that the number of added balls included in the game table information received from the P table 2 is appropriate, the latest number of game balls R1 is calculated using the added ball number and the subtracted ball number. It is calculated. Next, in S303, the calculated R1−the absolute value of the received game balls, that is, the difference between R1 and the received game balls is calculated, and whether or not the difference is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold N2. Judgment is made. Originally, R1 and the number of received game balls are the same value, and the difference between them should be zero. However, an error ball may occur between the CU side and the P base side during the game as the control proceeds. The error balls (for example, 5) are set as the threshold value N2. Therefore, when the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N2, there is a possibility that an illegal act will occur as described above, and control proceeds to S304 and thereafter as described above.

  On the other hand, if the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is less than the threshold N2, it is determined that the received number of game balls is an appropriate value, and the received number of game balls is determined as the new number of game balls. Is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323.

  Next, the second check process will be described with reference to FIG. The number of balls to be added in the game table information (specifically, the current game table information) included in the status information response from the P table 2 returned in response to the status information request immediately after the communication start response is determined in advance. A determination is made in S310 as to whether or not it is equal to or greater than the threshold value N3. The number of added balls received is from the time when the P unit transmits a status information response to the CU3 until the power supply is interrupted to the P unit or until the game stops when the P unit detects a communication line disconnection. The number of added balls that fluctuated in (5) is such that the amount of change in the number of added balls within a relatively short limited period of time is not so large, but within a certain upper limit. Therefore, a value (for example, 125) slightly larger than the upper limit (for example, 120) is determined as the threshold value N3. If the number of added balls received is equal to or greater than the threshold value N3, the control proceeds to S314, and control is performed to notify the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the display 312 and an error occurs in the hall server 801. Control is performed to transmit an error notification signal to the effect (in this case, error notification by the hall server 801 may be performed). Instead of or in addition to the hall server 801, it may be controlled to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, the control advances to S315, and the CU control unit 323 enters a reset waiting state. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control unit 323 stops the control until a reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320 by a remote control operation by an attendant at the game hall, and when the reset signal is input, the CU The control unit 323 is reset and returns to the same state as when the power is turned on (see FIG. 8).

  On the other hand, if NO is determined in S310, the control advances to S311 to add the received addition ball number to the number of game balls stored in the CU control unit 323 and subtract the received subtraction ball number. Thus, an operation for calculating R2 is performed. The “stored number of game balls” referred to here is the number of game balls received from the P-unit 2 when NO is determined in S303 as described above. Then, in S312, it is determined whether or not the difference between the R2 and the number of game balls received from the P stand 2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value N4. Originally, R2 and the received number of game balls are the same value, and the difference between them should be zero. However, an error ball may occur between the CU side and the P base side during the game as the control proceeds. The error balls (for example, 5) are set as the threshold value N4. Therefore, when the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N4, there is a possibility of fraudulent behavior as described above, and control proceeds to S314 and subsequent steps as described above.

  If NO is determined in S <b> 312, the control proceeds to S <b> 313, and the CU control unit 323 stores the number of game balls received from the P stand 2 as the initial number of game balls, and then performs the second check process. Control ends.

  After the processing of S313 is performed, normal status information requests and status information responses are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P base 2. At this time, the CU control unit 323 receives the initial value by S313. Using the number of game balls stored as the number of game balls as an initial value, the current number of game balls is calculated based on the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls, and transmitted from the P unit 2 based on the current number of game balls. It is determined whether or not the difference from the number of incoming game balls exceeds a predetermined error ball number (for example, 5), and if it exceeds, an abnormality is determined and the above-described S304, S305, S314, and S315 The same control is performed.

  Next, the control of the third check process will be described based on FIG. The CU control unit 323 executes the third check process immediately after receiving the recovery response 2 from the P base 2 (see FIGS. 19, 21, and 22).

  As described above, the recovery request 2 and the recovery response 2 are the game balls in which the P stand 2 complies with the game ball addition request even though the CU 3 outputs a game ball addition request to the P stand 2. This is for performing recovery of the number of game balls when the addition process is not performed. Then, the recovery result 2 sent from the P base 2 to the CU 3 notifies the processing result as to whether or not the addition recovery processing has been normally performed. In S320, the CU control unit 323 determines whether or not the recovery result is processing NG. If processing NG, that is, addition recovery is not performed normally, the control proceeds to S324, where control is performed to notify the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312 and an error has occurred in the hall server 801. Control is performed to transmit an error notification signal to this effect (in this case, error notification by the hall server 801 may be performed). Instead of or in addition to the hall server 801, it may be controlled to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, the control advances to S325, and the CU control unit 323 enters a reset waiting state. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control unit 323 stops the control until a reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320 by a remote control operation by an attendant at the game hall, and when the reset signal is input, the CU The control unit 323 is reset and returns to the same state as when the power is turned on (see FIG. 8).

  On the other hand, if the recovery result is processing OK, the control advances to S321, and the CU control unit 323 performs processing for adding the number of added balls transmitted to the P unit 2 to the number of game balls currently stored. . This is because the addition recovery for the number of balls in the game ball addition request output by the CU 3 is normally performed in the P unit 2, so that the number of balls to be added is added to the number of game balls and the current normal game ball is This is a process for calculating the number.

  Next, the control advances to S322, and an operation is performed to calculate R3 by adding the number of added balls transmitted from the P unit 2 to the number of game balls after the addition and subtracting the number of subtracted balls. The number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls are game machine information (specifically, previous game machine information) transmitted from the P machine 2 as a recovery response, and the previous game machine information is included in the recovery response. When there is no ball, the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls are both zero, and as a result, the number of game balls after addition = R3 is calculated.

  Next, in S323, it is determined whether or not the difference between the calculated R3 and the number of game balls received by CU3 is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold value N2. Originally, R1 and the number of received game balls are the same value, and the difference between them should be zero. However, an error ball may occur between the CU side and the P base side during the game as the control proceeds. The error balls (for example, 5) are set as the threshold value N2. Therefore, when the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N2, there is a possibility that an illegal act will occur as described above, and control proceeds to S324 and subsequent steps as described above.

  On the other hand, if the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is less than the threshold N2, it is determined that the received number of game balls is an appropriate value, and the received number of game balls is determined as the new number of game balls. Is stored in the CU control unit 323.

  As described above, the previous gaming machine information is transmitted first as gaming machine information from the P machine 2 to the CU 3, and then the gaming machine information is transmitted this time so that both gaming machine information can be distinguished on the CU 3 side. Since it is transmitted, the CU control unit 323 can determine the suitability of both pieces of game machine information. As a result, for example, the number of game balls in the previous game table information sent from the P table 2 should not be significantly different from the number of game balls stored in the CU control unit 323 at the present time, For example, the game ball number data in the current game table data sent thereafter is not so different from the game ball number data in the previous game table information received by the CU 3. If there is a large gap in the difference between these data, it can be determined that the game ball number data is illegally inflated.

  If the total data obtained by adding the previous game machine data and the current game data is collectively transmitted from the P machine 2 to the CU 3, compared to the case where the previous game machine data and the current game machine data are individually determined. Therefore, it is only possible to roughly discriminate, and accordingly it is difficult to discriminate fraud. In order to prevent such inconvenience, the game table data is transmitted in two stages so that the CU control unit 323 can distinguish between the two types of data, making it possible to perform detailed abnormality determination for each game table data. It is easy to distinguish.

  In the first check process to the third check process described above, after determining whether or not the number of balls to be added is appropriate, the current number of game balls is calculated based on the number of balls to be added when it is appropriate. The number of game balls is compared with the number of game balls transmitted from the P unit 2 to determine whether or not the number of game balls transmitted is appropriate, but it is simply transmitted from the P unit 2. The number of game balls may be compared with the number of game balls stored in the CU 3, and the suitability may be determined.

  Further, the CU 3 stores the final number of game balls stored before the recovery process (hereinafter referred to as “CU game ball number”) and the number of game balls in the previous game table information received from the P table 2 (hereinafter referred to as “P The number of game balls in the latest game table received from the P table 2 (hereinafter referred to as “P latest game ball number”) is determined by comparison between the three parties. You may make it perform determination. As a specific example of comparison between the three players, the number of CU gaming balls and the number of previous P balls are compared and determined. If correct, the previous number of P balls and the number of latest P balls are compared and determined. To do. Alternatively, the number of CU game balls and the number of previous P game balls are compared and determined, and if they are correct, the number of CU game balls and the latest number of P game balls are compared and determined. Furthermore, the P number of the previous game balls and the P number of the latest game balls are compared and determined first, and if they are correct, the CU game ball number and the P number of previous game balls are compared and determined. The latest number of game balls is compared and determined.

  The first check process to the third check process are preferably executed when the CU 3 and the P stand 2 are not exchanged (replaced). When exchange (replacement) is performed at the time of communication disconnection, the number of game balls on the CU side and the P stand side is generally greatly different in the recovery process. This is because an error is determined as a result of the check process to the third check process. Therefore, when the CU 3 or the P stand 2 is exchanged after the communication is disconnected, the first check process to the third check process may be controlled not to be performed in the recovery process when the communication is restored. Specifically, when the difference between the last last transmission sequence number transmitted from the P unit 2 as a recovery response and the last latest transmission sequence number stored in the CU control unit 323 is 2 or more, the CU 3 or the P unit 2 The CU control unit 323 determines that it has been replaced, and controls so that the CU control unit 323 does not perform the first check process to the third check process.

  Further, regardless of whether or not the CU 3 or the P stand 2 is exchanged, it may be controlled so that the previous game table data and the current game table data are not checked on the CU 3 side at the time of recovery. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the troublesomeness that the check abnormality determination due to the replacement of the CU 3 or the P stand 2 occurs.

<Operation related to request serial number>
Next, the serial number updating method described in the communication sequence shown in FIGS. 6 to 28 is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this method. For example, a serial number update method as described below may be applied to the communication sequences shown in FIGS.

<< Update both serial number and requested serial number >>
FIG. 31 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the operations of the P platform 2 and the CU 3 regarding the request serial number. One of the A apparatus and the B apparatus shown in FIG. 31 is the P stand 2, and the other is the CU3. A device that generates a request to the other party is an A device, and a device that receives a request from the A device is a B device.

  When the A device is CU3 and the B device is the P unit 2, the request sequence number is an addition sequence number, and the request is a game ball addition request. A specific communication sequence in this case is as shown in FIG.

  When the A device is the P platform 2 and the B device is the CU3, the request sequence number is a count sequence number, and the request is a game ball count request. A specific communication sequence in this case is as shown in FIG.

  Here, both cases will be conceptualized and described. While there is no request for the B device, the A device transmits a message in which the request serial number m is not updated as shown in (1). However, the normal serial number n is updated every time a message is transmitted. The device B receives this and returns a message as shown in (2). In this message, the normal serial number is updated to n + 1. However, the request sequence number is not updated as m.

  While the request is not generated in the device A, as shown in (1) and (2), both of them transmit a message while updating the normal serial number. During this time, it is determined whether or not the message transmitted immediately before has reached the partner by looking at the normal serial number included in the message received from the partner.

  When a request is generated in the A device, the A device updates the request sequence number to m + 1, and transmits a request message including the updated request sequence number m + 1 to the B device as shown in (3). At this time, the normal serial number is also updated to n + 2. The request message includes data in which the request bit (addition request bit or count request bit) is turned ON.

  The B device that has received the request message including the request sequence number m + 1 determines whether or not to accept the request. For example, if it is a counting request, it is determined whether or not the process of adding balls is possible on the CU3 side. Or if it is an addition request | requirement, it will be determined whether the process which adds a game ball in the P stand 2 side is possible. The case where the addition processing of the holding balls is not possible is, for example, the case where the processing using the holding balls (such as a wagon service) is in progress. The case where the game ball addition process is not possible is, for example, a case where the game ball has already reached the predetermined upper limit value.

  When accepting the request, as described above in (4), an acknowledgment message with the request serial number updated to m + 2 is transmitted to the A device. On the other hand, when rejecting the request, as described below in (4), a rejection message (also referred to as a rejection message; the same applies hereinafter) that has not been updated with the request sequence number being m + 1 is sent to the A device. Send. The normal serial number is updated to n + 3 in any case.

  The A device includes storage means for storing the request sequence number included in the immediately preceding transmission message. The device A that has received the message (4) compares and determines the request sequence number stored in the storage means and the request sequence number included in the message (4). As a result, if the stored request sequence number is the same as the request sequence number included in the transmitted message (m + 1 in this example), it is determined that the request has been rejected. On the other hand, if the value obtained by adding a predetermined number (1 in this example) to the stored request sequence number and the request sequence number included in the transmitted message are the same (m + 2 in this example) (in other words, If the request sequence number that has been transmitted is advanced by one), it is determined that the request has been accepted. If it is determined that the request has been accepted, the request sequence number is further updated by one, and a message including a specific request value (the number of counting balls or the number of additional balls) is transmitted to the B device. On the other hand, when it is determined that the request has been rejected, a message including the received request sequence number is transmitted to the B device.

  A case where the request message (3) does not reach the device B due to noise or other factors is shown in (3) 'of FIG. In this case, the device B determines that there is no response when a predetermined waiting time (for example, 200 ms) has elapsed since the transmission of the message (2), and retransmits the message (2). As a result, the message (2) arrives at the A device that transmitted (3) '. Then, although the device A has transmitted the request message of the request sequence number m + 1, the request sequence number of the reply message to this does not correspond to either request acceptance or request rejection (from the request sequence number included in the request message). Since the request serial number is delayed), it is determined that the request message has not arrived. Such a determination can also be made using a normal serial number. That is, the normal sequence number included in the request sequence number is n + 3, whereas the normal sequence number included in the reply message is n + 2, and it can be determined that the request message has not been reached based on such a situation.

  When it is determined that the request message has not arrived, the device A retransmits the request message (3).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a request serial number is included in a message and transmitted separately from a normal serial number. The request sequence number is updated when an operation such as an addition request or a count request is requested to the communication partner, and the update is stopped when the request operation ends or when the request is rejected. In other periods, the message is not updated even if a message is transmitted / received.

  On the other hand, the normal serial number is updated every time a message is exchanged regardless of whether there is a request to the communication partner (note that the normal serial number is updated only on one of the A device and the B device, The other may perform the operation of returning the serial number received from the other party as it is.)

  For this reason, in the case of a normal serial number, it is possible to determine whether or not the transmitted request message has arrived at the other party using the serial number included in the received message from the other party, but the received message is an acceptance message indicating the request acceptance. Or a rejection message indicating a request rejection.

  However, as described above, when the request sequence number is used as in this embodiment, not only whether the requested request message has arrived at the other party, but also the message returned from the other party is accepted by the request sequence number. It is possible to specify whether it is a message or a rejection message. Of course, as in the present embodiment, since the request message includes data with the request bit (addition request bit or count request bit) turned ON, the received message is an acceptance message even by determining this data. Or a rejection message. However, if the request sequence number is used, such request bits can be deleted from the message. As a result, the amount of message data can be reduced, and the processing for determining the request bit of the message data can be made unnecessary.

<< Update only one of serial number and requested serial number >>
FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the operations of the P base 2 and the CU 3 regarding the normal serial number and the requested serial number. This modification differs from the example shown in FIG. 31 in that the normal sequence number is not updated when the requested sequence number is updated.

  That is, in this modified example, when a request is not generated between the normal serial number and the request serial number, only the normal serial number is updated and the message is exchanged. However, when a request occurs, the normal sequence number update is stopped and only the requested sequence number is updated. Thereafter, when a series of processing for the request ends or when a rejection message for the request is transmitted, the update of the request sequence number is stopped, and the update of the normal sequence number is started instead.

  For this reason, in the exchange of messages before the occurrence of the request shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 32, the normal sequence number is updated to n and n + 1, while the request sequence number m is not updated. However, in the request message (3) transmitted when a request is generated, the normal sequence number remains n + 1 and is not updated, while the request sequence number is updated to m + 1. Similarly, neither the acceptance message nor the rejection message (4) for the request message is updated with the normal serial number kept at n + 1.

  Even in this case, the device A that has received the message (4) can determine whether the message is an acceptance message or a rejection message by determining the request sequence number included in the message.

  In addition, as shown in (3) ′, even when the request message does not reach the B device and the message (2) is retransmitted from the B device, the A device receives the request message based on the request sequence number. You can determine that you did not.

  As in this modification, even if the update of the normal sequence number is stopped from when the request occurs until the processing for the request is completed, there is no problem because the request sequence number takes over the function of the normal sequence number during that time. Does not occur. In addition, there is also an effect that processing for updating the normal serial number or collating the normal serial number is unnecessary during that time.

<Encryption key used for communication between key management server and communication control IC>
Next, an encryption key used for communication between the key management server and the communication control IC will be described. FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining an encryption key used for communication from the key management server to the communication control IC 325a. First, encryption keys used for communication between the key management server and the communication control IC 325a mainly include a board shipment key, a board initial key, a board authentication key, a main authentication key, a temporary authentication key, and an effective key (commercial). , Communication key 1 (session key) and communication key 2 (session key). The board shipment key is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC, and is used only for encryption of a communication test message before shipment. The board initial key is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC, and is received by the CU control unit 323 during the initial communication with the hall server, and stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323. The SC 325b generates a substrate initial key from the embedded information at the time of manufacture and stores it in the RAM. Authentication communication (substrate initial key mode) using the substrate initial key is permitted (timed operation) only for a limited period. Here, in the board initial key mode, as described above, it is necessary to communicate normally with the hall server at least once to acquire the board initial key, and thus security is ensured.

  Here, the “limited period” is a limited period of two days, for example. In this way, by enabling timed operation, even if the key cannot be exchanged with the key management server immediately after the system is installed in the hall, the hall will start operating immediately after the system is installed. It becomes possible. In addition, as a limited period, you may set the period defined in one day, for example to every morning from 9:00 to 17:00.

  The above-described board initial key mode has a restriction that enables authentication communication using the board initial key for a limited period of time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the amount of money that can be used ( Card balance or cash) may be limited. Alternatively, when the number of symbol variations in the variable display device reaches a certain number, the game may be forcibly terminated and the gaming machine may be controlled to be disabled. Alternatively, when the cumulative number of jackpots reaches a certain number, the game may be forcibly terminated and the gaming machine may be controlled to be disabled. In addition, it may be possible to allow only a game by inserting cash and prevent a game using the remaining card amount, or to limit the game to a game using a holding ball.

  The board authentication key is an encryption key that is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC and is received as part of the board security information from the key management server. By performing authentication communication using the board authentication key, the communication mode (board authentication key mode) is switched from the timed operation using the board initial key to the permanent operation (normal operation). This board authentication key is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit and the RAM of the SC.

  In both the timed operation using the board initial key and the permanent operation using the board authentication key, the CU control unit 323 receives the valid key stored in the hall server, and the SC 325b receives the valid key as the communication control IC 325a. This is realized by enabling communication between the P platform and the CU.

  This authentication key is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, is generated by the SC 325b from the update information received from the key management server, and is stored in the RAM of the SC 325b. The communication control IC 325a is also similar to the SC 325b. Are generated from the update information and stored in the RAM of the communication control IC 325a. Note that this authentication key may be acquired from a key management server or the like. Further, the CU control unit 323 and the communication control IC 325a may generate themselves without receiving update information from a key management server or the like. In addition, the CU control unit 323 and the communication control IC 325a themselves generate predetermined second data by acquiring predetermined first data from a key management server or the like, and this authentication key is obtained from the first data and the second data. You may make it produce | generate.

  The temporary authentication key is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, and until the authentication key is generated (or until a set allowable time (for example, two days) elapses), the SC 325b and Used for encryption communication with the communication control IC 325a. The encrypted communication using the temporary authentication key (temporary authentication key mode) is allowed (timed operation) only for a limited period (for example, 2 days). SC 325b and communication control IC 325a store temporary authentication keys in their respective ROMs from the manufacturing stage. The valid key (commercial) is a key that is received by the SC 325b via the CU control unit 323 and transmitted (set) to the communication control IC 325a during initial communication with the hall server. Communication with P devices becomes possible by setting the effective key. The valid key is data for activating the communication control IC 325a. In other words, the valid key is permission information for permitting communication between the CU and the P platform.

  The communication key 1 (session key) is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC, is used for business message communication for gaming machines, and is created every business day by the SC 325b using some variable. For example, a counter value (random number) or date / time information may be used as the variable. The communication key 2 (session key) is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, and is used for business message communication for gaming machines.

  Note that even if the key described above has a configuration in which the key data is embedded in each part as it is, the information for generating the key data is stored in each part. The key data may be generated by using the key.

  Next, a method for acquiring an encryption key and a method for performing encrypted communication using the acquired encryption key will be described. First, the SC 325b acquires an effective key via the CU control unit 323 at the first communication with the hall server. The SC 325b transmits (sets) the acquired effective key to the communication control IC 325a, thereby enabling communication with the P units. The CU control unit 323 receives the board initial key at the first communication with the hall server, and stores it in the RAM of the CU control unit 323. The SC 325b generates a substrate initial key from the embedded information at the time of manufacture and stores it in the RAM. The SC 325b performs cryptographic authentication with the CU control unit 323 using the acquired substrate initial key, and performs cryptographic communication with the CU control unit 323 in a timely manner using the substrate initial key. In addition, the hall server that has received the connection request sent from the CU control unit 323 when the power is turned on returns a unified store code for identifying the game arcade where the hall server is installed to the CU control unit 323. Specifically, the unified store code is transmitted from the input / output interface of the hall server to the CU control unit 323 according to the control of the CPU of the hall server.

  On the other hand, authentication is performed between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b using the board manufacturer code stored as initial information in both. The board manufacturer code is a code that identifies the manufacturer that manufactured the security board 325. A board connection request and a board connection response are exchanged on the condition that the authentication using the board manufacturer code is successful (see FIG. 39). The unified store code is included in the board connection request transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b, and the SC 325b acquires the unified store code by receiving the board connection request.

  Next, the CU control unit 323 requests the board security information from the key management server and receives the board security information transmitted from the key management server via the hall server, so that the board security information is included in the board security information. Get the board authentication key. The CU control unit performs cryptographic authentication with the SC using the acquired board authentication key, and performs cryptographic communication with the SC using the board authentication key. Note that the CU control unit 323 does not change the key from the board initial key to the board authentication key immediately after obtaining the board authentication key, but on condition that the gaming machine is in a non-operating state as described later. Change the key.

  The board authentication key may be generated by the CU control unit 323 itself instead of being acquired from the key management server or the like, and the CU control unit 323 itself acquires predetermined first data from the key management server or the like. Predetermined second data may be generated, and a board authentication key may be generated from the first data and the second data.

  Next, SC 325b performs cryptographic communication with communication control IC 325a using the stored temporary authentication key. Then, the SC decrypts the update information acquired from the key management server by performing cryptographic communication with the CU control unit using the board authentication key, and inquires about the board inquiry number. If the inquiry board inquiry number matches, the SC generates a main authentication key from the update information and performs cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325a using the generated main authentication key. The authentication key is not stored in the communication control IC 325a from the time of shipment, and is generated from the update information in the same manner as the SC 325b.

  Next, the SC notifies the CU control unit of the communication key 1 and performs communication with the CU control unit using the communication key 1 so that business message communication with the gaming machine is possible. It becomes. In addition, the SC sets an effective key for the communication control IC, thereby receiving a notification of the communication key 2 from the communication control IC and performing communication with the communication control IC thereafter using the communication key 2. As a result, business message communication with the gaming machine becomes possible.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the CU control unit and the SC>
Next, communication within the CU 3 shown in FIG. 4 will be described. In particular, communication between the CU control unit 323 and the security chip (SC) 325b of the security board 325 will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 34 and FIG. 35, an outline of commands and responses transmitted and received between the CU control unit 323 and the security chip (SC) 325b will be described.

  34 and 35 show the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

  First, a command named board connection request is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. This board connection request command requests the SC 325b to connect to a gaming machine (P 2). A response named “substrate connection response” is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. This response to the board connection response notifies the CU control unit 323 of a response to the board connection request.

  A board shipment key request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. This board shipment key request command requests the board 325b for a board shipment key. A response of the board shipment key response is transmitted from the SC 325b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the board shipment key response is to notify the CU control unit 323 of the board shipment key.

  A board manufacturer code authentication request 1 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. The board manufacturer code is a code that identifies the manufacturer that manufactured the security board 325, and is stored in the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b. The board manufacturer code authentication request 1 command requests the SC 325b to authenticate the board manufacturer code. A response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. This response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323 of the authentication information of the board serial ID.

  A board manufacturer code authentication request 2 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. This command of the board manufacturer code authentication request 2 requests the SC 325b to authenticate the board serial ID. A response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 2 is to notify the CU control unit 323 of board manufacturer code authentication information.

  A command of the board serial ID authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. This command of the board serial ID authentication request 1 requests the SC 325b to authenticate the board serial ID. A response of the board serial ID authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the board serial ID authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323 of the board serial ID authentication information.

  A command of the board serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. The command of the board serial ID authentication request 2 requests the SC 325b to authenticate the board serial ID. A response of the board serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the board serial ID authentication response 2 is to notify the CU control unit 323 of board serial ID authentication information.

  The command of the board initial key authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. The command of the board initial key authentication request 1 requests the SC 325b to authenticate the board initial key. A response of the board initial key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the board initial key authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323 of the board initial key authentication result.

  The command of the board initial key authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. The board initial key authentication request 2 command requests the SC 325b to authenticate the board initial key. A response of the board initial key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the board initial key authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323 of the board initial key authentication result.

  The command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 requests the SC 325b to authenticate the board authentication key. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325b to the CU control unit 323. This response of the board authentication key authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323 of the authentication result of the board authentication key.

  The command of the board authentication key authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 2 requests the SC 325b to authenticate the board authentication key. A response of the board authentication key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323 of the authentication result of the board authentication key.

  A command for board shipment key authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. The command of the board shipping key authentication request 1 requests the SC 325b to authenticate the board shipping key. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the board shipping key authentication response 1 is to notify the CU control unit 323 of the board shipping key authentication result.

  A command of board shipment key authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. The command of the board shipping key authentication request 2 is for requesting the board 325b to authenticate the board shipping key. A response of the board shipping key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the board shipping key authentication response 2 is to notify the CU control unit 323 of the board shipping key authentication result.

  A version information notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. This version information notification command notifies the SC 325b of the version of the board authentication key. A version information response is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of this version information response notifies the CU control unit 323 that the version information has been received.

  A board authentication result notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. This board authentication result notification command notifies the SC 325b of the authentication result between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b. A response of the board authentication result response is transmitted from the SC 325b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the board authentication result response is to notify the CU control unit 323 of the authentication result between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b.

  A security board inquiry instruction notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. This security board inquiry instruction notification command requests security board inquiry information from the SC 325b. A response of the security board inquiry result is transmitted from the SC 325b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the security board inquiry result notifies the CU control unit 323 of the security board inquiry information.

  A security board information notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. This security board information notification command notifies the security board information to the SC 325b. A response of the security board information result is transmitted from the SC 325b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the security board information result notifies the CU control unit 323 that the security board information has been received.

  A counter information request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. This counter information request command requests counter information from the SC 325b. A response of a counter information response is transmitted from the SC 325b to the CU control unit 323. This response of the counter information response notifies the CU control unit 323 of the counter information.

  A communication key request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. This communication key request command requests the SC 325b for a communication key. A response of the communication key response is transmitted from the SC 325b to the CU control unit 323. This response of the communication key response notifies the CU control unit 323 of the communication key.

  A gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. This gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command requests inquiry information about gaming machine chips from the SC 325b. A response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result is transmitted from the SC 325b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result notifies the CU control unit 323 of inquiry information of gaming machine chips.

  A gaming machine chip information notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. The gaming machine chip information notification command notifies the SC 325b of the result of checking the gaming machine chip information. A response of the gaming machine chip information result is transmitted from the SC 325b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the gaming machine chip information result notifies the CU control unit 323 that the gaming machine chip collation result has been received.

  A substrate state request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. This command for requesting the substrate status is for requesting the substrate status to the SC 325b. A response of the substrate state response is transmitted from the SC 325b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the substrate state response notifies the CU control unit 323 of the substrate state.

<Main sequence in communication between CU control unit and SC>
Next, a process executed by the CPU in the CU control unit 323 and a process executed by the security chip (SC) 325b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 36, a process for starting up the CU control unit 323 when the power is turned on and the hall is installed will be described. FIG. 36 shows a sequence when the power supply is first turned on after the CU 3 is installed in the game arcade, and in particular, a startup sequence at the time of hall installation using the board initial key will be described.

  First, when the power of the CU3 is turned on, the CU control unit 323 and the SC325b are activated. When the power is first turned on after CU3 is installed in the amusement hall, the CU control unit 323 receives the board initial key A from the host device (specifically, from the hall server), the MAC key of the board initial key A, the valid Acquire a key (for commercial / P shipment). Here, the board initial key A is an encryption key that is downloaded from the hall server and stored in the CU control unit 323 when first communicating with the host device after being delivered to the amusement hall, and is installed in the key management center. This is an encryption key used for communication between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b until the board information (board serial ID and board authentication key) stored in the key management server is acquired. The board initial key A is decrypted using the board manufacturer code, while the MAC key of the board initial key A is similarly decrypted using the board manufacturer code. Such decryption is performed by a decryption method conforming to the AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) encryption method.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence, a board initial key authentication sequence, and a security board information inquiry sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b using a challenge / response method. After processing the board manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b use the board initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, perform the board initial key authentication sequence, and perform authentication when the board initial key authentication is completed. It becomes. Detailed processing of the board initial key authentication sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b perform the security board information inquiry sequence using the board initial key obtained from the hall server as the encryption key, and the acquisition is OK when the security board information can be obtained. The security board information is acquired from the key management server of the key management center, and includes a board serial ID, a board authentication key, and the like. Details of the security board information inquiry sequence will be described later. The board authentication key is an encryption key that is downloaded from a key management server installed in the key management center and used for communication between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b. The key management server stores the board authentication key in association with the board serial number or the like.

  When the security board information can be acquired by the security board information inquiry sequence, the SC 325b performs authentication with the communication control IC 325a.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b use the board initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and exchange a communication key for business message communication.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b use the substrate initial key as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and generate a communication key. In the communication key exchange sequence, the substrate authentication key is used as the encryption key when the substrate information can be acquired in the substrate information acquisition sequence. However, when the substrate information cannot be acquired, the substrate initial key is used as the encryption key for a limited time. Specifically, the communication key is generated using a random number and current time data. The method for generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to random number and current time data, but any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between encrypted communication devices can be used. Also good. Note that the communication key exchange sequence is for exchanging a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with a gaming machine in order to enable gaming by the gaming machine, and detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325b acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325a.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number and a payout control chip number. Detailed processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence will be described later.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b can perform business message communication with the gaming machine. By performing business telegram communication with this gaming machine, gaming can be performed on the gaming machine. The business message communication with the gaming machine is operated using a communication key (session key). The communication at this time is time-limited communication as described above, and is allowed only for a certain period (for example, 2 days). The communication mode performed through the above processing is the restricted communication mode (substrate initial key mode (substrate initial key operation)). If a certain period (for example, 2 days) is exceeded in this timed operation, the temporary operation is stopped and the overage is notified from the SC 325b to the key management server via the CU control unit 323 and the hall server. The

  Thereafter, the CU 3 makes a recovery request to the P unit 2, and the P unit 2 sends a response (recovery response) of the recovery response including the previous last transmission serial number, the previously inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time to the CU 3. Send back.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the power-on / normal startup process of the CU control unit 323 will be described. FIG. 37 shows a sequence when the power is normally turned on after the CU 3 is installed in the game arcade, and in particular, a startup sequence using a board authentication key will be described.

  First, when the power of the CU3 is turned on, the CU control unit 323 and the SC325b are activated. When the power is first turned on after the CU 3 is installed in the amusement hall, the CU control unit 323 receives the board serial ID key, the board from the host device (specifically, from the key management server via the hall server). The MAC key of the authentication key version, the board authentication key A, and the board authentication key A is acquired. The board serial ID key is decrypted using the board initial key, the board initial key A is decrypted using the board serial ID, and the MAC key of the board initial key A is similarly decrypted using the board serial ID. Is done. Such decryption is performed by a decryption method according to the AES encryption method.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence, a board authentication key authentication sequence, and a security board information inquiry sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b using a challenge / response method. After processing the board manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b perform the board authentication key authentication sequence using the board authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key. Detailed processing of the board authentication key authentication sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b perform the security board information inquiry sequence using the board authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key only when the key is updated.

  The SC 325b performs authentication with the communication control IC 325a when the board authentication key can be authenticated by the board authentication key authentication sequence and there is no key update, or when there is a key update and authentication can be performed by the security board information inquiry sequence. .

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b use the board authentication key as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and generate a communication key. Specifically, the communication key is generated using a random number and current time data. The method for generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to random number and current time data, but any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between encrypted communication devices can be used. Also good. Note that the communication key exchange sequence is for exchanging a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with a gaming machine in order to enable gaming by the gaming machine, and detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325b further acquires gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325a.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number and a payout control chip number. Detailed processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence will be described later.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b can perform business message communication with the gaming machine. By performing business telegram communication with this gaming machine, gaming can be performed on the gaming machine. A communication key (session key) is used for business message communication with this gaming machine. Communication at this time is a normal communication mode (board authentication key mode (board authentication key operation)) without restriction as in the restricted communication mode.

  Next, referring to FIG. 38, the process of turning on the power of the CU control unit 323 and starting up at the time of factory shipment will be described. FIG. 38 shows a sequence at the time of factory shipment before the CU 3 is shipped to the amusement hall, and in particular, a factory shipment start-up sequence using a board shipment key will be described. This sequence is a process in the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b that is not connected to the host device at the time of factory shipment.

  First, when the power of the CU3 is turned on, the CU control unit 323 and the SC325b are activated. The CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence and a board initial key authentication sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b using a challenge / response method. After processing the board manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b perform the board initial key authentication sequence using the board initial key as the encryption key. However, since the CU3 is not yet installed in the game arcade at the factory shipment stage, the CU control unit 323 cannot acquire the base initial key from the hall server of the game arcade, and as a result, the board initial key authentication is performed. The result is NG.

  After that, since the board initial key authentication sequence is authentication NG, the CU control section 323 sends a board shipment key request command to the SC 325b to request the board shipment key used for testing the security board 325. Send to. After receiving the board shipment key request command from the CU control unit 323, the SC 325b transmits a board shipment key response response including the board shipment key to the CU control unit 323.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b perform a board shipping key authentication sequence using the board shipping key acquired from the SC 325b as the encryption key. Detailed processing of the board shipping key authentication sequence will be described later.

  If the board shipping key can be authenticated by the board shipping key authentication sequence, the SC 325b performs authentication with the communication control IC 325a.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b use the board shipment key as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and generate a communication key. Specifically, the communication key is generated using a random number and current time data. The method for generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to random number and current time data, but any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between encrypted communication devices can be used. Also good. Note that the communication key exchange sequence is for exchanging a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with a gaming machine in order to enable gaming by the gaming machine, and detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325b acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325a.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number and a payout control chip number. Detailed processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 makes a communication test request to the P unit 2, and the P unit 2 transmits a communication test response to the CU 3.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b can communicate with the gaming machine only by the communication test message. By performing communication of this communication test message, a communication test at the time of factory shipment is performed. The CU3 that has passed the factory communication test is delivered to the amusement hall, and the first power-on sequence is the hall installation sequence described with reference to FIG. 36, and is executed after obtaining the board authentication key. The sequence is the normal startup sequence described with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, processing of the board manufacturer code authentication sequence will be described.
First, the CU control unit 323 transmits a board manufacturer code authentication request 1 command for requesting board manufacturer code authentication to the SC 325b. Since the board manufacturer code authentication is performed using the challenge / response method, the CU control unit 323 requests the challenge code from the SC 325b.

  Upon receiving the board manufacturer code authentication request 1 command, the SC 325b generates a challenge code based on the board manufacturer code, and notifies the CU control unit 323 of the generated challenge code as a response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 1.

  Upon receiving the board manufacturer code authentication response 1 command, the CU control unit 323 generates a response code based on the challenge code, and notifies the generated response code to the SC 325b using the board manufacturer code authentication request 2 command. Specifically, the response code is generated by encrypting the challenge code received using the board manufacturer code as a key.

  The SC 325b that has received the board manufacturer code authentication request 2 command checks the response code (specifically, if the challenge code is extracted by decrypting the response code using the board manufacturer code as a key), the challenge code matches. Assume that the check result is OK. Then, the check result is notified to the CU control unit 323 as a response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 2. At this time, the CU control unit 323 acquires authentication log information such as a board manufacturer code authentication result from the SC 325b.

  On the other hand, if the challenge codes do not match, the check result is NG (inappropriate). In such a case, the authentication is repeated n times, and SC 325b becomes a no-response state (HALT) in the case of NG continuously n times, and the board authentication key and the main authentication key are cleared (see FIG. 52). After entering the no-response state (HALT), the SC 325b does not authenticate with the communication control IC 325a, and repairs are performed at the factory.

  The CU control unit 323 notifies the SC 325b of the CU control unit specific information (unified store code, unit number, current time), and transmits a board connection request command for requesting connection with the gaming machine.

  After receiving the board connection request command from the CU control unit 323, the SC 325b retains the information on the unified store code, the bedtime, and the current time, and when the previous unified store code matches, the CU control unit 323 A response of the board connection response notifying that the connection request has been accepted (OK) is returned.

  On the other hand, when it does not coincide with the previous unified store code, a response of the substrate connection response notifying that the connection request is not accepted (NG) is returned to the CU control unit 323, and the substrate stored in the RAM In addition to clearing the authentication key, a transition is made to a substrate initial key mode (see FIG. 36), which is a mode for proceeding with the substrate initial key as an encryption key. At this time, the CU control unit 323 acquires authentication log information such as a board connection request result from the SC 325b.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, processing of an authentication sequence for a substrate initial key or a substrate shipping key will be described.

  First, as shown in FIG. 40, in the state of the board initial key mode, which is a mode for proceeding with the board initial key as an encryption key, authentication using the basic initial key is performed in FIG. In the case of the substrate shipping key mode, which is a mode for proceeding with processing using the key as an encryption key, authentication using the base shipping key is performed in FIG. Therefore, “/” in FIG. 40 is a symbol representing either one. The CU control unit 323 sends a board initial key / board shipment key authentication request 1 command for requesting authentication information to the SC 325b. The command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 1 is not encrypted, but may be encrypted using the board initial key / board shipping key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325b that has received the command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 1 encrypts the random number A of the authentication information with the board initial key or the board shipping key and sends the H-MAC with the MAC key to the CU control unit 323. It calculates and returns with the response of the board initial key / board shipment key authentication response 1.

  The CU control unit 323 that has received the board initial key / board shipping key authentication response 1 command decrypts the random number A of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board initial key or board shipping key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 encrypts the random number B of the authentication information with the board initial key or the board shipping key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and requests the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request to the SC 325b. Send with command 2. The command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 2 is encrypted using the board initial key or the board shipping key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325b that has received the command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 2 decrypts the random number B of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board initial key or board shipping key to the CU control unit 323. To do. The SC 325b returns an authentication result to the CU control unit 323 as a response of the board initial key / board shipment key authentication response 2. At this time, the CU control unit 323 acquires authentication log information such as a board initial key authentication result and a board shipping key authentication result from the SC 325b.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, processing of the authentication sequence of the board serial ID and the board authentication key will be described.

  First, the communication between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b is performed in the state of the board authentication key mode, which is a mode in which processing is performed using the board authentication key as an encryption key. The command of the board serial ID authentication request 1 for requesting is sent. Since the board serial ID authentication is performed using a challenge / response method, the CU control unit 323 requests a challenge code from the SC 325b.

  The SC 325b that has received the command of the board serial ID authentication request 1 generates a challenge code based on the board serial ID, and notifies the CU control unit 323 of the generated challenge code as a response of the board serial ID authentication response 1.

  The CU control unit 323 that has received the command of the board serial ID authentication response 1 generates a response code based on the challenge code (specifically, generates a response code by encrypting the challenge code using the board serial ID as a key), The generated response code is notified to the SC 325b by the command of the board serial ID authentication request 2.

  Upon receiving the board serial ID authentication request 2 command, the SC 325b checks the response code (specifically, decrypts the response code using the board serial ID as a key and extracts the challenge code), and the challenge code matches. If the check result is OK. Then, the check result is notified to the CU control unit 323 by the response of the board serial ID authentication response 2. If the check result is NG, the SC 325b notifies the CU control unit 323 that the check result is included in the authentication result in the board authentication result notification and the board authentication result response, and notifies the NG. At this time, the CU control unit 323 acquires authentication log information such as a board serial ID authentication result from the SC 325b.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 transmits a version information notification command to the SC 325b in order to notify the version information of the board authentication key. Note that the version information notification command is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  Upon receiving the version information notification command, the SC 325b returns a response of the version information response to notify the CU control unit 323 that the version information of the board authentication key has been received. Note that the response of the version information response is not encrypted, but may be encrypted using a board authentication key as an encryption key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 transmits a command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 for requesting authentication information to the SC 325b. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 is not encrypted, but may be encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325b that has received the command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 encrypts the random number A of the authentication information with the board authentication key and calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key to the CU control unit 323, and the board authentication key authentication. Reply with response 1 response.

  Upon receiving the board authentication key authentication response 1 command, the CU control unit 323 decrypts the random number A of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board authentication key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 encrypts the random number B of the authentication information with the board authentication key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and transmits it to the SC 325b with the command of the board authentication key authentication request 2. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 2 is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  Upon receiving the board authentication key authentication request 2 command, the SC 325b decrypts the random number B of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board authentication key to the CU control unit 323. Then, the SC 325b returns an authentication result as a response of the board authentication key authentication response 2 to the CU control unit 323.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 transmits a board authentication result notification command to the SC 325b in order to notify the board authentication result. The board authentication result notification command is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key. The board authentication result notification command notifies the SC 325b of the board serial ID authentication and the board authentication key authentication result.

  The SC 325b that has received the board authentication result notification command transmits a board authentication result response command to the CU control unit 323 in order to notify the board serial ID authentication and the board authentication key authentication result. The board authentication result response command is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key. At this time, the CU control unit 323 acquires authentication log information such as a board authentication result from the SC 325b.

  Next, FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining a process in the case of inquiring about security board information. Referring to FIG. 42, first, the CU control unit 323 transmits a security board inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325b in order to request information for inquiring of the host device. Note that the security board inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325b that has received the security board inquiry instruction notification command notifies the CU control unit 323 of information (board serial number and inquiry information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). A response of the security board inquiry result is returned to the CU control unit 323. Note that the response of the security board inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted by using the board initial number or board authentication key as the board serial number as the encryption key, and the CU control unit 323 and the hall server cannot decrypt the key (hereinafter referred to as the key). The query information is encrypted with a “secret key”. As a result, the inquiry information can be decrypted and decrypted only by the key management server.

  Upon receiving the response of the security board inquiry result, the CU control unit 323 receives the information (the board serial number and the board serial number and the security management board 325) from the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) based on the board serial number and the inquiry information. Query information) and wait for a response from the host device. While inquiring about security board information, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b do not wait for a response from the host device, and process the next step (for example, communication control IC authentication processing, gaming machine chip information authentication processing, gaming machine Business message processing, etc.), and necessary processing is performed when security board information is received.

  Thereafter, when receiving the inquiry result of the security board information (board serial ID and board authentication key) from the host device, the CU control unit 323 notifies the security board information to the SC 325b. Specifically, the CU control unit 323 transmits a security board information notification command including the board serial ID and the board authentication key, which is the inquiry result, to the SC 325b. Note that the security board information notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  After receiving the security board information notification command, the SC 325b confirms the inquiry number and sends a response of the security board information result to notify the CU control unit 323 that the security board information notification command has been normally received. Send back. The key update information is used at the next reset. The response of the security board information result to be returned does not need to be encrypted. However, in the case of encryption, a board initial key or a board authentication key is used as the encryption key.

  Thereafter, if the reception result is OK, the CU control unit 323 stores the board serial ID key and the board authentication key A and uses them as authentication key information at the next reset. In addition, the CU control unit 323 acquires authentication log information for board information inquiry and board information notification.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, processing of the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence will be described.
First, the CU control unit 323 transmits a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command for inquiring gaming machine chip information to the SC 325b. Note that the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted does not have to be encrypted, but when encrypted, a communication key is used as the encryption key.

  On the other hand, the SC 325b acquires gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC. Thereafter, the SC 325b that has received the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command has completed the acquisition of the gaming machine chip information, so the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result including the information of gaming machine chip inquiry result = OK is CU controlled. Reply to part 323. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip ID, a payout control chip ID, and the like. Note that the response of the returned gaming machine chip inquiry result is that the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID are encrypted with the secret key, and other information is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  After that, when receiving the response of the returned gaming machine chip inquiry result, the CU control unit 323 includes the main control chip number and the payout control chip number in the host device (key management server or hall server: see FIG. 33). Queries gaming machine chip information and waits for a response from the host device. During the gaming machine chip information inquiry, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b execute the processing of the next step (business message processing with the gaming machine) without receiving a response from the host device. Since it takes time (for example, about 2 hours) to inquire about gaming machine chip information, the operation of the gaming machine cannot be stopped during that time, so the next step processing is not performed without a response from the host device. (Business message processing with game machine) is executed. It should be noted that during the gaming machine chip information inquiry, even if a reset operation (for example, operation of a reset button (not shown) or power-on, etc.) is performed, the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification request is not issued again.

  After that, when receiving the matching result of the gaming machine chip information from the host device, the CU control unit 323 notifies the SC 325b of the matching result. Specifically, the CU control unit 323 transmits a gaming machine chip information notification command including a matching result to the SC 325b. Note that the gaming machine chip verification result notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  After receiving the gaming machine chip information notification command, the SC 325b returns a response of the gaming machine chip information result to notify the CU control unit 323 of the gaming machine manufacturer code and model code when the collation result is OK. Note that the response of the gaming machine chip information result to be returned is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  At the same time, the CU control unit 323 obtains an authentication log such as a gaming machine chip information inquiry and a gaming machine chip information collation result included in the gaming machine chip information result from the SC 325b.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the processing of the sequence of the board authentication key authentication abnormality will be described.
First, when the power of the CU3 is turned on, the CU control unit 323 and the SC325b are activated.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence and a board authentication key authentication sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b using a challenge / response method. After processing the board manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b perform the board authentication key authentication sequence using the board authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key. If the board authentication key authentication is authentication NG, the SC 325b clears the board authentication key information as an authentication error.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b execute a board initial key authentication sequence. At this time, the communication of the board initial key authentication sequence is encrypted using the board initial key as the encryption key.

  When the authentication of this board initial key authentication sequence is authentication OK, the security board information inquiry sequence, communication key exchange sequence, gaming machine chip information inquiry is performed in the same manner as the hall installation start-up sequence shown in FIG. Processing such as a sequence is performed, and business message communication with the gaming machine becomes possible. The subsequent communication is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  Note that the SC 325b notifies the key management server 801 of an alarm “abnormal board authentication key update” indicating that the authentication of the board authentication key sequence is authentication NG.

  Next, FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining processing of an inquiry timeout sequence for security board information.

  First, the CU control unit 323 transmits a security board inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325b in order to request information for inquiring of the host device. Note that the security board inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325b that has received the security board inquiry instruction notification command notifies the CU control unit 323 of information (board serial number and inquiry information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). A response of the security board inquiry result is returned to the CU control unit 323. The response of the security board inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted using the board serial number as the encryption key and the board initial key or the board authentication key, and the inquiry information is encrypted with the secret key. As a result, the inquiry information can be decrypted and decrypted only by the key management server.

  Upon receiving the response of the security board inquiry result, the CU control unit 323 receives the information (the board serial number and the board serial number and the security management board 325) from the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) based on the board serial number and the inquiry information. Query information) and wait for a response from the host device. While inquiring about security board information, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b do not wait for a response from the host device, and process the next step (for example, communication control IC authentication processing, gaming machine chip information authentication processing, gaming machine Business message processing etc.).

  After that, the CU control unit 323, when receiving the security board information inquiry result (board serial ID and board authentication key) from the host device, times out the waiting time for the security board information inquiry, the CU 3 2 transmits a status information request command for requesting information on the second status. The status information request command is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key. The SC 325b that has received the status information request command acquires the gaming machine chip information of the P unit 2 via the communication control IC 325a.

  Then, the SC 325b returns a response of the status information response to the CU 3. At this time, the SC 325b returns a status information response including “board inquiry present” indicating that the security board information is requested to the key management center.

  In response to the above-described security board inquiry, the CU control unit 323 transmits a security board inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325b in order to request information to make an inquiry to the host device. Note that the security board inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325b that has received the security board inquiry instruction notification command notifies the CU control unit 323 of information (board serial number and inquiry information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). The response of the security board inquiry result is returned to the CU control unit 323 again. The response of the security board inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted using the board serial number as the encryption key and the board initial key or the board authentication key, and the inquiry information is encrypted with the secret key. As a result, the inquiry information can be decrypted and decrypted only by the key management server.

  Upon receiving the response of the security board inquiry result, the CU control unit 323 receives the information (the board serial number and the board serial number and the security management board 325) from the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) based on the board serial number and the inquiry information. Query information) and continue to wait for a response from the host device.

  Next, FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining processing of a gaming machine chip information inquiry (collation) timeout sequence.

  First, the CU control unit 323 transmits a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to request information (specifically, gaming machine chip information) for inquiring of the host device to the SC 325b. Note that the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  On the other hand, the SC 325b acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC, and then the SC 325b that has received the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command inquires of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). In order to notify the CU control unit 323 of information (main control chip information and payout control chip information), a response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result (authentication OK) is returned to the CU control unit 323. Note that the response of the game machine chip inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted with the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID using a secret key, and the other information is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  The CU control unit 323 that has received the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result sends the gaming machine chip information (mainly the main management chip information and the payout control chip information) to the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). Control chip information and payout control chip information) and wait for a response from the host device. While inquiring about the gaming machine chip information, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b do not wait for a response from the host device, and process the next step (for example, authentication processing of the communication control IC, authentication processing of the security board information, gaming machine Business message processing, etc.) and the processing necessary when the gaming machine chip information is received.

  However, after that, the CU control unit 323 determines that the waiting time for the gaming machine chip information inquiry has timed out before receiving the gaming machine chip information inquiry result (main control chip information and payout control chip information) from the host device. The CU 3 transmits a status information request command for requesting information on the status of the P platform 2. The status information request command is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key. The SC 325b that has received the status information request command acquires the gaming machine chip information of the P unit 2 via the communication control IC 325a.

  Then, the SC 325b returns a response of the status information response to the CU 3. At this time, the SC 325b returns a status information response including “chip information inquiry present” indicating that an inquiry to the key management center for gaming machine chip information is requested.

  In response to the above gaming machine chip information inquiry, the CU control unit 323 transmits a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325b in order to request information for inquiring of the host device. Note that the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  Upon receiving the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command, the SC 325b notifies the CU control unit 323 of information (main control chip information and payout control chip information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). In order to do this, the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result is sent back to the CU control unit 323 again. Note that the response of the game machine chip inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted with the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID using a secret key, and the other information is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  The CU control unit 323 that has received the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result sends the gaming machine chip information (mainly the main management chip information and the payout control chip information) to the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). Control chip information and payout control chip information) and continue to wait for a response from the host device.

  In the sequence between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b described based on the above FIG. 36 to FIG. 46, characteristic portions will be collectively described below.

  As a sequence executed after the CU 3 is received and installed in the amusement hall, there is a “board initial key authentication sequence” (see FIG. 36). This "Board Initial Key Authentication Sequence" is obtained by downloading the board initial key from the host device (hall server) and authenticating using the board initial key when the power is turned on for the first time after being installed in the amusement hall. Sequence. On the condition that the authentication result of this board initial key authentication sequence is OK, the “security board information inquiry sequence” is executed using this board initial key (see FIG. 36). The board authentication key is downloaded and stored from the host device (key management server) by this security board information inquiry sequence, and thereafter, various authentication sequences, communication key exchange sequences, etc. are executed using this board authentication key, and the communication key is obtained. Using this, business message communication with the gaming machine is executed (see FIG. 37).

  On the other hand, as a result of executing the security board information inquiry sequence (see FIG. 36) using the board initial key, the board authentication key may not be acquired. The board authentication key is sent to the key management server by the CU manufacturer when the CU manufacturer ships CU3 to the game hall, and stored in the key management server. The board authentication key stored in advance in the key management server is downloaded and stored, but the transmission of the board authentication key from the CU manufacturer to the key management server may be delayed for some reason. In addition, when the CU3 installed in the amusement hall attempts to download the board authentication key by executing the security board information inquiry sequence, an unexpected situation occurs between the key management server and the CU3 and communication is impossible. May be offline. In such a case, the board authentication key cannot be downloaded.

  If the board authentication key cannot be downloaded and the actual operation such as business message communication with the gaming machine after that cannot be performed at all, operational problems such as a decrease in the operating rate at the amusement hall occur. Therefore, when such an unforeseen situation occurs, control is performed so that the temporary operation of the actual operation can be performed using the board initial key which is a temporary authentication key. Specifically, the communication key exchange sequence is executed using the board initial key acquired from the host device (specifically, the hall server), and the communication key (session key) is generated using the random number and the time data. Then, the communication key (session key) is shared between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b, and business message communication is performed using the communication key (session key), and actual operation control is performed. The actual operation control using the communication key exchanged using the board initial key is allowed only for a certain period because the board initial key is a temporary key and the board authentication key cannot be obtained. Temporary operation is controlled. Specifically, actual operation control using this board initial key is allowed for only two days, and when the board authentication key cannot be obtained even at the time of power-up on the third day, the subsequent control is stopped, Control is performed to notify that an abnormality has occurred and to notify the hall server or hall management computer that an abnormality has occurred. The temporary operation time limit control that is allowed for a certain period of time (for example, two days) with the board initial key is that the board initial key is stored in the hall server, so that at least the CU control unit 323 has the hall server. It is allowed in a state where it is guaranteed that it is connected to

  Further, the above-mentioned “substrate initial key / shipping key authentication sequence” is executed at the time of factory shipment shown in FIG. When the board initial key authentication sequence is executed at this stage, since the board initial key has not yet been acquired, the result of execution of this board initial key authentication sequence using the board initial key is derived as the NG authentication result. The Then, each sequence after the board shipment key request and the board shipment key response shown in FIG. 40 is executed, and communication between the gaming machine and the communication test message is executed. In other words, it is determined by the “substrate initial key / shipping key authentication sequence” whether the substrate initial key has been acquired or not at the time of factory shipment. The sequence is also effectively used to determine whether the initial stage key has been acquired or whether the initial stage key has not been acquired.

<Main sequence in communication between communication control IC and security chip>
Next, FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining processing of a business message sequence between the SC 325b and the communication control IC 325a. With reference to FIG. 47, processing of SC 325b and communication control IC 325a after CU3 is powered on will be described.

  First, when the power of the CU3 is turned on, the SC 325b and the communication control IC 325a are activated. When activated, the SC 325b performs authentication with the CU control unit 323, and when activated, the communication control IC 325a performs authentication with the gaming machine.

  Thereafter, the SC 325b and the communication control IC 325a perform the communication control IC authentication sequence using the authentication key or the temporary authentication key as the encryption key. In the “temporary authentication key mode” described with reference to FIG. 33, the temporary authentication key is used, and in the case of the main authentication key mode after the main authentication key is generated, the main authentication key is used.

  Thereafter, the SC 325b and the communication control IC 325a perform the security information update sequence using the main authentication key or the temporary authentication key as the encryption key. Further, the SC 325b and the communication control IC 325a perform a gaming machine chip information authentication sequence using the authentication key or the temporary authentication key as the encryption key.

  Thereafter, the SC 325b transmits a communication key request command for requesting a communication key to the communication control IC 325a. The communication key request command is encrypted using the authentication key or the temporary authentication key as the encryption key.

  Upon receiving the communication key request command, the communication control IC 325a generates a communication key (session key) for communicating the business message with the gaming machine, and notifies the generated communication key to the SC 325b in response to the communication key response. Note that the response of the communication key response to be returned is encrypted using the authentication key or the temporary authentication key as the encryption key. Specifically, the communication key (session key) is generated using a random number and current time data. The current time data may be generated by the communication control IC 325a itself or received from another device. The method for generating the communication key (session key) is not limited to the random number and the current time data, and any data may be used as long as it is variable data other than the key used for the above-described mutual authentication.

After the above process is completed, business message communication with the gaming machine becomes possible.
FIG. 48 is a flowchart for explaining specific control of “authentication using a board authentication key”. Referring to FIG. 48, a series of processing described below is performed between CU control unit 323 and SC 325b.

  In step S201, an authentication process (unit authentication) using the board serial ID is performed using a challenge response method (see board serial ID authentication request / responses 1 and 2 in FIG. 41).

  When the single authentication in step S201 is completed, the key version is checked in the next step S202 (see version information notification / response in FIG. 41).

  When the key version check in step S202 is completed, device authentication using the board authentication key is performed in the next step S203 (see board authentication key authentication request / responses 1 and 2 in FIG. 41).

  When the device authentication process in step S203 is completed, the authentication results in steps S201 to S203 are mutually notified in the next step S204, and the process proceeds to the next step S205 (board authentication result notification / response in FIG. 41). reference).

  In step S205, it is determined whether or not the notified authentication result is normal. If the authentication result is normal, the process proceeds to step S206. If the authentication result is not normal, the process proceeds to step S207.

  In step S206, it is further determined whether or not the CU control unit 323 has the security board information acquired from the SC 325b. If the CU control unit 323 has the security board information to be acquired, the process proceeds to step S209 to acquire the security board information. If the security board information is not included, the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S209, the board authentication key authentication process between the CU control units 323 and SC325b further shifts to a security board information inquiry process, and the process ends. On the other hand, in step S210, the authentication in the board authentication key mode ends normally, and the process ends. In this case, the game machine chip information is collated between the CU control units 323 and SC325b.

  On the other hand, if the authentication result is not normal in step S205, the process proceeds to step S206. In this step S206, it is determined whether or not the number of retries is the third time. If the number of retries is the third time, the process proceeds to step S208, and the number of retries is not the third time (the number of retries is the first or second time). If so, the process returns to step S201, and the authentication process is performed again.

  In step S208, the SC325b board authentication abnormality is set to a standby state until a reset operation (for example, operation of a reset button (not shown) or power-on). After the reset operation, it is activated again in a mode (substrate initial key mode) in which authentication processing is performed again using the substrate initial key as an encryption key, each authentication processing is performed, and the processing ends. In this case, the business of that day is operated in this board initial key mode throughout the day, and when the power is turned on the next day, a security board information acquisition request is issued again to the key management server to try to acquire the security board information (see FIG. 45). Further, as shown in step S208a, the inquiry process for the security board information may be executed again at this time without waiting for the power-up of the next day. In this case, while the game is progressing by the operation in the board initial key mode, the inquiry process of the security board information is also advanced in parallel.

  FIG. 49A is an example of a flowchart for explaining the communication mode switching process between the CU control unit and the SC. Referring to FIG. 49A, in step S211, the CU control unit 323 requests a board authentication key from the key management server, and the process proceeds to the next step S212.

  In step S212, the CU control unit 323 obtains a board authentication key from the security board information sent from the key management server, and transmits update information in the security board information to the SC 325b, and next step S213. The process proceeds.

  In step S213, the CU control unit 323 determines whether or not the gaming machine is in a non-operating state. When the mode switching process in the next step S214 is performed, the number of balls added / subtracted cannot be communicated with the gaming machine that is executing the switching process, so that the gaming machine is not in operation before the mode switching process in step S214. It is determined whether or not. Whether or not the gaming machine is in a non-operating state is determined based on whether or not a player's card is inserted in the CU. When no card is inserted, the gaming machine is determined to be in an inoperative state, while when a card is inserted, the gaming machine is determined to be in an operating state. If the gaming machine corresponding to the CU control unit 323 is in a non-operating state, the process proceeds to step S214. If the gaming machine corresponding to the CU control unit 323 is not in a non-operating state, the gaming machine is in a non-operating state. Step S213 is performed until.

  In step S214, based on the board authentication key acquired in step S212, the CU control unit 323 advances the process using the board authentication key as the encryption key from the mode in which the board initial key is used as the encryption key (board initial key mode). The communication mode is switched to the mode (board authentication key mode), and the process ends.

  FIG. 49B is an example of a flowchart for explaining the communication mode switching process between the SC and the communication control IC. 49B, in step S216, the SC 325b acquires update information from the CU control unit 323. As described above, the CU control unit 323 transmits update information to the SC 325b in step S212. Receiving it, the SC 325b acquires the update information. Next, in step S217, the SC 325b generates this authentication key from the acquired update information. Next, similarly to step S213 described above, in step S218, the SC 325b determines whether or not the gaming machine is in a non-operating state, and executes the process of step S219 on the condition that it is in a non-operating state. In step S219, the SC 325b uses the authentication key as the encryption key from the mode (provisional authentication key mode) in which the temporary authentication key is used as the encryption key for the communication mode between the SC 325b and the communication control IC 325a based on the generated authentication key. Switch to the mode to proceed with the process (this authentication key mode).

  According to such an embodiment, before the authenticity of the CU is authenticated by the board authentication key registered in the key management server, a normal communication mode is entered and the game on the P cards using the remaining card amount is performed. It can be prevented from becoming possible. Furthermore, even when the board authentication key registered in the key management server cannot be received, the restricted communication mode is set and a game on the P units is allowed, so that flexible operation is possible. In addition, in this case, since the game is allowed under a predetermined restriction compared to the normal communication mode, the operation can be performed without requiring authentication with the board authentication key stored in the key management server. It can be prevented from continuing.

  FIGS. 50A and 50B are other examples of a flowchart for explaining the communication mode switching process. Referring to FIG. 50A showing the switching process of the communication mode between the CU control unit and the SC, in step S221, the CU control unit 323 requests security board information from the key management server, and the next step S222 is performed. The process proceeds.

  In step S222, the hall server acquires the security board information requested by the CU control unit 323 from the key management server from the key management server, and the hall server acquires the board authentication key from the security board information. Next, in step S223, the hall server determines whether or not the gaming machine corresponding to the CU control unit 323 that has requested the security board information is in a non-operating state for the same purpose as in step S213 described above. When the gaming machine becomes non-operating, the hall server transmits the acquired board authentication key to the CU control unit 323 in step S224, and the CU control unit 323 that has received the update information in the security board information is SC325b. Send to. Next, in step S225, based on the board authentication key acquired in step S2224, the CU control unit 323 performs processing using the board authentication key as the encryption key from the mode in which processing is performed using the board initial key as the encryption key (board initial key mode). The communication mode is switched to the mode (board authentication key mode) to advance the process, and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50 (b) showing processing for switching the communication mode between the SC and the communication control IC, the SC 325b acquires update information from the CU control unit 323 in step S226. As described above, the CU control unit 323 transmits update information to the SC 325b in step S224. Receiving it, the SC 325b acquires the update information. Next, in step S227, the SC 325b generates this authentication key from the acquired update information. Next, in step S228, the SC 325b obtains the authentication key from the mode (provisional authentication key mode) in which the temporary authentication key is used as the encryption key for the communication mode between the SC 325b and the communication control IC 325a based on the generated authentication key. Switch to a mode in which processing is performed as an encryption key (this authentication key mode).

  According to such an embodiment, even when the hall server receives the board authentication key from the key management server in the restricted communication mode, the board authentication key is immediately transmitted to the CU when the P units are in operation. Provided in the restricted communication mode because the board authentication key is sent from the hall server to the CU and switched to the normal communication mode on the condition that the gaming machine is in a non-operating state, instead of switching to the normal communication mode. It is possible to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantages by affecting the game that has been played.

<Authentication operation between SC 325b and CU control unit 323>
Next, the unified store code check and the board manufacturer code authentication will be described in more detail.

  First, with reference to FIG. 51, the unified store code check process by SC325b will be described. This process is an authentication operation in which the SC 325b checks the unified store code notified at the time of the board connection request and the unified store code notified last time, and determines that the installed store has changed when there is a mismatch. The SC 325b determines whether or not the stored previous unified store code is a dummy code (step S1101). For example, all data of the dummy code of the unified store code is “0xFF”. This dummy code is used in place of the normal unified store code at the time of shipment before the CU 3 is installed in the amusement hall (store), and is already stored in the SC 325b at the time of shipment. Then, at the time of shipment, a dummy code is input to the SC 325b via the CU control unit 323, and the SC 325b determines that the input dummy code matches the stored dummy code and authenticates it. The dummy code is stored as a default in the hall server of the amusement hall as a temporary shop code when a unified store code has not yet been acquired for a newly opened game hall (hall). Then, the dummy code is downloaded from the hall server to the CU 3 installed in the game hall of the newly opened store, and the SC 325b determines that the downloaded dummy code matches the stored dummy code and authenticates it. Allows gaming.

  The hall server that has acquired the regular unified store code transmits the unified store code to the CU control unit 323. Upon receiving the request, the CU control unit 323 transmits the unified store code to the SC 325b when the board connection is requested at the next power-on. Receiving it, SC325b, when determining that the previous unified store code stored is a dummy code (step S1101: YES), updates the memory to the unified store code notified from the hall server at the time of board connection request. However, it does not initialize the board authentication key and the main authentication key information and operates by taking over the previous authentication modes. Thereafter, the SC 325b stores the authentication log information (step S1106). The initialization of the board authentication key and the main authentication key information is a process required when the CU 3 installed in a certain game arcade is moved to another game arcade, but is a dummy code stored in the SC 325b. Is updated to the unified store code, the amusement hall of the newly opened store obtains the unified store code and downloads the unified store code to the CU3. It is not necessary to initialize the key and the authentication key information. Conversely, if the board authentication key and this authentication key information are initialized in such a case, a request for obtaining the board authentication key is required again, increasing the number of board initial key operations (timed operation) in one business day, and timed operation. There is a disadvantage that the grace period is reduced. In order to avoid such inconvenience, control is performed so that the board authentication key and the main authentication key information are not initialized.

  On the other hand, if the SC 325b determines that the previous unified store code stored is not a dummy code (step S1101: NO), the unified store code notified from the hall server at the time of board connection request and the stored previous store code are stored. It is determined whether or not the unified store code matches (step S1102).

  If the SC 325b determines that the unified store code notified from the hall server at the time of board connection request matches the previous unified store code stored (YES in step S1102), the authentication process is performed on the board initial key. Transition to an authentication sequence, or transition to a board authentication key authentication sequence (step S1103). Note that the SC 325b transitions to the board authentication key authentication sequence when the previous authentication mode is the board authentication key mode, and shifts to the board initial key authentication sequence when the previous authentication mode is any other authentication mode.

  On the other hand, if the SC 325b determines that the unified store code notified from the hall server at the time of board connection request does not match the previous unified store code stored (step S1102: NO), the board authentication key information The authentication key information is initialized (cleared) (step S1104). Such a mismatch in the unified store code occurs when the CU 3 installed in a certain game hall is moved to another game hall. Since CU3 has been moved to another amusement hall, the board authentication key information and the main authentication key information used in the previous amusement hall are initialized (cleared) to ensure security. When the unified store code notified from the CU control unit 323 is changed, the SC 325b sets initialization (clear) of the authentication key in the communication control IC 325a and starts authentication with the temporary authentication key. Note that when the SC 325b initializes (clears) the authentication key information, the communication control IC 325a may also control to initialize (clear) the authentication key information, and particularly performs such control. Without authentication, since SC 325b is not the main authentication key at the time of the next authentication with the communication control IC 325a, the authentication may return to the temporary authentication key.

  Further, the SC 325b initializes (clears) the board authentication key information and the main authentication key information in step S1104, and then transitions the authentication process to the board initial key authentication sequence and the temporary authentication key sequence (step S1105).

  In step S1103, the SC 325b transitions the authentication process to the board initial key authentication sequence, or transitions to the board authentication key authentication sequence. In step S1104, the SC 325b stores the authentication log information after transitioning to the board initial key authentication sequence. (Step S1106).

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart for explaining the board manufacturer code authentication operation. The board manufacturer code authentication is an authentication operation in which the SC 325b and the CU control unit 323 perform authentication using the board manufacturer code stored as initial information. Referring to FIG. 52, first, SC 325b and CU control unit 323 perform unit authentication by a challenge / response method using the stored board manufacturer code. (Step S1201). The response code generated at the time of single unit authentication is generated, for example, by performing block encryption of the challenge code using the stored board manufacturer code as a key and then hashing with a hash function.

  The SC 325b determines whether the authentication result obtained by checking the response code generated by the CU control unit 323 with respect to the generated challenge code is normal (step S1202). If the SC 325b determines that the authentication result is normal (step S1202: YES), the SC 325b determines whether it has already been authenticated with the board authentication key (step S1203). On the other hand, when the SC 325b determines that the authentication result is not normal (abnormal) (step S1202: NO), the SC 325b determines whether it is abnormal continuously (eg, three times) n times (step S1204).

  If the SC 325b determines that the board authentication key has already been authenticated (step S1203: YES), the process proceeds to the board authentication key authentication process and maintains the board authentication key authentication sequence (step S1205). On the other hand, if the SC 325b determines that the board authentication key has not been authenticated (step S1203: NO), the process proceeds to the board initial key authentication process (step S1206).

  SC325b returns a process to step S1201, when it is judged that it is not abnormal continuously n times (step S1204: NO). On the other hand, when the SC 325b determines that the abnormality is continuous n times (step S1204: YES), the board authentication key information and the main authentication key information are initialized (cleared) to ensure security (step S1207). . Thereby, the inconvenience that the board authentication key information and the main authentication key information are stolen can be prevented. Thereafter, the SC 325b makes a transition to a board initial key authentication process (step S1208).

  In step S1205, the SC 325b maintains the board authentication key authentication sequence, or transitions to the board initial key authentication process in steps S1206 and S1208, and then saves the authentication log information (step S1209).

<Health Check>
Next, in the gaming system according to the present embodiment, for example, even when communication between the CU 3 or P table 2 and the key management server is interrupted, the CU 3 or P table 2 is stably operated. It is possible to continue operation using the timed operation function. However, there is a possibility that the CU 3 and the P stand 2 are operated without performing communication with the key management server by intentionally using the timed operation function, and unauthorized business may be performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the CU 3 or P unit 2 operating using the timed operation function continues to be disconnected from the key management server for a predetermined period, the timed operation function Is configured to be disabled. In the present embodiment, even if the timed operation function of the CU 3 or P unit 2 is disabled, the setting of the timed operation function is enabled again when communication with the key management server is recovered and a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining processing for invalidating the timed operation function in the gaming system according to the present embodiment. With reference to FIG. 53, processing for invalidating the timed operation function will be described. A process for invalidating the timed operation function is a predetermined process performed between the key management server 800 and the hall server 801, between the hall server 801 and the CU control unit 323, and between the CU control unit 323 and SC 325b.

  First, the CU 3 including the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325 b communicates with the P stand 2 so that the player can play a game with the P stand 2. At this time, for example, in communication between the CU control unit 323 and SC 325b, encryption communication based on the secret key A is performed, and a status information request command from the CU control unit 323 is also a response of a status information response from the SC 325b. Is also encrypted based on the secret key A.

  The secret key A is regularly updated by a health check from the key management server 800, so that communication between the CU control units 323-SC325b can be normally performed. The key management server 800 shown in FIG. 53 transmits a health check request command to the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b to perform a health check during normal communication between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b. However, since the communication between the key management server 800 and the hole server 801 is not connected, the health check request command does not reach the CU control unit 323.

  The health check from the key management server 800 is performed once a day, for example, and the health check response to the transmitted health check request cannot be obtained because the communication between the key management server 800 and the hall server 801 is not available. The health check request is sent on the next day without re-sending.

  The communication between the CU control units 323 to SC 325b continues communication without any restriction because of the timed operation function even when the health check from the key management server 800 is not performed and the secret key A is not updated. Can be done. Therefore, communication between the CU 3 and the P stand 2 can be performed normally, and the CU 3 and the P stand 2 can be normally operated to enable the P stand 2 to operate.

  However, when the key management server 800 transmits a health check request command and does not reach the CU control unit 323, for example, 10 days (10 times if health check is performed once a day) continues. It is determined that the health check request time limit is exceeded. If it is determined that the health check request time limit is exceeded, the SC 325b disables the timed operation function and cannot perform communication between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b using the secret key A. When the secret key A cannot be used in the communication between the CU control units 323 and SC325b, the communication content is greatly limited, and the communication between the CU3 and the P stand 2 is also limited. Therefore, the operation of the CU 3 and the P stand 2 can be disabled, or can be operated with significant restrictions.

  In the communication between the CU control units 323 to 325b, the encryption communication based on the secret key A is not performed, and neither the status information request command from the CU control unit 323 nor the response of the status information response from the SC 325b is the secret key. Not encrypted based on A. Instead, communication may be performed by encryption based on the initial key A held in the CU control unit 323 or the SC 325b, for example. In this case, for example, commands that can be communicated between the CU control units 323 to SC 325b are greatly limited.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the timed operation function is invalidated when the state in which communication with the key management server is interrupted cannot be continuously checked for a predetermined period of time, so the timed operation function is used. Thus, it is possible to prevent the P platform 2 from operating illegally. The invalid condition for disabling the timed operation function is that there is a period during which the health check cannot be performed for 10 days. However, the health check request command is not received and the response of the health check response cannot be received. It may be a condition that the predetermined number of times has been reached.

  Next, processing for enabling the timed operation function for a gaming system in which the timed operation function is disabled will be described. FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining processing for enabling the timed operation function in the gaming system according to the present embodiment. With reference to FIG. 54, processing for enabling the timed operation function will be described. The process for enabling the timed operation function is performed in a predetermined process between the key management server 800 and the hall server 801, between the hall server 801 and the CU control unit 323, and between the CU control unit 323 and SC 325b.

  First, the CU 3 including the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b communicates with the P-unit 2, sends a status information request command from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b, and receives the response of the status information response from the SC 325b. It is transmitted to the control unit 323. At this time, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b perform timed operation when an invalid condition is established in a state in which a health check response to the transmitted health check request cannot be obtained because communication between the key management server 800 and the hall server 801 is disconnected. The function is disabled.

  Thereafter, when the line between the key management server 800 and the hall server 801 is restored and communication is possible, a health check response to the health check request transmitted from the key management server 800 is obtained. The state in which the health check from the key management server 800 becomes possible has passed for three days, and the key management server 800 makes a health check request on the fourth day. If the health check can be performed, the communication between the CU control units 323 and SC325b performs the encryption communication based on the secret key A.

  Specifically, the key management server 800 transmits a health check request command to the hall server 801, and the hall server 801 receiving the command transmits a health check request command to the CU control unit 323. Further, the CU control unit 323 receives a command from the hall server 801 and transmits a board state request command including a health check request as additional information to the SC 325b.

  Upon receiving the board status request command from the CU control unit 323, the SC 325b enables the timed operation function that has been disabled because the line is restored and the health check has been normally performed for three days. By enabling the timed operation function, even if communication between the key management server 800 and the hall server 801 is interrupted in the future and the health check cannot be performed, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b use the timed operation function to keep it secret. Communication based on the key A can be performed. As a result, the CU 3 and the P platform 2 can be stably operated even if a failure such as a disconnection with the key management server 800 occurs.

  Further, the SC 325b receives a substrate state request command and transmits a substrate state response response including a health check response as additional information to the CU control unit 323. The health check response includes the state information of SC 325 b and the state information of P base 2 received from P base 2. Although not shown in FIG. 35, the SC 325b makes a health check request to the P base 2 and receives the health check response from the P base 2, thereby acquiring the status information of the P base 2.

  The CU control unit 323 receives a response of the substrate state response from the SC 325b, and transmits a response of the health check response to the hall server 801. The response of the health check response includes, for example, information on the authentication state between the CU control units 323 and SC325b. Further, the hall server 801 receives a health check response response from the CU control unit 323 and transmits a health check response response to the key management server 800.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the timed operation function is invalid when the health check can be performed continuously for a predetermined period when the line with the key management server is restored and communication is possible. Since it is enabled, it is possible to operate stably without impeding the operation of the amusement hall using the timed operation function. Further, since it is not necessary for the clerk to operate each CU 3 or P stand 2 in order to enable the timed operation function that is invalid, the work of the clerk can be reduced. Note that the return condition for enabling the timed operation function is that the health check can be performed for 3 days. However, the return condition is not limited to this, and a health check request command is sent to respond to the health check response. It is also possible to make it a condition that the number of times that can be received has reached a predetermined number. Also, the period during which health check is disabled (for example, 10 days), which is an invalid condition for disabling the timed operation function, is compared to the period during which health check is enabled (for example, 3 days), which is a return condition for enabling the timed operation function. This makes it possible to operate the CU 3 and the P stand 2 stably without impeding the operation of the game hall while preventing unauthorized use of the timed operation function.

<Communication between main control unit and payout control unit>
Next, communication between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 in the P stand 2 will be described in more detail. First, in the P stand 2 shown in FIG. 4, communication between the main control board 16 provided on the game board 26 and the payout control board 17 provided on the front frame 5 is performed by the main control provided on the main control board 16. This is performed between the part 161 and the payout control part 171 provided in the front frame 5. FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram for explaining communication performed between the main control unit 161, the payout control unit 171, and the communication control IC.

  The main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 shown in FIG. 55 will be described below as being configured with one chip, but a similar function may be configured with a plurality of chips. The main control unit 161 includes a main control circuit 161a, a communication control circuit 161b, and a main control storage unit 161c. The main control circuit 161 a performs various processes in the main control unit 161 (for example, a process of counting winning balls based on signals from the winning sensor 162 or detecting fraud based on signals from the radio wave sensor 163). Is a circuit for executing a control program for The communication control circuit 161b is a circuit for performing cryptographic communication between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171. The main control storage unit 161c is a storage device for storing a user program, a control program, and data to be executed by the main control unit 161, and is configured by, for example, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory) of a nonvolatile memory. . Since the main control storage unit 161c includes FeRAM, the information stored in the FeRAM does not need to be backed up by an external power source.

  On the other hand, the payout control unit 171 includes a payout control circuit 171a, a communication control circuit 171b, and a payout control storage unit 171c. The payout control circuit 171a controls various processes (the launch motor 18 via the launch control board 31 by the payout control unit 171 or the game ball to the holding ball for the CU3 based on the signal from the counting button 28. A circuit for executing a control program for performing a process of requesting conversion). The communication control circuit 171b is a circuit for performing encryption communication between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 and encryption communication between the payout control unit 171 and the communication control IC 325a. The payout control storage unit 171c is a storage device for storing a user program, a control program, data, and the like to be executed by the payout control unit 171, and is configured by, for example, a FeRAM that is a nonvolatile memory. Since the payout control storage unit 171c includes a FeRAM, the information stored in the FeRAM does not need to be backed up by an external power source.

  Further, the communication control circuits 161b and 171b will be described in detail. FIG. 56 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration of a communication control circuit 161b for performing cryptographic communication with the payout control unit 171. First, the communication control circuit 161b has a plurality of functions, such as an authentication communication function, an encryption communication function, an interrupt function, and a recovery function.

  The authentication communication function is a function for mutual authentication with the payout control unit 171 in the front frame 5. The encryption communication function is a function for encrypting and decrypting a message between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171. The encryption communication function can be automatically inserted into a tamper-proof code message, or a code for detecting a communication error can be automatically inserted. Further, the encryption communication function can periodically pass information of the main control unit 161 to the payout control unit 171 and receive information of the payout control unit 171 by setting a communication interval.

  For example, the interrupt function notifies an interrupt after completion of decryption of a message, or notifies an interrupt when the authentication state changes. The recovery function is a function for performing recovery communication with the payout control unit 171 in the encryption communication control unit 600 according to a request from the user. In addition, the communication control circuit 161b can set a communication response timeout time or can set a communication interval between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 56, the communication control circuit 161b performs encryption communication with a plurality of registers that perform input / output with the control program executed by the main control circuit 161a and encryption communication with the payout control unit 171. A control unit 600 is included.

  The registers included in the communication control circuit 161b include, for example, an authentication status register 611, an authentication interrupt setting register 612, a transmission data buffer 613, a transmission data number register 614, an information transmission clear register 615, a main control game information register 616, a payout control game. An information register 617, a recovery communication completion register 618, an encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 619, and the like are included.

  The authentication status register 611 indicates whether or not the chip ID of the main control unit 161 is authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 612, whether or not to permit interruption for changing the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The transmission data buffer 613 is a buffer for writing game information to be transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the payout control unit 171 (for example, the storage capacity is 128 bytes), and the game information is stored in the buffer by FIFO (First In, First Out). Written. Further, by configuring the transmission data buffer 613 with a non-volatile memory, communication interruption occurs between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171, and game information written in the buffer that has not been transmitted due to communication failure Is retained after return. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of the user program to generate game information written in the transmission data buffer 613 becomes unnecessary, and the processing load of the main control unit 161 is reduced. Can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Since the transmission data buffer 613 is composed of a non-volatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the transmission data buffer 613 are volatile memories.

  The transmission data number register 614 is a register for writing the number of data transmitted to the main control unit 161 payout control unit 171, and monitors the number of data in the transmission data buffer 613. The information transmission clear register 615 is a register for writing a request for clearing data in the transmission data buffer 613.

  The main control game information register 616 is a register in which data transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the payout control unit 171 is written. The data written in the main control game information register 616 is encrypted by the encryption communication control unit 600 and transmitted to the payout control unit 171. The payout control game information register 617 is a register in which data transmitted from the payout control unit 171 to the main control unit 161 is written. The data written in the payout control game information register 617 is the data decrypted by the encryption communication control unit 600.

  The recovery communication completion register 618 is a register in which information indicating whether recovery communication is completed between the main control unit and the payout control unit is written. The encryption communication data clear request / completion register 619 is information that requests clearing of data such as a serial number held in the encryption communication control unit 600 communicating with the payout control unit 171 and that the data has been deleted. This is a register in which information indicating (clear completion) is written.

  The communication control circuit 171b is divided into a configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161 and a configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325a, and performs communication control of the configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161. A configuration part for performing cryptographic communication with the circuit 171b1 and the communication control IC 325a will be described below as a communication control circuit 171b2.

  First, FIG. 57 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration of a communication control circuit 171b1 for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161. First, the communication control circuit 171b1 has a plurality of functions, such as an authentication communication function, an encryption communication function, an interrupt function, and a recovery function.

  The authentication communication function is a function for mutual authentication with the main control unit 161 of the game board 26 and mutual authentication with the communication control IC 325a of the CU3. The encryption communication function is a function for encrypting and decrypting a message between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171. The encryption communication function can be automatically inserted into a tamper-proof code message, or a code for detecting a communication error can be automatically inserted. In addition, the encryption communication function can periodically pass information of the payout control unit 171 to the main control unit 161 and receive information of the main control unit 161 by setting a communication interval.

  For example, the interrupt function notifies an interrupt after completion of decryption of a message, or notifies an interrupt when the authentication state changes. The recovery function is a function for performing recovery communication with the main control unit 161 and the communication control IC 325a in the encryption communication control unit 700 in response to a request from the user. In addition, the communication control circuit 171b1 can set a communication response time-out period and can set a communication interval between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57, the communication control circuit 171b1 has a plurality of registers that perform input / output with the control program executed by the payout control circuit 171a, and encryption communication for performing encryption communication with the payout control unit 171. A control unit 700 is included.

  The registers included in the communication control circuit 171b1 include, for example, an authentication status register 711, an authentication interrupt setting register 712, a data reception register 713, a reception data number register 714, an information reception clear register 715, a payout control game information register 716, and a main control game. An information register 717, a recovery request / completion register 718, an encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 719, and the like are included.

  The authentication status register 711 indicates whether or not the chip ID of the payout control unit 171 is authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 712, whether or not to permit an interrupt that changes the chip ID authentication, the authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The data reception register 713 is a buffer (for example, having a storage capacity of 128 bytes) in which the game information transmitted from the main control unit 161 and received by the payout control unit 171 is written, and the buffer is a FIFO (First In, First Out) game. Information is written. Further, by configuring the data reception register 713 with a non-volatile memory, communication information is written between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171, and the game information written in the register that has not been transmitted due to communication failure is stored. Is retained after return. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of the user program to generate game information written in the data reception register 713 is not necessary, and the processing load of the main control unit 161 is reduced. Can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Since the data reception register 713 is composed of a nonvolatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the data reception register 713 are composed of a volatile memory.

  The reception data number register 714 is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the main control unit 161 and received by the payout control unit 171, and monitors the number of data in the data reception register 713. The information reception clear register 715 is a register in which a request for clearing data in the data reception register 713 is written.

  The payout control game information register 716 is a register in which data transmitted from the payout control unit 171 to the main control unit 161 is written. The data written in the payout control game information register 716 is encrypted by the encryption communication control unit 700 and transmitted to the main control unit 161. The main control game information register 717 is a register in which data transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the payout control unit 171 is written. The data written in the main control game information register 717 is data decrypted by the encryption communication control unit 700.

  The recovery request / completion register 718 is a register in which information indicating whether or not recovery communication is requested between the main control unit and the payout control unit and whether or not the recovery communication is completed is written. The encryption communication data clear request / completion register 719 stores information requesting to clear data such as a serial number held in the encryption communication control unit 700 communicating with the main control unit 161, and that the data has been deleted. This is a register in which information indicating (clear completion) is written.

  In addition, the communication control circuit 171b1 includes a communication timeout time setting register 719a, a communication interval time setting register 719b, and a main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719c.

  The main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719c stores the data in the transmission data buffer 613 of the main control unit 161 in the data reception register 713 after the authentication between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 expires. This register sets the valid time that can be written. By setting the register, the data reception register 713 can be written to even after the authentication between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 has expired (for example, from 5 seconds to 15 seconds). About seconds). Thus, for example, even when there is a floating ball (a ball that has not been dropped due to being caught between nails of the game area 27) when authentication is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the floating ball has won a prize. It is possible to securely store and protect the information. Even in the case of a gaming machine having a stage with a long ball residence time, it is assumed that the effective period can be set long so that the information that the floating ball has won can be reliably stored.

  Originally, information cannot be written in the data reception register 713 via the encryption communication control unit 700 from the viewpoint of security after the authentication between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 is terminated. However, in the data reception register 713, for example, it is necessary to write information that the floating ball has won after the authentication between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 has expired. Therefore, the communication control circuit 171b1 sets an effective time in the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719c, and this setting is performed in the encryption communication control unit 700, whereby the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 are set. Information can be written to the data reception register 713 via the encryption communication control unit 700 within the valid period even after the authentication between the two is expired. It should be noted that the set value of the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719c can be read out after the main setting by the encryption communication control unit 700.

  FIG. 58 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration of a communication control circuit 171b2 for performing cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325a. As shown in FIG. 58, the communication control circuit 171b2 performs, for example, an authentication status register 721, an authentication interrupt setting register 722, a transmission data buffer 723a, a data reception register 723b, and a transmission data number register 724 in order to perform cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325a. , Received data count register 725, recovery communication addition sphere request register 726, recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727, recovery request / completion register 728, encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 729, communication timeout timer-prescaler setting register 729a, and communication It has a timeout time setting register 729b and the like.

  The authentication status register 721 indicates whether or not the chip ID of the payout control unit 171 is authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 722, whether or not to permit an interrupt that changes the chip ID authentication, the authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The transmission data buffer 723a is a buffer for writing a business message to be transmitted from the payout control unit 171 to the communication control IC 325a (for example, the storage capacity is 128 bytes), and the business message is written to the buffer by FIFO (First In, First Out). Is included. The data reception register 723b is a buffer (for example, having a storage capacity of 128 bytes) in which a business message transmitted from the communication control IC 325a and received by the payout control unit 171 is written, and a business message is stored in the buffer by FIFO (First In, First Out). Is written.

  By configuring the transmission data buffer 723a and the data reception register 723b with a nonvolatile memory, communication disconnection occurs between the payout control unit 171 and the communication control IC 325a, and the buffer and register that have not been transmitted due to communication failure are stored in the buffer and register. The written business message is retained even after returning. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of a user program to generate a business message written in the transmission data buffer 723a and the data reception register 723b becomes unnecessary, and the payout control unit 171 and the processing load of the communication control IC 325a can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Note that since the transmission data buffer 723a and the data reception register 723b are configured by a nonvolatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the transmission data buffer 723a and the data reception register 723b are composed of a volatile memory.

  The transmission data number register 724 is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the payout control unit 171 to the communication control IC 325a, and monitors the number of data in the transmission data buffer 723a. The reception data number register 725 is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the communication control IC 325a and received by the payout control unit 171 and monitors the number of data in the data reception register 723b.

  The recovery communication addition sphere request register 726 is a register in which the number of addition spheres is written when an addition sphere is generated as a result of recovery communication between the communication control IC and the payout control unit after power-off recovery. The recovery communication addition ball request register 726 is updated only when the recovery communication is completed. The recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727 is a register in which the number of subtraction spheres is written when a subtraction sphere is generated as a result of recovery communication between the communication control IC and the payout control unit after the power-off recovery. Note that the recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727 is also updated only when the recovery communication is completed.

  The recovery request / completion register 728 is a register in which information indicating whether or not recovery communication is requested between the communication control IC and the payout control unit and information indicating whether or not the recovery communication is completed are written. The encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 729 is information that requests clearing of data such as a serial number held in the encrypted communication control unit 700 communicating with the communication control IC 325a, and that the data has been deleted ( This is a register in which information indicating "clear completion" is written.

<Recovery completion confirmation process>
Next, in the communication between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171, when returning from an incommunicable state such as a power-off, the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 have the main control storage unit 161 c and the payout control memory. The recovery process which transmits the predetermined information memorize | stored in the part 171c is performed. Then, the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 perform a recovery completion confirmation process for resuming the generation of predetermined information by executing the user program on the condition that the recovery process ends. Specifically, the recovery completion confirmation process will be described with reference to a flowchart. FIG. 59 is a flowchart for explaining the recovery completion confirmation process.

  First, when the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 are turned on in order to recover from an incommunicable state such as a power failure, the main control circuit 161a and the payout control circuit 171a start the processing of the authentication sequence. When the authentication is completed, the authentication results are written in the authentication status registers 611 and 711 of the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171, respectively. Then, the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 confirm whether or not authentication completion is written in the respective authentication status registers 611 and 711 (step S291). When the authentication completion is not written in the respective authentication status registers 611 and 711 (step S291: NO), the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 return to the process of step S291.

  When the authentication completion is written in the respective authentication status registers 611 and 711 (step S291: YES), the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 perform recovery in the recovery communication completion register 618 and the recovery request / completion register 718. It is confirmed whether or not a flag indicating completion is written (step S292). When the flag indicating the completion of recovery is not written in the recovery communication completion register 618 and the recovery request / completion register 718 (step S292: NO), the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 return to the process of step S292.

  The main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 start the processing of the user program when the recovery completion flag is written in the recovery communication completion register 618 and the recovery request / completion register 718 (step S292: YES). (Step S293). As means for starting the processing of the user program, for example, a means for transmitting a signal for starting the processing of the user program to start the processing of the user program and a stopping means for stopping the processing of the user program are provided. There are means for starting the processing of the user program by releasing the means.

  As described above, the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 do not start the processing of the user program until the recovery processing is completed. Therefore, new information by the processing of the user program before the information to be restored by the recovery processing is determined. Is prevented from being written, the processing of the user program can be resumed appropriately.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the main control unit and the payout control unit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, an outline of commands and responses transmitted / received between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 will be described.

  FIG. 60 shows the transmission direction, whether the transmitted data is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

  First, a command named power-on notification is transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the payout control unit 171. This power-on notification command notifies the payout control unit 171 that power is turned on and communication is started. A response named power-on reception is transmitted from the payout control unit 171 to the main control unit 161. This power-on reception response is a response to the main control unit 161 receiving a power-on notification and starting communication.

  Next, a command having a game state notification is transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the payout control unit 171. This gaming state notification command notifies the payout control unit 171 of the gaming state. A response named “game state response” is transmitted from the payout control unit 171 to the main control unit 161. This gaming state response is a response that the main control unit 161 has received a gaming state notification.

<Main sequence processed between main control unit and payout control unit>
Next, a main sequence processed between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 by processing executed by the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62.

<< Communication sequence >>
First, a sequence processed between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. The sequence shown in FIG. 61 is a process executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 has been normally completed.

  The communication between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 is performed by a polling method using the main control unit 161 as a primary station, and the polling interval is 200 ms. Note that communication of power-on notification and power-on reception is excluded. The payout control unit 171 sets “communication line disconnection” and stops the game when the request command from the main control unit 161 is not received even after 1 second has elapsed since the response was transmitted.

  Furthermore, the payout control unit 171 transmits a response command to the main control unit 161 only when normal data is received. When the main control unit 161 does not receive a response command within the polling interval time, the main control unit 161 retransmits the command up to three times including the first time. The serial number used for transmission / reception is stored in the storage unit for both the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 and used for command normality confirmation, power-off recovery, and communication line disconnection recovery.

  Specifically, the communication sequence will be described. First, when the power is turned on, communication of power-on notification and power-on reception is performed between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171, and an authentication new sequence is started. . As described above, the authentication sequence is written in the authentication status registers 611 and 711 that the chip IDs of the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 are authenticated and the communication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is authenticated. . Furthermore, processing for generating an encryption key and a decryption key used for encryption communication between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 is performed by the authentication sequence. The communication between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171 after the processing is performed is encrypted communication using the generated encryption key and decryption key.

  Next, after the authentication sequence is completed, the main control unit 161 transmits a gaming state notification command to the payout control unit 171 with the serial number “n”. The payout control unit 171 returns a game state reception response to the main control unit 161 as “n” without counting up the serial number. Further, the main control unit 161 transmits a gaming state notification command to the payout control unit 171 with the serial number “n + 1”. The payout controller 171 returns a game state reception response to the main controller 161 as “n + 1” without counting up the serial number.

  Thereafter, the main control unit 161 counts up the serial number to “n + 2” and transmits a gaming state notification command to the payout control unit 171. Then, the payout control unit 171 returns a game state reception response to the main control unit 161 as “n + 2” without counting up the serial number.

  In communication between the main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171, the interval from the command transmission of the game state notification of the serial number “n” to the command transmission of the game state notification of the serial number “n + 1”, the game state notification of the serial number “n + 1” The interval from the command transmission to the command transmission of the game number notification of the serial number “n + 2” is 200 ms each.

<< Sequence after power off >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, a process when the status information request is unreached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. In particular, FIG. 62 shows that there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of the payout control unit 171 is once turned off and then turned on again), and the gaming state notification is not reached (from the main control unit 161). FIG. 11 is a sequence diagram for explaining processing when a post-recovery communication partner matches with a payout control unit 171 having not reached a command).

  Referring to FIG. 62, before the power interruption occurs during the game, main controller 161 transmits a gaming state notification including serial number = n to payout controller 171. In response to this, the payout control unit 171 transmits a game state reception including a serial number = n to the main control unit 161.

  Then, after a power interruption occurs in the payout control unit 171 during the game, when a game state notification including a serial number = n + 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the payout control unit 171, the payout control unit 171 is turned off. The game state notification cannot be received because of the state. Thereafter, since the gaming state reception from the payout control unit 171 has not been transmitted, the main control unit 161 performs control to stop communication on the assumption that the power is cut off after 1 second.

  Thereafter, when the authentication sequence is started between the power-on and main control unit 161 and the payout control unit 171, the main control unit 161 includes a power source including serial number = 1 and main control serial number (previous last transmission serial number) = n + 1. An insertion notification is transmitted to the payout control unit 171. The payout control unit 171 has the game state reception serial number transmitted to the main control unit 161 before the power interruption occurs, and therefore, the payout control serial number backed up by the payout control unit 171 becomes n. Therefore, the payout control sequence number = n backed up by the payout control unit 171 and the main control sequence number = n + 1 backed up by the main control unit 161 are inconsistent. When the serial numbers do not match, the payout control unit 171 performs recovery processing on the information of the payout control unit 171 based on the recovery game information included in the power-on notification transmitted from the main control unit 161. Thereafter, the payout control unit 171 transmits the power-on reception including the serial number = 1 to the main control unit 161.

  The main control unit 161 transmits a gaming state notification including a serial number = 2 to the payout control unit 171. The payout control unit 171 performs processing with the contents after the recovery process, and transmits a game state reception including a serial number = 2 to the payout control unit 171. Thereafter, similarly, the main control unit 161 transmits a gaming state notification including a serial number = 3 to the payout control unit 171. The payout control unit 171 transmits the gaming state reception including the serial number = 3 to the payout control unit 171.

  The above-described recovery processing is performed because the serial numbers do not match, but information included in the recovery game information (for example, the number of game information, prize ball information, etc.) is controlled by the main control unit 161 and payout control. The recovery process may be performed even if there is a mismatch with the unit 171.

<Configuration of open detection and connection detection>
Next, the configuration for detecting the opening of the P stand 2 and detecting the connection according to the present embodiment will be described. The P stand 2 according to the present embodiment has a configuration for detecting the opening of the glass door 6, detecting the opening of the front frame 5, and detecting the connection between the front frame 5 and the game board 26. FIG. 63 is a block diagram for explaining opening detection and connection detection of the P stand 2 according to the present embodiment. The front frame 5 and the game board 26 shown in FIG. 63 (a) are electrically connected by a concave drawer connector 33 provided on the front frame 5 side and a convex drawer connector 32 provided on the game board 26 side. . The front frame 5 includes an open detection unit 53, a front frame relay board 52, a payout control board 17, and a concave drawer connector 33 connected in series by a loop-shaped power line 500. That is, the power line 500 is wired to the opening detection unit 53, the front frame relay board 52, the payout control board 17 and the concave drawer connector 33 provided in the front frame 5, and the respective connections are disconnected (for example, disconnection or When the connector is disconnected, no current flows through the power line 500. The game board 26 has a convex drawer connector 32 and a main control board 16. By connecting the convex drawer connector 32 to the concave drawer connector 33, the main control board 16 is also connected in series to the loop-shaped power line 500. In other words, the power line 500 is also wired to the convex drawer connector 32 and the main control board 16 provided on the game board 26, and when the connection is disconnected (for example, disconnection or disconnection of the connector), the power line 500 No current flows in the. The convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 correspond to board connection detection means that can detect the electrical connection between the front frame 5 and the game board 26 by disconnection.

  The power line 500 is included in wiring in a signal cable (for example, the signal cable 36 shown in FIG. 3) that transmits and receives signals between the front frame 5 and the game board 26. The signal cable of the front frame 5 and the signal cable of the game board 26 are connected by a 26-pin or 32-pin convex drawer connector 32 and a concave drawer connector 33. In FIG. 63A, the signal cable is not shown, and only the loop-shaped power line 500 is shown.

  FIG. 63B is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of the opening detection unit 53. The open detection unit 53 includes an open detection switch 12a, a current detector 12b, and a count counter 120. The opening detection switch 12a is a glass door opening detection switch 12 that detects opening of the glass door 6 and a front frame opening detection switch 13 that detects opening of the front frame 5. When the glass door 6 or the front frame 5 is opened ( (OFF state) The loop-shaped power lines 500 are connected in series so as to be disconnected. FIG. 63B shows a case where one opening detection switch 12a is illustrated for the sake of simplicity of explanation, but in an actual configuration, the glass door opening detection switch 12 and the front frame opening detection switch 13 are not shown. Corresponding to each, an open detection switch 12a is provided.

  The current detector 12 b is connected in series to the loop-shaped power line 500 and detects a current flowing through the loop-shaped power line 500. When the current flowing through the loop-shaped power line 500 is no longer detected, the current detector 12b detects that the open detection switch 12a is in the OFF state or the connection between the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 is disconnected. can do. The current detector 12b outputs a detection signal to the count counter 120 when detecting that the open detection switch 12a is in the OFF state or the connection between the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 is disconnected. The current detector 12b is backed up so that the power of the main power supply is supplied from the power supply circuit of the P stand 2 and can operate even when the main power supply is turned off (for example, at night). Power from the power supply is being supplied.

  The counting counter 120 calculates the number of times the glass door 6 is opened, the number of times the front frame 5 is opened, and the number of times that the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 are disconnected based on the detection signal from the current detector 12b. Count. FIG. 64 is a block diagram showing a control circuit of the count counter 120 shown in FIG. Referring to FIG. 64, the counting counter 120 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 10a as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 10b storing an operation program and control data of the CPU 10a, and a work of the CPU 10a. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 10c functioning as an area and an I / O port (Input / Output Port) 10d are provided.

  The count counter 120 is supplied with the power of the main power supply from the power supply circuit of the P stand 2, and the power of the backup power supply so as to be operable even when the main power supply is turned off (for example, at night). Is supplied. A clock signal (CLK signal) and a chip select signal (CS signal) are input from the payout control board 17 shown in FIG. 4, and a data signal indicating the value of the number of detections counted by the count counter 120 is a payout control unit. 171 is output.

  The count counter 120 counts the total number of times the glass door 6 is opened, the number of times the front frame 5 is opened, and the number of times the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 are disconnected, and indicates the value of the number of detections. Output data signal. The counting counter 120 can individually detect and count the number of times the glass door 6 is opened, the number of times the front frame 5 is opened, and the number of times that the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 are disconnected. You may comprise. In addition, the number of times the main control board 16 is removed from the game board 26 by the connecting portion between the power line 500 of the game board 26 and the power line 500a of the main control board 16 functioning as a main control connection detection means is also counted by the counter 120. Can be detected. The connecting portion between the power line 500 of the game board 26 and the power line 500a of the main control board 16 may be connected by a connector such as a drawer connector or may be directly soldered and connected. Here, the power line 500 a of the main control board 16 is configured as a part of the loop-shaped power line 500.

  Next, based on FIG. 65, detection of opening of the glass door 6 or the front frame 5 and detection of disconnection between the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 will be described. In the P stand 2 shown in FIG. 65A, the glass door 6 or the front frame 5 is opened, and the opening detection unit 53 and the front frame relay board 52 are electrically disconnected. When the opening detector 53 and the front frame relay board 52 are electrically disconnected, no current flows through the loop-shaped power line 500, and the current detector 12b may detect the opening of the glass door 6 or the front frame 5. it can.

  Further, in the P platform 2 shown in FIG. 65B, the connection between the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 is disconnected, and the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 are electrically disconnected. The situation is shown. When the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 are electrically disconnected, no current flows through the loop-shaped power line 500 (that is, no current flows when the wiring constituting the power line 500 is disconnected). The current detector 12b can detect disconnection of the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33. As shown in FIG. 65, the open detection switch 12a of the glass door 6 or the front frame 5 and the panel connection detection means of the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 are connected in series by a loop-shaped power line 500. Yes. Therefore, the opening detection unit 53 can detect not only the opening of the glass door 6 or the front frame 5 but also the disconnection between the front frame 5 and the game board 26.

  Next, based on FIG. 66, a storage state of data stored in the RAM 10c and a state in which a data signal is output in accordance with the input of the CS signal and the CLK signal will be described.

  In the RAM 10c, a storage area for storing data of 1 to 18 bits of 18 bits is prepared. In the image in the RAM 10c of FIG. 66, the bit storage areas 1 and 2 are areas for storing the disconnection with the CU3 or the normal state when the disconnection is not normal, and 01 is stored in the normal state. At the time of disconnection, a value other than 01 is stored.

  In the image of the RAM 10 c, the bit data storage areas 3 to 8 indicate the number of times the glass door 6 or the front frame 5 is opened at the start of power OFF of the P base 2, and the relationship between the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33. This is a storage value area for storing the number of times of disconnection (disconnection) (hereinafter also simply referred to as the number of detections). This stored value takes a value in the range of 000000 to 111110, and becomes 111111 at the time of overflow exceeding this range.

  Bit data storage areas 9 to 14 in the image in the RAM 10c are current value storage areas (current value tables) for storing the current values of the number of detections. This current value takes a value in the range of 000000 to 111110. The storage of the current value storage area (current value table) is not initialized by an external operation. However, as will be described with reference to FIG. 67 (c), in a normal time when the power supply of the P stand 2 is ON, when the current value reaches the upper limit, it is counted up from the initial value again and loops.

  The bit data storage areas 15 and 16 in the image of the RAM 10c take a value of 01 at a normal time when power is not interrupted and a value of 10 at a power disconnection. The bit data storage areas 17 and 18 in the figure of the image in the RAM 10c take a value of 01 after transmitting the number of detections to the payout control unit 171 and take a value of 10 before sending.

  As will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 67 (b), the current value storage area (current value table) is such that the glass door 6 or the front frame 5 is opened and convex when the power is cut off (when the power is off). Every time the connection between the mold drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 is disconnected (hereinafter, also simply referred to as the opening of the glass door 6 or the front frame 5), the memory stored in the storage areas 3 to 8 is stored. The value is represented as n. Each time the glass door 6 or the front frame 5 is opened, it is counted up as n + 1, n + 2,... And the glass door 6 or the front frame 5 is further opened after it is counted up to the upper limit n + 61. The value is 63 (the value at which the round flag is set), and no further count-up is performed.

  Then, when the power supply of the P stand 2 is turned on, it is output to the payout control unit 171 as 12-bit data of 1 to 12, as shown in FIG. This data output indicates a normal time when the bit data in FIGS. 1 and 2 is 01, and a disconnection with the CU3 when the bit data is not 01. For the bit data of 3 to 8, the difference value (value in the range of 000000 to 111110) is output as a difference value obtained by subtracting the current value from the stored value at times other than the above-described overflow time. On the other hand, at the time of overflow, a value of 111111 is output.

  In addition, after the current value storage area (current value table) is counted up to n + 61 which is the upper limit, the glass door 6 or the front frame 5 is further opened and the value becomes 63 (a value in which the round flag is set). The count up may be continued even after. In this case, the final count value is not output when output to the payout control unit 171 but the above-described overflow value “111111” is output.

  The bit data of 9 and 10 has a value of 01 at normal time and 10 at power interruption. Since the output of bit data 9 and 10 is 10, it can be seen that, for example, the counting counter 120 is replaced at night. In other words, since these counters 120 are replaced, both the main power source and the backup power source are not supplied to the counters 120. In this case, the bit data of 9 and 10 becomes 10, and the 10 By outputting, it becomes possible for the payout control unit 171 to determine that the counter 120 has been illegally replaced at night.

  The bit data of 11 and 12 is 01 after the data is transmitted to the payout control unit 171 and is 10 before the data is transmitted.

  Next, the relationship between the data signal output to the payout control unit 171 and the CLK signal and CS signal input from the payout control board 17 will be described. The RAM 10c of the counting counter 120 stores the current value of the number of detections from the time when the game room is closed and the power supply of the P stand 2 is turned off until the power is turned on at the start of business the next morning. And after the power supply of P stand 2 is started, the payout control part 171 transmits CS signal and CLK signal to the count counter 120 in order to acquire the detection frequency.

  Receiving the CS signal and the CLK signal, the CPU 10a of the counting counter 120 repeatedly loops data until the CS signal falls according to the rising edge of the CS signal and outputs the data to the payout control unit 171. The payout control unit 171 determines that an appropriate data signal has been received when the data signal transmitted repeatedly is read, for example, three times and is the same data three times.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 66, if there is no CLK signal for 100 .mu. During the CS signal rising period (when it is low level), the data is set to 1 at the next rising edge of the CLK signal. Control to discharge from the bit is performed.

  This 100μ is configured so that the gaming machine maker can input and set it in the register of the counting counter 120. In addition, you may comprise so that it can input and set to a register | resistor in the game hall side.

  In addition, after the CS signal and the CLK signal have performed a predetermined operation, when the round flag is set, control is performed to clear the value stored in the RAM 10c of the count counter 120 and set the value to 000000. For example, the stored value of the CPU (register) 10a is cleared at the stage where the CLK signal repeats ON and OFF a predetermined number of times after the CS signal becomes low level.

  Note that a backable RAM is used as a memory to detect that the glass door 6 or the front frame 5 is opened even when the power of the P table 2 is turned off and store the count value. If 2 is always powered on, a register may be used instead of RAM.

  Next, the control operation of the CPU 10a of the count counter 120 will be described with reference to FIG. First, referring to FIG. 67 (a), it is determined in step S (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1 whether or not the main power source of the P base 2 is OFF and the backup power source is ON. Since the main power supply is on during normal business hours at the amusement hall, the determination of NO is made at S1, the control proceeds to S7, and the detection signal rises when the glass door 6 or the front frame 5 is opened. Is triggered every time it is opened, and the number of times of opening is counted, and the connection is triggered by the rise of the detection signal associated with the disconnection of the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33. Every time it is removed, the number of times is counted up. This count-up is counted up in the current value storage area (current value table) described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 (c) shows how the current value table counts up normally when the power is turned on. In the current value table, the count value is counted so as to loop, such as counting up from 0, counting up to 62 which is the upper limit thereof, and counting up from 0 again. Then, the values in the current value table counted up in S7 are displayed on the 7-segment display 50.

  On the other hand, during the period from the end of the game hall operation to the turn-off of the P main power supply until the main power supply startup time at the start of business the next morning, YES is determined in S1 and the control is performed in S2. Proceed to In S2, control is performed to store the value (current value) in the current value storage area (current value table) shown in FIG. 66 as a stored value in the area (3 to 8 in FIG. 66). Next, in S3, control is performed to count up the current value in the current value table every time it is opened or disconnected every time the detection signal rises until it returns to the stored value in the current value table. . FIG. 67 (b) shows how the current value table counts up during monitoring when the main power supply is OFF. The stored value is set to n, counts up from n, counts up to the upper limit thereof, n + 61, and stores 63 as a value in which the one-round flag is set if the detection signal further rises in this state. When the stored value reaches the value at which this round flag is set, the stored value is held at the value of “63” without performing any counting operation even if the detection signal subsequently rises.

  Next, the control advances to S4, where it is determined whether or not the main power supply is turned on and the backup power supply is turned off. When the main power supply of the P-unit 2 is started up at the game hall at the start of business the next morning, the determination of YES is made in S4, the control advances to S5, and the stored value of the RAM is triggered by the call from the payout control board 17 Control is performed to calculate a difference value based on the current value and output the difference value to the payout control board 17. As described with reference to FIG. 66, this output is repeatedly output in a loop by repeatedly repeating the same data while the CS signal is rising (during high level). As described above, the CLK signal is timed out, for example, at 100 μs, and control is performed to output data from the first bit in synchronization with the next rise of the CLK signal.

  Next, in S6, after the data output (CS, CLK predetermined operation), when the round flag is set, the flag is cleared and the stored value stored in the bit storage area of 3 to 8 in the RAM is set to 0. To clear. On the other hand, when the round flag is not set, control is continued without clearing the stored value, and the process proceeds to S7.

  In S6 described above, before the stored value is cleared to 0, the stored value may be overwritten and saved to the current value, and then the stored value may be cleared to 0. In addition, the timing of overwriting and storing the stored value over the current value or clearing the stored value to 0 may be triggered by power-on, but in addition, after the transmission of the detection count data to the payout control unit 171, the difference Any timing may be used as long as the value data can be normally output.

  Next, based on FIG. 68, the specific control content of the count display process by the payout control unit 171 will be described. First, at S10, data such as a difference value from the count counter 120 is received when the power of the P base 2 is turned on. Next, in S11, it is determined whether or not the received value is a value (= 63) where the round flag is set. If the received value is not the value where the round flag is set (= 63), the control proceeds to S12, and the received value is displayed on the 7-segment display 50. On the other hand, if the received value is a value where the round flag is set (= 63), the control proceeds to S13, and the control for displaying the error number on the 7-segment display 50 is performed. This error number is a number representing an abnormality in which the glass door 6 and the front frame 5 are opened during the period when the power supply of the P stand 2 is OFF such as at night and the count value of the current value table reaches the number of times of opening. It is. Next, in S14, control for transmitting the error number to CU3 is performed. The CU 3 receives the error number, notifies the abnormality with an abnormality notification lamp or the like, displays the error number on the display 312, and further displays the error number to a higher-level device (for example, a hall management computer or the hall server 801). Control to send.

  In addition, the CU 3 that has received the error number may perform control to stop the game by the P stand 2 or restrict some functions by the CU 3 itself or in response to a command from the host device.

<P fraud detection alarm>
Next, an alarm (notification) control based on detection of fraud on the P platform 2 will be described. When it is detected that the front frame 5 is opened at night on the P base 2 or the line between the P base 2 and the CU 3 is disconnected, the P base 2 is connected to an indicator or speaker provided on the P base 2 itself. For example, CU3 (more specifically, CU control unit 323, hereinafter simply referred to as CU3) may be set to perform notification. For example, when an injustice is detected at the P base 2, the P base 2 notifies the CU 3 of an alarm setting request, and the CU 3 holds the alarm setting based on the notification. While the alarm setting is held, the CU 3 performs an alarm notification using a provided display or speaker.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining P fraud detection alarms when the power is turned on / off. In FIG. 69, a night frame opening flag for detecting that the front frame 5 is opened at night in the P platform 2, a P platform disconnection flag for detecting the disconnection of the line between the P platform 2 and the CU3, CU3 The CU alarm setting indicating the alarm setting state at CU and the CU alarm notification time change indicating the notification state at CU 3 based on the alarm setting are illustrated. First, with reference to FIG. 69, control of P fraud detection alarms prior to the present embodiment (conventional) will be described. When the front frame 5 is opened on the P table 2 at night, the front frame open detection switch 13 detects the opening of the front frame 5 and detects fraud on the P table 2. The nighttime frame release flag shown in FIG. 69 becomes the H level at the timing when the P frame 2 detects that the front frame 5 is opened at nighttime. When the P table 2 detects fraud, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of an alarm setting request based on the fraud (opening the night frame). Based on the notification, the CU 3 performs the alarm setting (conventional) for opening the night frame shown in FIG. 69, and the alarm setting is retained. The CU 3 performs an alarm notification (conventional) for opening the night frame shown in FIG. 69 according to the alarm setting. Specifically, the CU 3 notifies the abnormality with the display 54 as an alarm notification (conventional) for opening the night frame, or transmits an abnormality signal to the upper server to notify.

  Next, when the power supply of the P base 2 is turned off and a line disconnection occurs in the communication between the P base 2 and the CU 3, the P base line disconnection flag shown in FIG. 69 becomes the H level. Then, the P unit 2 notifies the CU 3 of an alarm setting request based on the P unit line disconnection (off state). In other words, the P base 2 transmits a predetermined signal (for example, a clock signal) to the CU 3 at regular intervals when the communication with the CU 3 is normal. A predetermined signal cannot be transmitted from the base 2 to the CU 3. Accordingly, the P base 2 (particularly, the payout control unit 171) detects a disconnection (off state) with the CU3 (particularly the communication control IC 325a), and the communication control IC 325a of the CU3 receives a signal from the P base 2. It can be considered that the alarm setting based on the detection of the line disconnection (off state) is notified from the P unit 2 because it is not received.

  Based on the notification from the P unit 2, the CU 3 performs the alarm setting for the P unit line disconnection (conventional) shown in FIG. 69 and holds the alarm setting. CU3 performs alarm notification (conventional) of P line disconnection instead of the night frame opening shown in FIG. 69 by the alarm setting of P line disconnection (off state). Specifically, the CU 3 notifies the abnormality by the display unit 54 as an alarm notification (conventional) of the P-unit line disconnection, or notifies the host server by transmitting an abnormality signal.

  When the power supply of the P stand 2 is turned off, the nighttime frame release flag shown in FIG. 69 is reset and becomes L level. In the example shown in FIG. 69, since the front frame 5 is closed until the power supply of the P base 2 is turned off from the off state, the nighttime frame release flag is L even when the power is turned on. Remain in level. However, the P platform 2 cannot notify the CU 3 of the cancel setting for canceling the alarm setting for releasing the nighttime frame due to the nighttime frame release flag being at the L level while the power is off. Therefore, the alarm setting for opening the night frame shown in FIG. 69 (conventional) is held without being released even after the power supply of the P stand 2 is turned off.

  Thereafter, when the power source of the P unit 2 is turned on, the P unit line disconnection flag shown in FIG. 69 becomes the L level. The P unit 2 notifies the CU 3 of a cancel setting request for canceling the alarm setting of the P unit line disconnection (off state). That is, the P base 2 does not transmit a predetermined signal when communication with the CU 3 is not performed due to the off state, but when the power of the P base 2 is turned on, the P base 2 is switched from the P base 2 to the CU 3 at a constant interval. A predetermined signal starts to be transmitted. As a result, the P unit 2 (particularly the payout control unit 171) detects the line restoration with the communication control IC 325a of the CU3, and the CU3 (particularly the communication control IC 325a) receives the signal from the P unit 2 to receive the line. It can be considered that the release setting for canceling the alarm setting based on the detection of the disconnection (off state) is notified from the P-unit 2.

  CU3 cancels the alarm setting for P line disconnection (conventional) shown in FIG. 69 based on the notification from P station 2, and the alarm setting is cancelled. The CU 3 stops the alarm notification (conventional) of the P line disconnection (off state). On the other hand, in CU3, the alarm setting for the nighttime frame opening (conventional) is continuously maintained regardless of the alarm setting (conventional) for the P platform disconnection (off state). This alarm setting for the nighttime frame release (conventional) is maintained until communication between the P base 2 and the CU3 is started and a release signal for the alarm setting is notified from the P base 2 to the CU3 (nighttime frame release cancellation). . Therefore, CU3 has a problem that the alarm notification (conventional) for opening the night frame is continuously performed even when the alarm notification (conventional) of the line disconnection (off state) shown in FIG. 69 is stopped. That is, if the alarm notification (conventional) for line disconnection (off state) and the alarm notification for opening the night frame (conventional) use the same notification means, the store clerk turns on the power of the P stand 2. In spite of this, there was a possibility of misunderstanding that the notification continued.

  Next, control of P fraud detection alarms according to the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, when the P stand 2 detects fraud, the CU 3 is notified of a request for alarm setting based on fraud (opening the night frame). Based on the notification, the CU 3 performs the alarm setting (this implementation) for opening the night frame shown in FIG. 69, and the alarm setting is retained. CU3 performs alarm notification (this implementation) of the nighttime frame opening shown in FIG. 69 by the alarm setting. Specifically, the CU 3 notifies the abnormality by the display unit 54 as an alarm notification (this implementation) of opening the night frame, or transmits an abnormality signal to the upper server to perform notification.

  Further, when the power supply of the P unit 2 is turned off and the alarm setting request based on the disconnection of the P unit line (off state) is notified to the CU 3, the cancel setting for canceling the alarm setting for opening the night frame (this implementation) is also performed by the CU Is considered to have been notified. Therefore, based on the notification, CU3 performs the alarm setting for P line disconnection (off state) shown in FIG. 69 (this implementation) and cancels the alarm setting for opening the nighttime frame (this implementation). That is, the CU 3 stops the alarm notification of the nighttime frame opening (this implementation) shown in FIG. 69 and then performs the alarm notification (this implementation) of the line disconnection (off state). Therefore, the CU 3 is in a state where all alarm notifications are stopped when the power supply of the P stand 2 is turned on, the alarm setting (actual implementation) of the line disconnection (off state) shown in FIG. 69 is canceled and the alarm notification stops. It becomes. That is, this embodiment can improve the problem that the alarm notification (conventional) for opening the nighttime frame continues even after the power supply of the P stand 2 is turned on. Even if the alarm notification for line disconnection (off state) and the alarm notification for opening the night frame are the same notification means, the store clerk can be misidentified because the notification is stopped by turning on the power of the P stand 2. Sexuality can be reduced.

  Next, FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining P fraud detection alarms at the time of disconnection. In FIG. 70, a night frame opening flag for detecting that the front frame 5 is opened at night in the P platform 2, a P platform disconnection flag for detecting that the P platform 2 and the CU 3 are disconnected, CU3 The CU alarm setting indicating the alarm setting state at CU and the CU alarm notification time change indicating the notification state at CU 3 based on the alarm setting are illustrated. First, with reference to FIG. 70, the control of P fraud detection alarms prior to the present embodiment (conventional) will be described. When the front frame 5 is opened on the P table 2 at night, the front frame open detection switch 13 detects the opening of the front frame 5 and detects fraud on the P table 2. The nighttime frame release flag shown in FIG. 70 becomes the H level at the timing when the P frame 2 detects that the front frame 5 is opened at nighttime. When the P table 2 detects fraud, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of an alarm setting request based on the fraud (opening the night frame). Based on the notification, the CU 3 performs the alarm setting (conventional) for opening the night frame shown in FIG. 70, and the alarm setting is retained. The CU 3 performs alarm notification (conventional) for opening the night frame shown in FIG. 70 according to the alarm setting. Specifically, the CU 3 notifies the abnormality with the display 54 as an alarm notification (conventional) for opening the night frame, or transmits an abnormality signal to the upper server to notify.

  Next, when a disconnection occurs in the communication wiring between the P base 2 and the CU 3 and a line disconnection occurs in the communication between the P base 2 and the CU 3, the P base line disconnection flag shown in FIG. Then, the CU 3 receives the alarm setting request from the P unit 2 based on the P unit line disconnection (disconnection). In other words, when the communication with the CU 3 is normal, the P base 2 transmits a predetermined signal (for example, a clock signal) to the CU 3 via the communication wiring at regular intervals. By disconnection, a predetermined signal cannot be transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3. As a result, the P base 2 (particularly the payout control unit 171) detects a disconnection (disconnection) with the CU3 (particularly the communication control IC 325a), and the communication control IC 325a of the CU3 can receive a signal from the P base 2. It can be considered that the alarm setting based on the detection of the line disconnection (disconnection) is notified from the P-unit 2 due to the disappearance. Further, the CU 3 cancels the setting by regarding the notification of the alarm setting based on the detection of the disconnection (disconnection) as the notification of the cancel setting for canceling the alarm setting based on the set fraud (opening the night frame).

  Based on the notification from the P unit 2, the CU 3 performs the alarm setting for the P unit line disconnection (conventional) shown in FIG. 70 and holds the alarm setting. The CU 3 performs an alarm notification (conventional) of the P unit line disconnection instead of the night frame opening shown in FIG. 70 by the alarm setting of the P unit line disconnection (disconnection). Specifically, the CU 3 notifies the abnormality by the display unit 54 as an alarm notification (conventional) of the P-unit line disconnection, or notifies the host server by transmitting an abnormality signal.

  Even if the line disconnection occurs in the communication between the P stand 2 and the CU 3, the open state of the front frame 5 is continued, so the night frame open flag shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 70, since the open state of the front frame 5 continues even after the disconnection of the communication wiring is recovered (disconnection recovery) and the communication between the P stand 2 and the CU 3 is started, Thereafter, the nighttime frame release flag remains at the L level.

  Thereafter, when communication between the P unit 2 and the CU 3 is performed by recovering the disconnection of the communication wiring, the P unit line disconnection flag shown in FIG. 70 becomes L level. The CU 3 receives from the P unit 2 a release setting for canceling the alarm setting for the P unit line disconnection (disconnection). That is, the P base 2 does not transmit a predetermined signal when communication with the CU 3 is not performed due to disconnection, but when the disconnection is restored, the P base 2 starts to transmit a predetermined signal from the P base 2 to the CU 3 at regular intervals. . As a result, the P unit 2 (particularly the payout control unit 171) detects the line restoration with the communication control IC 325a of the CU3, and the CU3 (particularly the communication control IC 325a) receives the signal from the P unit 2 to receive the line. It can be considered that the release setting for canceling the alarm setting based on the detection of disconnection (disconnection) is notified from the P-unit 2.

  Based on the notification from the P unit 2, the CU 3 cancels the P unit line disconnection alarm setting (conventional) shown in FIG. 70 and cancels the alarm setting. The CU 3 stops alarm notification (conventional) of the P platform line disconnection (disconnection). On the other hand, in CU3, the alarm setting for the nighttime frame opening (conventional) is continuously maintained regardless of the alarm setting (conventional) for the P line disconnection (disconnection). This alarm setting for opening the nighttime frame (conventional) continues to be maintained even after the disconnection with the CU3 is restored. Therefore, CU3 has a problem that the alarm notification (conventional) for opening the night frame is continuously performed even if the alarm notification (conventional) of the line disconnection (disconnection) shown in FIG. 70 is stopped. In other words, if the alarm notification (conventional) of line disconnection (disconnection) and the alarm notification (conventional) of opening the night frame use the same notification means, the store clerk recovers from the disconnection between P stand 2 and CU3. In spite of this, there was a possibility of misunderstanding that the notification continued.

  Next, control of P fraud detection alarms according to the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, when the P stand 2 detects fraud, the CU 3 is notified of a request for alarm setting based on fraud (opening the night frame). Based on the notification, CU3 performs the nighttime frame open alarm setting (this embodiment) shown in FIG. 70, and the alarm setting is held. CU3 performs alarm notification (this implementation) of the nighttime frame opening shown in FIG. 70 by the alarm setting. Specifically, the CU 3 notifies the abnormality by the display unit 54 as an alarm notification (this implementation) of opening the night frame, or transmits an abnormality signal to the upper server to perform notification.

  Further, when the communication between the P unit 2 and the CU 3 is disconnected, and the alarm setting request based on the P unit disconnection (disconnection) is notified to the CU 3, the alarm setting for releasing the night frame (this implementation) is canceled. The cancel setting is also notified to CU3. Therefore, the CU 3 performs the alarm setting (this implementation) for the P-line disconnection (disconnection) shown in FIG. 70 based on the notification, and cancels the alarm setting for opening the night frame (this implementation). That is, CU3 stops alarm notification (this implementation) of opening the night frame shown in FIG. 70, and then performs alarm notification (this implementation) of line disconnection (disconnection). Therefore, when the disconnection of the communication wiring is restored and the communication between the P-unit 2 and the CU3 is started, the CU3 cancels the alarm setting (this implementation) of the line disconnection (disconnection) shown in FIG. 70 and stops the alarm notification. All alarm notifications are stopped. In other words, the present embodiment can improve the problem that the alarm notification for opening the nighttime frame (conventional) continues even after the disconnection is restored. Even if the alarm notification for line disconnection (disconnection) and the alarm notification for opening the night frame are the same notification means, the store clerk may be misidentified because the notification is stopped by turning on the power of the P stand 2. Can be reduced.

  In addition, when the open state of the front frame 5 in the P stand 2 continues even after the disconnection with the CU 3 is restored (night frame open maintenance), the communication between the P stand 2 and the CU 3 is started and the night frame is released. Based on the alarm setting, the P unit 2 notifies the CU 3 again. CU3 performs alarm notification (this implementation) of the nighttime frame opening shown in FIG. 70 by the alarm setting of the P platform line disconnection (disconnection) notified again. Specifically, the CU 3 notifies the abnormality by the display unit 54 as an alarm notification (this implementation) of opening the night frame, or transmits an abnormality signal to the upper server to perform notification. That is, even if the alarm notification of line disconnection (disconnection) and the alarm notification of opening the night frame are the same notification means, the store clerk stops the notification when the disconnection between the P stand 2 and the CU 3 is restored, and then the P Since the notification by the alarm setting based on the disconnection (disconnection) is performed after the communication between the base 2 and the CU 3 is started, the possibility of misidentifying both notifications can be reduced.

  Furthermore, if the time until the communication between the P base 2 and the CU 3 is started after the disconnection between the P base 2 and the CU 3 is short, the clerk may misidentify both notifications even with the above-described configuration. There is. Therefore, the P platform 2 again performs the alarm setting for opening the nighttime frame and notifies the CU 3 after a predetermined period has elapsed after canceling the alarm setting for line disconnection (disconnection). Thereby, even if the time until the communication between the P base 2 and the CU 3 is started after the disconnection between the P base 2 and the CU 3 is restored, it is possible to reliably prevent the store clerk from misidentifying both notifications. it can.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where it is detected that the front frame 5 is opened at night as the fraud detection for the P stand 2 is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If so, it may be prize ball goto detection, illegal addition detection, illegal winning detection, radio wave sensor detection, and the like. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case where fraud is detected by the P stand 2 and the alarm setting request is notified to the CU 3 has been described. However, the fraud is detected by the P stand 2 and the detection result is notified to the CU 3. A configuration in which alarm setting is performed by the CU3 may be used. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the P unit line disconnection is detected by the P unit 2 and the alarm setting request is notified to the CU 3 has been described. However, the CU 3 detects the P unit line disconnection and performs the alarm setting. Also good.

<Aggregating process performed by the card unit>
Next, the CU 3 according to the present embodiment uses the response of the state information response received from the P platform 2 to perform a counting process of counting the number and ratio of the pachinko balls that have passed through each region according to the firing intensity. explain.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the counting process performed by CU3 (more specifically, CU control unit 323).

  In step (hereinafter, step is abbreviated as “S”) 10, the CU 3 determines whether or not a response of the status information response is received from the P base 2. If a response to the status information response is received (YES in S10), the process proceeds to S11. If not (NO in S10), the process proceeds to S15.

  In S11, CU3 performs a correction process for the firing intensity. This process is a process for correcting the firing strength T to 0 (minimum value) when the handle operation amount is substantially zero (value when the handle is not operated). By performing this correction processing, even when there is a variation between the handle operation amount and the firing strength T due to play or play of the hitting ball operating handle 25, the firing strength T can be accurately detected. .

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a detailed procedure of the firing intensity correction process.
In S111, the CU 3 determines whether or not the power supply of the P stand 2 has just been turned on. For example, the CU 3 determines that it is immediately after power-on of the P unit 2 when the connection sequence processing at the time of power-on is being performed.

  If it is immediately after power-on of the P stand 2 (YES in S111), the CU 3 stores the current launch intensity T in the internal memory as an initial launch intensity T0 in S112. The initial firing strength T0 is the firing strength T when the handle operation amount is zero. That is, the CU 3 assumes that the handle operation amount is 0 immediately after the power of the P stand 2 is turned on, and stores the value in the internal memory. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S114.

  On the other hand, if not immediately after power-on of the P platform 2 (NO in S111), the CU 3 reads the initial firing strength T0 stored in the internal memory in S113. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S114.

  In S114, CU3 calculates the value obtained by subtracting the initial launch intensity T0 from the current launch intensity T as the corrected launch intensity T. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S12 in FIG. 71 in order to perform the aggregation process. Since the following tabulation process is performed using the emission intensity T after the correction process, the tabulation process accuracy is improved.

  Returning to FIG. 71, in S12, the CU 3 determines whether or not it is during a period in which the aggregation process should be interrupted (hereinafter referred to as an aggregation interruption period).

  FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the change in the firing strength T and the total interruption period. In the example shown in FIG. 73, the firing intensity T that was stable at a relatively small value starts increasing at time t1, reaches the maximum value “99” at time t3, and is maintained at the maximum value “99” after time t3. ing.

  When the firing strength T changes, the passing area of the pachinko balls also changes, but there is a time lag until the passing area of the pachinko balls fired with the changed firing strength T is detected. Therefore, when the launch intensity T changes, even if the change in the launch intensity T thereafter stabilizes (converges to a certain value), the launch intensity T and the pachinko ball are not changed for a while (time corresponding to the above time lag). There is a possibility that the correspondence relationship with the passing area becomes unstable, and the reliability of the totalization processing result is lowered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the period from when the firing intensity T changes by a predetermined amount to when the predetermined period elapses is set as a total interruption period. The “predetermined amount” and the “predetermined period” may be fixed values or variable values that can be arbitrarily set and changed from the outside.

  In FIG. 73, the total interruption period is illustrated. In FIG. 73, a period α is illustrated as an aggregation interruption period. This period α is a time t4 when the above-mentioned “predetermined period” has elapsed from the time t1 when the firing intensity T has increased by an amount (above “predetermined amount”) from the value lower than the threshold T1 It is a period until. Note that the “predetermined period” is predicted from the start of the period α that the pachinko balls that have been fired after the start of the period α have stabilized the firing strength T and before the firing strength T has stabilized have passed through the game area 27. It is desirable that the period is longer than the period up to the time point.

  In FIG. 73, periods β and γ are also illustrated as examples of other aggregation interruption periods. The period β is a period from the time when the firing intensity T starts to change (time t1) to the next time when the firing intensity T starts to stabilize (time t3). The period γ is a period from time t3 when the firing intensity T starts to change to time t5 when the predetermined period has elapsed after time t3 when the emission intensity T started to stabilize. The “predetermined period” used for setting the period γ can also be set based on the same concept as the “predetermined period” used for setting the period α. A period in which at least one of the periods β and γ is appropriately combined with the period α may be set as the aggregation interruption period.

  Returning to FIG. 71, if it is during the total interruption period (YES in S12), CU3 interrupts the totalization process in S14. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S15.

  On the other hand, when not in the total interruption period (NO in S12), CU3 executes a process of totaling the number and ratio of the pachinko balls that have passed through each region by the firing intensity in S13. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S15.

74 to 77 are diagrams exemplifying the contents of the total data obtained as a result of the total processing.
In the aggregated data shown in FIG. 74, the number of passages of each area (specifically, the start winning ports 275, 276, 277, the normal winning ports 272, 273, 274, the big winning ports 271 and the probable winning ports 271a) It is tabulated for each intensity T (in the example shown in FIG. 74, for each area obtained by dividing the variable area 0 to 99 of the firing intensity T into 10 parts, the same applies to FIGS. 75 to 77).

  75 and 76, the passing ratios of the respective areas (specifically, the start winning ports 275, 276, 277, the normal winning ports 272, 273, 274, the big winning port 271) are represented by the firing strength T. It is tabulated separately. In FIG. 75, the passage ratio of each region when the total number of passages of each region is 100% is shown for each firing strength T. On the other hand, in FIG. 76, the passage ratio of each region is shown for each firing strength T when the total number of passages for each firing strength T in each region is 100%.

  In the total data shown in FIG. 77, the number of passages of each area (specifically, the start winning ports 275, 276, 277, the normal winning ports 272, 273, 274, the big winning ports 271 and the probability changing winning ports 271a) is 100, respectively. The percentage of passage of each region when it is set as a percentage is tabulated for each firing intensity T. In FIG. 77, the ratio shown in parentheses in the column indicating the passage ratio of the probability variation prize opening 271a is the passage ratio of the probability variation prize opening 271a when the number of passages of the big prize opening 271 is 100% (that is, The ratio of the number of passes of the probability variation prize opening 271a with respect to the number of passes of the big prize opening 271) is shown for each firing strength T.

  By referring to the aggregated data as shown in FIGS. 74 to 77, the correspondence relationship between the firing intensity T and the pachinko ball passing region (which region the pachinko ball easily passes depending on the firing strength T) is appropriately set. Can grasp. Therefore, on the store side where the P stand 2 is installed, it is possible to adjust the nail of the P stand 2 with reference to these tabulated results.

  Note that the aggregate data shown in FIGS. 74 to 77 is merely an example, and is not limited to this. Moreover, it is not always necessary to totalize the total data shown in FIGS. 74 to 77, and it may be appropriately selected as necessary.

  Returning to FIG. 71, in S15, the CU 3 determines the presence / absence of a display request for the total result. It should be noted that the display request for the total result is input to the CU 3, the P stand 2, the hall server 801, etc., for example, by a game shop clerk. If there is a request for displaying the total result (YES in S15), the process proceeds to S16, and if not (NO in S15), the process ends.

  In S16, CU3 displays the total result (total data as shown in FIGS. 74 to 77). The display location may be, for example, the display 54 or another display (not shown).

  As described above, the CU 3 according to the present embodiment uses the response of the state information response received from the P platform 2 to perform the counting process of counting the number and ratio of the pachinko balls that have passed through each region by the firing strength T. Do. Thereby, according to the launch strength T, it is possible to grasp which region the pachinko ball is likely to pass (or whether it is difficult to pass). Therefore, the counting result can be used for nail adjustment of the P base 2.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine having the upper shooting structure, such as the P stand 2 according to the present embodiment, compared to the pachinko machine having the lower shooting structure, the pachinko ball is fired until the game area 27 is entered. Since the distance is short, the pachinko ball passage region tends to change more greatly with respect to the change in the firing strength T. In the P base 2 having such an upper shooting structure, the correspondence between the firing strength T and the passing area is totaled, which is very effective for adjusting the nail.

<Fire abnormal determination process performed by the card unit>
The CU 3 according to the present embodiment uses a signal such as the firing intensity T included in the response of the state information response received from the P platform 2 to determine whether or not there is a pachinko ball firing abnormality (coloring abnormality). Judgment processing is performed. Here, the abnormal shooting is an abnormality in which the firing motor 18 is operating even though the pachinko ball is not supplied to the launching device. The irregular hitting may occur when the player leaves the seat while the hitting operation handle 25 is fixed by a fixing device or the like with the handle operation amount being substantially larger than zero.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a firing abnormality determination process performed by CU3 (more specifically, CU control unit 323).

  In S20, CU3 determines whether or not launch intensity T is greater than 0 (minimum value). If firing intensity T is greater than 0 (YES in S20), the process proceeds to S21, and if not (NO in S20), the process ends.

  In S21, CU3 determines whether or not the number of shot balls and the number of balls that have passed through the outlet have changed. In addition, in order to avoid that CU3 is always determined to be abnormal immediately after the start of the game, the number of shots and the number of shots that have been shot out after a certain period of time has elapsed since the firing strength T is determined to be greater than 0 (minimum value). It is determined whether or not the number of balls passing through the mouth has changed.

  If the number of shot balls and the number of balls passing out of the outlet have changed (YES in S21), CU3 determines in S22 that the firing is normal (i.e., there is no abnormal shooting).

  On the other hand, if at least one of the number of shot balls and the number of balls passing out of the outlet has not changed (NO in S22), CU3 determines in S23 that there is a firing abnormality (that is, an abnormal shooting has occurred). To do.

  Thus, CU3 which concerns on this Embodiment determines with the firing abnormality of a pachinko ball, when the firing strength T is larger than 0 (minimum value) and the number of fired balls and the number of balls passing through the outlet are not changed. . For this reason, it is possible to appropriately detect a firing abnormality (coloring abnormality).

<Putting area identification process performed by the card unit>
The CU 3 according to the present embodiment uses a signal such as the firing strength T included in the response of the state information response received from the P platform 2 to identify which area of the game area 27 the pachinko ball has been driven into. Include area identification processing.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a driving area specifying process performed by CU3 (more specifically, CU control unit 323).

  In S30, CU3 determines whether or not there is a driving area specifying request. The driving area specifying request is input to the CU 3, the P stand 2, the hall server 801, and the like by a game shop clerk, for example. If there is a driving area specification request (YES in S30), the process proceeds to S31, and if not (NO in S30), the process ends.

  In S31, CU3 performs a process (hereinafter referred to as a “threshold range setting process”) for setting a “fired intensity threshold range” used for specifying the driving area.

  FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating the correspondence between the driving area and the firing intensity threshold range. In FIG. 80, the driving area is divided into a “right hitting area”, a “left hitting area”, and a “bumping area”. In the present embodiment, the “right hit area” is the area on the right side of the game area 27, and the “left hit area” is the area on the left side of the game area 27. Further, the “bumping area” is an area where the pachinko balls are likely to flow toward the start winning opening 276 when the pachinko balls are driven into this area. The “injection area” is generally arranged at the upper left periphery of the variable display device 278, but the position can be adjusted by a nail configuration.

  As shown in FIG. 80, a firing intensity threshold range is set for each driving area. Specifically, the firing strength threshold range AR for specifying the right hitting area AR (lower limit value ARlow to upper limit value ARhi), the firing strength threshold range AL for specifying the left hitting area specified (lower limit value ALlow to upper limit value ALhi), This is a firing intensity threshold range AB (lower limit value ABlow to upper limit value ABhi) for specifying the concavity region. These firing intensity threshold ranges AR, AL, AB are stored in the internal memory (ROM or RAM) of CU3.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a detailed procedure of threshold range setting processing.
In S311, CU3 determines whether or not there is a request for changing the firing intensity threshold range. This change request is input to the CU 3, the P stand 2, the hall server 801, etc., for example, by a game shop clerk.

  If there is a change request (YES in S311), CU3 changes the firing intensity threshold range in S312. Note that the specific change (how much the threshold range is changed) is made, for example, in accordance with a value input by manual operation or download by the store clerk who made the change request. The changed firing intensity threshold range is stored (updated) in the internal memory of CU3. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S32 in FIG.

  On the other hand, when there is no change request (NO in S311), CU3 reads the firing intensity threshold range stored in the internal memory in S313. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S32 in FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 79, in S <b> 32, CU <b> 3 receives the firing intensity T from P platform 2. Thereafter, in S33, the CU 3 identifies in which area of the game area 27 the pachinko ball has been driven, as a result of comparing the received launch intensity T with the launch intensity threshold range. Specifically, when the firing strength T is included in the threshold range AR (more than the lower limit value ARlow and less than the upper limit value ARhi), the driving area is specified as the “right hitting area”. When the firing strength T is included in the threshold range AL (more than the lower limit value ALlow and less than the upper limit value ALhi), the driving area is specified as the “left hit area”. When the firing strength T is included in the threshold range AB (when it is equal to or higher than the lower limit value ABlow and lower than the upper limit value ABhi), the driving area is specified as a “bumping area”.

  Thus, CU3 which concerns on this Embodiment specifies the implantation area | region of the pachinko ball according to whether the firing strength T is included in the firing strength threshold range. Thereby, according to the launch strength T, it is possible to specify which region the player is aiming for.

  In the present embodiment, the hitting area of the pachinko ball is specified according to whether or not the launch intensity T is included in the launch intensity threshold range, but whether or not the launch intensity T is equal to or greater than a threshold value. The pachinko ball driving area may be specified according to the above.

  In addition, since the bump area is an area that overlaps a part of the right hit area or the left hit area, the launch intensity threshold range of the hit area is also the same as the launch intensity threshold range of the right hit area or the left hit area. , Some overlap. For this reason, in specifying the driving area, in addition to the right hitting area or the left hitting area, the hitting area may be specified.

<Measurement process performed by the card unit>
The CU 3 according to the present embodiment uses the signal such as the firing strength T included in the response of the state information response received from the P platform 2 to change the design of the variable display device 278 after the player starts the game. A measurement process is performed to measure the time until the start.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a procedure of measurement processing performed by CU3 (more specifically, CU control unit 323).

  In S40, CU3 determines whether or not a changing signal has been received from P table 2. If the changing signal is received (YES in S40), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the changing signal has not been received (NO in S40), CU3 determines in S41 whether or not the firing strength T has started to increase from 0 (that is, whether or not the player has started playing). Determine. If firing intensity T has not started increasing from 0 (NO in S41), the process is terminated.

  When firing intensity T starts to increase from 0 (YES in S41), CU3 starts time measurement in S42.

  After starting the time measurement, the CU 3 determines in S43 whether or not a changing signal has been received from the P base 2 (that is, whether or not the symbol of the variable display device 278 has started to change). When the changing signal is not received (NO in S43), CU3 moves the process to S44 and continues time measurement. Thereafter, the process returns to S43, and the time measurement is continued until the changing signal is received.

  When the changing signal is received (YES in S43), CU3 ends the time measurement in S45. As a result, the CU 3 can measure the time from when the player starts the game until the symbol of the variable display device 278 starts to change.

  As described above, the CU 3 according to the present embodiment starts from the time when the firing strength T starts to increase from substantially zero in a state where the changing signal is not received (that is, when the player starts the game). The time until the time when the changing signal is received (that is, the time when the symbol of the variable display device 278 starts to change when the pachinko ball wins one of the start winning ports 275, 276, 277) is measured. As a result, it is possible to grasp how long a pachinko ball has won a winning winning opening 275, 276, 277 and the design of the variable display device 278 starts to fluctuate after the player has started playing. it can.

<System including hall management computer and central management device>
Next, a system including a hall management computer and a central management device will be described.

  FIG. 83 is a block diagram for explaining a system including a hall management computer (hereinafter referred to as hall controller) 900 and a central management apparatus 1000.

  In one amusement hall, a plurality of P stands 2 and CU 3 are installed, and a hall server 801 and a hall controller 900 connected to the plurality of P stands 2 and CU 3 are installed one by one.

  The hall control 900 is directly connected to the hall server 801. The hall control 900 includes an arithmetic device and an internal memory (not shown), and is configured to execute predetermined arithmetic processing based on data stored in the internal memory. The hall server 801 is connected to a plurality of CUs 3, and collects output signals from the plurality of CUs 3 and transmits them to the hall control 900.

  The central management device 1000 is installed at a place different from each game hall. The central management device 1000 is communicably connected to a plurality of hall computers 900 installed in a plurality of game halls, respectively. The central management apparatus 1000 acquires and manages a plurality of aggregated data (see FIGS. 74 to 77) aggregated by the CU 3 of each game arcade by the above-described aggregation process from a plurality of amusement halls for each type of P 2. .

<Summary calculation processing performed by Hallcon>
The hall control 900 collects the results of aggregation processing (see FIGS. 74 to 77 described above) performed by each CU 3 in its own store (the game arcade where it is installed) by type and gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as the following). Summarization processing).

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a procedure of summary tabulation processing performed by the hall control 900.

  At S50, hall control 900 aggregates the results of the aggregation processing performed by each CU 3 in the store in association with the model and machine number of the gaming machine. Note that the aggregation timing may be aggregated every time each CU 3 performs aggregation processing, or may be aggregated collectively at the end of business on the day.

  In step S51, the hall control 900 executes a summary tabulation process using the aggregated data.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram illustrating the contents of summary summary data obtained as a result of summary summary processing. As shown in FIG. 85, the hall control 900 uses the results of the aggregation processing by each CU 3 (see the aggregated data illustrated in FIGS. 74 to 77 above) as the gaming machine model (model X, model Y, model Z,... ) Data is collected separately and by machine number (001, 002...). Further, as shown in FIG. 85, the hall control 900 also counts the total and average for each model.

  Returning to FIG. 84, in S52, hall control 900 determines whether or not there is a request for displaying the summary count result. The summary count display request is input by, for example, a store clerk at the store. If there is a request to display the summary count result (YES in S52), the process proceeds to S53, and if not (NO in S52), the process ends.

  In S52, hall control 900 displays the summary count result. The display location may be a display (not shown), for example.

  As described above, the hall control 900 according to the present embodiment aggregates the result of the aggregation processing of each gaming machine in its own store by machine type and gaming machine (unit number). By referring to the aggregation result, it is possible to grasp the state of the nail adjustment of each gaming machine in the store at once. Therefore, this aggregation result can be effectively used to determine the overall balance of nail adjustment of each gaming machine in the store.

<Threshold range storage processing performed by Hallcon>
The hall control 900 acquires the firing intensity threshold range (see FIG. 80) used when each CU 3 in the store performs the threshold range setting process (see the flow of FIG. 81) from each CU 3 Further, a process of storing for each gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a threshold range storing process) is performed.

  FIG. 86 is a diagram illustrating data stored in the internal memory of the hall control 900 by the threshold range storage process. As shown in FIG. 86, the hall control 900 determines the firing strength threshold range for each driving area by game machine model (model X, model Y, model Z...) And machine number (001, 002...). Remember.

  This makes it possible to collectively manage the nail adjustment state (launch strength threshold range) of each gaming machine in the game hall.

<Other store model display processing performed by Hallcon>
The hall control 900 obtains and displays the aggregated data of the types of other stores (amusement halls different from the amusement hall in which it is installed) from the central management device 1000 (hereinafter referred to as “other store machine type display processing”). Do).

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a procedure of another store machine type display process performed by hall control 900.

  At S60, hall control 900 determines whether or not there is a request to display other store type data. This other store machine type data display request is input to the CU3, the P platform 2, the hall server 801, etc., for example, by a store clerk at a game hall. If there is no other store machine type data display request (NO in S60), the process ends.

  When there is a request to display other store type data (YES in S60), hall control 900 acquires other store type data from central management device 1000 in S61.

  FIG. 88 is a diagram schematically illustrating another store type data. As shown in FIG. 88, in the other store type data, the aggregate data of other stores (A hall, B hall, C hall...) Is stratified by each model (model X, model Y, model Z...). ing. It should be noted that total data as exemplified in the above-described FIGS. 74 to 77 is input in each column of the other store machine type data.

  Returning to FIG. 87, in step S62, the hall control 900 uses the other store machine type data acquired from the central management apparatus 1000 to display the total data of the other game machine type. The display location may be, for example, a display (not shown) connected to the hall control 900, or may be the display 54 of any P unit 2.

  As described above, the hall control 900 according to the present embodiment performs a model-specific display process of acquiring and displaying the aggregated data of the models of other stores from the central management apparatus 1000. Thereby, it is possible to adjust the nail of the own game hall with reference to the state of the nail adjustment according to the model of the other store.

  Note that the data acquired by the hall control 900 from the central management apparatus 1000 is not limited to that shown in FIG.

  For example, in the case where the central management device 1000 aggregates summary summary data (see FIG. 85) of each game hall and calculates the average data for each location of the game hall, the hall control 900 stores the average data for each region. It may be acquired from the central management device 1000 and used for adjusting the nail of the own store. Thereby, for example, it is possible to adjust the nail of the own game hall with reference to what kind of nail adjustment is performed by another store in the same area as the own store.

  In addition, when the central management apparatus 1000 has data that summarizes the result of threshold range storage processing (see FIG. 86) stored in the hall control 900 of another store, the data of the other store is automatically stored. The store hall control 900 may be acquired (downloaded) from the central management apparatus 1000 and stored. Thereby, it is possible to set the firing intensity threshold range of the own store with reference to the setting status of the firing intensity threshold range of the other store. Further, the hall control 900 may automatically set the firing intensity threshold range of its own store based on the data of another store acquired from the central management device 1000.

<Slot machine>
Next, a slot machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. FIG. 89 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front door of the slot machine is opened. In the description so far, the slot machine is also abbreviated as “S” in the following, because the pachinko machine is abbreviated as “P”.

  The above gaming system using game balls and holding balls is also applied to the S units. However, in the S platform, the game is played without using balls, and hence the game balls will be referred to as game points and the holding balls as points.

  Referring to FIG. 89, a slot machine (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as a gaming machine or S unit) 2S is provided such that front door 2bS can be opened and closed with respect to main body frame 2aS with its left edge as a swing center. It has been. Although not shown in FIG. 89, a CU is connected to the left side of the S base 2S in the same manner as the P base.

  In S 2S, the number of bets is set by using the game points, and the game points are added and updated in accordance with the winning. For this reason, when a game is played on the S platform 2S, a medal insertion operation is not necessary. Therefore, the S stand 2S is not provided with a medal insertion slot and a medal payout opening.

  Inside the casing of the S unit 2S, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are juxtaposed in a horizontal direction. Of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are arranged so that they can be seen from the see-through window provided on the front door 2bS. A plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a predetermined order on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

  A touch panel display 510 is provided in a portion surrounding each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 2bS. The display 510 is a display corresponding to the P displays 54, and displays various types of information (game points, points, etc.) of the same type as the display 54, as well as the number of bets set in the game. Is displayed. The display unit 510 is connected to the CU display control unit 350 in the same manner as the display unit 54 in FIG. 4 and is controlled on the CU side. The indicator 510 is not provided in a portion surrounding each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, but is provided at a lower panel portion (at a position lower than the start switch 7S shown in FIG. You may provide in the panel part provided with the conventional S medal payout opening.

  Further, the front door 2bS has a single BET switch 5S that is operated when setting the number of bets using “game points = 1” corresponding to one medal, and the maximum determined according to the game state. When setting the number of bets (for example, “game point = 3” in the normal game state before BB occurrence and RT (Replay Time) where the winning probability of replay is high, “game point = 2” in the bonus) The MAXBET switch 6S is operated, the start switch 7S is operated when the game is started, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are respectively operated when the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped. Yes.

  In the case of playing a game on the S machine 2S, first, similarly to the P machine, after securing a game point using the adjacent CU, the number of bets is set using the game point. The game points can be obtained by withdrawing the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CU, points, or a stored medal (corresponding to P stored balls) deposited in the game hall. In order to use the game points, the single BET switch 5S or the MAXBET switch 6S may be operated. In the present embodiment, for example, by setting the number of bets to 1, the game points are deducted by 1, and the display of the game points on the display 510 is also subtracted and updated. When the bet number is set, the pay line determined according to the bet number and the gaming state is valid, and the operation of the start switch 7S is valid, that is, the game can be started.

  When the start switch 7S is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously change. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) on the activated pay line is displayed on each reel 2L, 2C, When the 2R display result is stopped, a prize is generated, a game point determined according to the prize is given to the player, and the display of the game point on the display 510 is also added and updated.

  In the case of S units, it is possible to count game points as in the case of P units. As shown in FIG. 1, the S stand 2S is provided with a counting button 28S for counting game points and converting them into points. The ball lending button, the card return button, and the replay button are provided on the CU side (see FIG. 4). The player executes the counting operation based on an arbitrary timing or a display for prompting the counting operation on the display unit 510 in the same manner as the P units. Then, the game points are counted and the display 510 displays a state in which the points are increased while the game points are decreased. The ball lending button may be provided not on the CU side but on the P platform side and the S platform side. In that case, the operation signal of the ball lending button may be directly input to the CU 3 or may be transmitted to the CU 3 as a status information response via the P unit 2 or the S unit (slot machine) 2S. It may be.

  The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with a shift to the big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB), and small roles with payout of medals. And a re-gamer (replay) that allows the next game to be started without the need to set the bet amount.

  Which of a plurality of types of winning combinations is to be won or whether any winning combination is to be excluded is determined by, for example, a main control unit (S) that controls the S base 2S when a start operation is detected. It corresponds to the main control unit 161 of the stand). This determination is made, for example, by drawing a random number generated from a predetermined random number generator or generated on software.

  After that, the main control unit waits for the reel stop operation by the player, draws in the symbol corresponding to the winning combination in the predetermined frame number range based on the stop operation time, otherwise draws another symbol Is controlled to stop the three symbols and determine whether or not there is a prize. If the main control base determines that a winning is made, the main control base gives the player game points according to the type of winning (adds game points).

  The payout control unit of the S platform 2S is mounted on a payout control board (not shown). The payout control board is delivered from the frame maker to the hall in a state of being attached to the main body frame 2aS by the frame maker.

  On the other hand, the main control board (not shown) of the S platform 2S is delivered to the hall from the slot machine manufacturer separately from the main body frame 2aS in a state of being attached to the board mounting board for connecting the wiring. The board mounting board is a board corresponding to the game board 26 shown in FIG. 3, and includes a connector similar to the convex drawer connector 32 provided on the game board 26.

  To connect a mounting mechanism for mounting the board mounting board and a convex drawer connector on the board mounting board side to a predetermined position (for example, below the reels 2L, 2C, 2R) in the main body frame 2aS of the S base 2S. The connector is provided. The attachment mechanism and the connector have the same structure as the attachment mechanisms 34a and 34b and the concave drawer connector 33 shown in FIG. 3, and are devised so that the board attachment board can be easily fixed to the attachment mechanism. The wiring extending from the concave drawer connector is connected to the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, various operation switches (buttons), and the like.

  Similarly to FIG. 63, the S base 2S has a configuration for detecting the opening of the front door 2bS corresponding to the front frame 5 of the P base 2 and detecting the connection between the main body frame 2aS and the board mounting board. The main control board is also connected in series to the loop-shaped power line 500.

  With the S units, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and variable display capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified A slot machine in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the device and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device, and the display result is displayed on the variable display device. Before deriving, predetermining means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings to occur, and control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result according to the determination result of the predetermining means A slot machine is configured that includes a derivation control means for performing and a granting means for imparting a game value when the winning occurs.

  FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various data stored in each of the card unit and the slot machine and its transmission / reception mode. The transmission / reception mode shown in FIG. 90 is obtained by replacing the term of FIG. 6 described as the configuration of P units with that for S units, and the mode is the same as that described with reference to FIG. Here, further explanation is omitted.

<Modifications and feature points>
Next, modifications and feature points of the present embodiment described above are listed.

  (1) In this embodiment, the addition sequence number and the counting sequence number are defined in the message format as different data, but these may be shared as a request sequence number. In particular, the addition of game balls and the counting of game balls are the opposite processes, so it is unlikely that both processes will occur at the same time. From this point of view, it is possible to reduce the amount of message data by sharing both serial numbers It is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new request is generated until the request sequence number reaches a predetermined upper limit value, the sequence number is updated based on the previously updated value. However, instead of such control, when all the processes corresponding to one request are completed, the request sequence number may be initialized to a predetermined initial value. For example, in the case of the example in FIG. 13, it is conceivable that the counting sequence number included in the last status information response indicating completion of counting is set to a predetermined initial value instead of m + 6.

  Request sequence numbers such as addition sequence numbers and count sequence numbers, and normal sequence numbers are not counted up one by one, but are updated (additional update, subtraction) according to a predetermined rule stored in both P unit 2 and CU3. Update, update by other arithmetic expressions). In this case, the serial number is not “sequential numbers” such as 1, 2, and 3, but data that is updated based on concepts such as A, B, and C.

  (2) When a slot machine (S units), which is an example of a gaming machine, is applied to the gaming system, for example, a game in which there are P reels and various sensor parts attached to the reels and a main control board that controls the reels. Corresponding to the board, the other configuration corresponds to the front frame of the P units. However, the various detection switches 41a, 701, and 33, the firing control board 31, and the firing motor 18 in the front frame shown in FIG.

  A conventional S unit is provided with a credit function. When this function is enabled, the credit is subtracted when the number of bets is set, and the credit is added when a winning occurs. However, there is an upper limit for credits, and when a winning occurs when the number of credits reaches the upper limit value, medals are paid out from the hopper.

  On the other hand, in the S units according to the present embodiment, game points are subtracted when the bet number is set, and game points are added when a winning occurs. Further, when the game points reach a predetermined number, a display for prompting a counting operation is made, and the gaming points are converted into points by performing the counting operation. For this reason, it is not necessary to pay out medals when the credit reaches the upper limit unlike the conventional S units. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a hopper on the S platform according to the present embodiment.

  As a result, the amusement hall does not need to secure a large number of medals, reducing the economic burden. The game arcade is also freed from operations such as replenishment / collection of medals and maintenance operations to deal with clogged medals. The player is relieved from the hassle of inserting medals for each betting operation after the credit is full, and can easily concentrate on the game.

  On the other hand, if S units become medalless, a player who has won a large number of medals will not be able to act to show off his arms by stacking boxes with medals beside the seat. Inconvenience arises. However, in this embodiment, since the function of displaying the dollar box is provided as described above, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience. In addition, it is desirable for the dollar box display in the case of S units to have a large number of medals loaded instead of a large number of balls.

  When S machines are applied as a gaming machine, each type of data is expressed as follows using two types of data, “Points” and “Game Points”, and “Credit” and “Credit Excess Points”. It is also possible to configure a gaming system that is converted. Note that these four types of data are displayed on the S displays 510 or 29S.

  First, when a conversion operation (lending operation, saving medal payout operation, point payout operation) from the remaining amount of a prepaid card, a saving medal, or a point is detected, each is withdrawn and converted into a game point. The

  A game point is data corresponding to a medal in a conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the number of game points on the display 510 or the display 29S, and to display the number of medal images corresponding to the game points. For example, when a pseudo-insertion medal operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) such that a player touches the medal image and inserts it into the slot machine is detected, the medal image disappears and the game points are subtracted. Instead, one bet is set. By performing such a pseudo medal insertion operation three times, the bet number is set to the maximum value of three.

  Thereafter, when a pseudo medal insertion operation is further detected, a credit is added in accordance with the detection. An upper limit value (for example, 50) is set for the credit, and when the credit exceeds the upper limit value, a credit excess point is added.

  The betting amount setting can be performed using the game points as described above, and can also be performed using credits. That is, if the one-sheet BET switch 5S is operated, 1 is added to the betting number setting value and 1 is subtracted from the credit. If the MAXBET switch 6S is operated, the bet number is set to 3, and the credit is subtracted according to the bet number setting.

  As a result of the game, when a winning occurs, a number of points corresponding to the winning is added to the credit. When a winning that exceeds the upper limit of credit occurs, the score for the excess is stored as a credit excess point. This credit excess point corresponds to a medal to be paid out when a winning occurs exceeding the upper limit of credit in the conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the credit excess points on the display 510 or the display 29S and to display the number of medal images corresponding to the credit excess points. Further, it is desirable to change the color of this medal image so that it can be distinguished from the medal image corresponding to the game point.

  Further, it is desirable that the credit excess points are converted into game points by the player's operation. For example, when a pseudo medal conversion operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) is performed such that the player touches the medal image corresponding to the credit excess point and converts it to a game point, the medal image disappears and the credit excess Points are subtracted and game points are added.

  Alternatively, if the credit becomes less than the upper limit value, the credit excess point may be automatically converted into credit.

  When the player performs a counting operation, each of the game points, credits, and credit excess points is counted and converted into points. As a result, the player's points are posted as “card possession number + game points + credits + credit excess points”. The “card possession number” is the number of points before conversion (the number of possessions currently owned by the player) that has not been converted into game points.

  In the above description, the four types of data of points, game points, credits, and credit excess points may be stored on both sides by exchanging data between the CU and S units. You may memorize | store only in the S stand side only by CU side. Further, the credit excess point may be a target for dollar box display.

  Moreover, although the example using a credit excess point was demonstrated in the above description, it is not necessary to use a credit excess point. In this case, when the credit limit is exceeded, it may be added to the game points.

  (3) In the present embodiment, game points are added by consuming card power. Alternatively, game points are added by consuming stored balls (stored medals). That is, the card frequency or the stored ball is converted into game points. On the other hand, the card power and the stored balls are not converted into points (count balls, count medals). However, the card power and the stored ball may be once converted into points.

  (4) In the present embodiment, game points are converted into points by counting operation. The conversion rate in this case is 1: 1. However, the conversion rate in the case of conversion may be other than 1: 1. For example, when 100 game points are converted, 97 points obtained by subtracting three of them may be converted into points. Or you may make it convert into the number of game balls obtained by multiplying a predetermined ratio of less than 100% with respect to a point.

  (5) The recording medium for recording the holding point in an identifiable manner may be one using a mobile terminal such as a smartphone. In this case, the communication unit for communicating with the mobile terminal is provided in the CU, and the CU recognizes the ID stored in the mobile terminal by holding the mobile terminal over the communication unit. The game is made possible by the procedure as described. On the other hand, at the end of the game, the portable terminal is again held over the communication unit, so that the score at the end of the game is added to the player's score through the ID.

  (6) The operation means for counting game points may be provided on the CU side. In this case, the operation means may be displayed on a touch panel, or may be constituted by a physical switch.

  (7) In the present embodiment, when an uncounted game point remains when a card return operation is performed, a message prompting for counting is displayed on the display of P units or the CU side. However, instead of such a configuration, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, the counting display is automatically started and the display on the P table or the CU side is used. It may be notified that automatic counting has started because there are still uncounted game points, or that, in addition, the card will be returned after completion of automatic counting.

  Alternatively, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, it is determined that there is a possibility that the player may leave the table temporarily, and the display (CU side or P stand side) You may display the message which confirms whether it is temporary leaving. Further, the display device may be constituted by a touch panel so that the player can input a response to the message. Furthermore, if the response input is the end of the game, a message prompting the counting operation is displayed. On the other hand, if the response input is temporarily away from the desk, the card may be temporarily ejected while the ID of the card is stored on the CU side, the P platform side, or both. Thereafter, when a card with the same ID is inserted, the game is resumed from the original state.

  (8) During the big hit, the judgment reference value for judging that the number of game balls is full may be increased. In other words, the determination reference value for the full tank determination may be different depending on whether or not the big hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of game balls from rapidly increasing during the big hit, and making a full tank determination immediately to stop firing.

  (9) The number of game balls when a big hit occurs is memorized. During the big hit, even if the criterion value for full tank is exceeded, the increased number of game balls allowed after the big hit has occurred If it is within a value (for example, 1000 balls), it is good also as what does not determine a full tank.

  (10) As the counting operation means for counting the game balls, one that exhibits a counting function when operated a predetermined number of times twice or more may be employed. As a result, erroneous operation can be prevented. Further, in this case, one function may be used to exhibit another function different from the counting function. For example, when there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second) after the operation is performed once, a function to turn on a lamp for calling a store clerk is exhibited, and within 1 second from 1 operation. When the second operation is detected, it is conceivable to perform the counting function.

  (11) “Predetermined processing” of “recording medium processing means for processing so that predetermined processing can be performed using the game point as the holding point when a predetermined recording medium processing operation is detected” , CU processing when using a card ejected from the CU inserted into another CU connected to another gaming machine (processing to withdraw the possessed ball that can be specified by the card and convert it into a gaming ball , Or shared ball processing, or wagon service processing). Alternatively, the “predetermined process” may be a process in which a prize is exchanged by receiving a card with a prize exchange machine for exchanging prizes and consuming the points specified by the card.

  Further, the above-described “recording medium processing operation for processing so that a predetermined process can be performed as a holding point” is, for example, a card return operation. In addition, the “predetermined process” is a process of recording a score so as to be specified on a card inserted in the CU when a card return operation is detected, and returning the card. Here, “recordably specified” means that the score is directly recorded on the card, and the card ID and score are recorded on the server connected to the CU without recording the score on the card. And a method of storing IDs and points in association with each other in the server.

  (12) If a counting operation is performed while the ball is being fired, the counting operation may be invalidated if the number of game balls at that time is equal to or less than a reference value. In addition, even when the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected during the ball firing exceeds the reference value, the number of balls counted in one counting operation is set to a predetermined number If the value obtained by subtracting the predetermined number from the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected is less than the reference value, the counting operation may be invalidated.

  Further, whether or not a game is in progress may be determined based on whether or not a ball launching operation has been detected, and the number of in-game balls (floating balls floating in the game area 27) becomes zero. Whether or not (not in game) or not (in game) may be determined. Further, it is conceivable to determine whether or not the game is in progress based on whether or not the variable display device is changing, whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not the attacker is open.

  Further, “in game” when S units are applied as a gaming machine and the counting operation during the game is invalidated is, for example, a period from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R to the stop. . Alternatively, it is a period from when the start operation is detected until the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped.

  (13) Referring to FIG. 13, the P platform is provided with a counting ball counter that temporarily stores the counted counting balls (held balls), but does not include a counter that stores the cumulative value of the counting balls. . However, a counting ball cumulative storage counter that stores the cumulative value of counting balls may be provided on the P platform side. In addition, the CU side is provided with an area for storing card holding balls (counting balls). If a holding ball is recorded on the inserted card itself, this area holds the card holding ball. The current number of players' balls, including balls, is stored. For this reason, only in this area, the number of counting balls counted by the player in the current game cannot be specified. Therefore, an area for storing the number of counting balls counted by the player in this game may be further provided on the CU side. In this case, the CU adds balls to the area based on the information on the number of balls that are sent from the P cars after the game starts, and when the balls are converted into game balls, Subtract the holding ball.

  (14) The display for prompting the counting operation in FIG. 15 may be a display of “Please count because there are game balls left” in the text, or display the count button 28 on the screen and blink. Such a display may be used. In addition, the P stand 2 that has received the card return preparation state ON may display the game balls on the game ball number display 29 in a blinking manner, or when the game ball number display 29 is configured by an image display device. Alternatively, the message described as the above embodiment may be displayed on the game ball number display 29 to prompt the counting operation.

  (15) In order to change the number of game points to be converted in one operation according to the time for which the count button is kept pressed, for example, when a long press (for example, continuous operation for 1 second or more), While all are counted, only 200 balls may be counted in a short press (for example, continuous operation for less than 1 second). However, in this case, when the remaining number of game balls is small, for example, when it is less than 200 balls, it is desirable that all game balls are counted by operating the counting button.

  (16) Depending on the remaining number of game points, when the number of points counted by one short press operation of the counting button is different, for example, the following may be considered. For example, when the number of game points is less than 200, all the game points are counted by one short press operation of the counting button. When the game points are 200 or more and less than 1000, 200 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 1000 or more and less than 5000, 1000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 5000 or more and less than 10,000, 2000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the number of game points is 10,000 or more, 2500 points are counted by one short press operation. The above numerical values are specific examples and can be set as appropriate.

  (17) When counting the game balls (game points) and converting the points, not only the count display but also the control to output the counting sound from the speaker 270 may be performed. In addition, when counting the game points, it is conceivable to display an image in which balls are dropped one by one from the ball storage tray to the counter.

  (18) Timing for performing conversion display (display indicating that game balls are counted and the number of balls is increased) based on the counting operation and subtracting game points on the data The timing for adding the points can be varied. The calculation may be executed after the conversion display is completed. For this purpose, count data may be transmitted from the gaming machine to the CU after the conversion display is completed. It should be noted that such a modification can be similarly applied to the case where the points are converted into game points.

  (19) In the present embodiment, in the communication between the CU and the gaming machine, a command-response method is adopted in which the CU is the primary station and the gaming machine is the secondary station. The relationship between and may be reversed. Alternatively, instead of adopting such a communication system having a master-slave relationship, a system may be employed in which both send data to the other party when a request to communicate occurs.

  (20) In this embodiment, game balls (game points) are stored on both the gaming machine side and the CU side. However, game balls (game points) are stored only on the game machine side, and the CU side. Then, it may not be stored. On the other hand, the card holding balls (scoring points) are stored only on the CU side, but may also be stored on the gaming machine side. In particular, game balls (game points) are stored only on the gaming machine side, while card holding balls (points) are stored only on the CU side to clarify the division of data storage management. Good.

  (21) The counting display and various notifications performed on the display 54 may be performed on the display 312 in the same manner.

  (22) In CU3, the number of game balls stored is updated based on the value of the addition ball counter (addition ball count) and the value of the subtraction ball counter (subtraction ball count) transmitted from the P platform side. When the number of game balls stored is subtracted based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P platform side, if the value of the number of game balls becomes negative, an error (abnormal) determination is made. Then, error processing may be performed. As a specific example of error processing, error notification is performed by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or hall server 801 (in this case, for hall use). Error notification may be performed by the management computer or hall server 801).

  (23) When a lending operation or a conversion operation (lending operation) from a holding point (holding ball) to a gaming point (game ball) is detected, the gaming points may be counted up one by one. In order to shorten the waiting time of the player, a display may be made so that a plurality of points (for example, 25 points equivalent to 100 yen) are counted up. Conversely, when a game point counting operation is executed, a display may be made so that the points are counted up by a plurality of points. Furthermore, the number of units for counting up and displaying game points or points may be set from a plurality of types. In the setting, it is conceivable to use a touch panel of P or S display devices.

  (24) A touch sensor may be provided on the hitting operation handle, and the counting operation may be invalidated while the player is grasping the hitting operation handle. Invalidating the counting operation means detecting the counting operation but not executing the counting operation based on the detection output, or not detecting the counting operation itself. Or, if the player does not invalidate the counting operation only by touching the hitting operation handle, and if the counting operation is disabled if the hitting operation handle is turned to such an extent that the ball firing drive pulse is output. Good.

  In these cases, when a counting operation is detected, a message “Please release handle” may be displayed on the display of the gaming machine or CU. Alternatively, when the counting operation button is displayed as an icon on the touch panel screen, the counting operation button may be grayed out to notify the player that the operation is impossible.

  (25) At least one or all of the ball lending button, the card return button, the replay button, and the counting button may be provided on the gaming machine side, or may be provided on the CU side. Further, it is conceivable that the button is displayed on the display device on the gaming machine side or the CU side described as the touch panel type display device.

  (26) The gaming system according to the present embodiment includes a point use operation means for executing a predetermined point use process using points. Here, the predetermined score use processing includes processing for executing the wagon service, or processing for dividing and sharing the score (held ball) (processing for dividing and transferring the score to another person). It is a concept. The holding point use operation means is, for example, a touch panel. Alternatively, the point use operation means may be a remote controller that is given to a clerk of the game store to instruct the CU or the gaming machine to execute the point use processing.

  (27) The sequence control shown in FIGS. 8 to 28 is not limited to a transmission / reception sequence between control devices in a single gaming machine such as CU3, P stand 2, S stand 2S, etc. For example, CU3, P You may apply to the transmission / reception sequence between several game machines, such as the stand 2, a jet counter, and a POS terminal. 31 and 32 are applied between the CU control unit 323 inside the CU 3 and the security chip (SC) 325b, and between the security chip (SC) 325b and the communication control IC 325a. May be.

  For example, when processing related to a game ball addition request is applied between the CU control unit 323 and the security chip (SC) 325b, the CU control unit 323 transmits a game ball addition request message, and consent to this is transmitted. Alternatively, the SC 325b returns a rejection message via the communication control IC 325a based on the response on the P platform 2 side.

  When processing related to a game ball addition request is applied between the security chip (SC) 325b and the communication control IC 325a, the security chip (SC) 325b transmits a game ball addition request message via the CU control unit 323. Then, the communication control IC 325a returns an approval or rejection message for this based on the response on the P platform 2 side.

  When the processing related to the counting request is applied between the CU control unit 323 and the security chip (SC) 325b, the counting request message is sent from the SC 325b to the CU control unit via the communication control IC 325a based on the request on the P unit 2 side. The CU control unit 323 returns an approval or rejection message for the transmission.

  When the processing related to the counting request is applied between the security chip (SC) 325b and the communication control IC 325a, the communication control IC 325a transmits a counting request message based on the request on the P base 2 side, The security chip (SC) 325b returns a rejection message based on an instruction from the CU control unit 323.

  (28) In the above-described embodiment, the identity of the player is determined based on the card ID, but instead of or in addition to that, the identity of the player is determined based on the player's fingerprint, retina and other biomass. A determination may be made.

  (29) In the above-described embodiment, the score transmitted from the gaming machine on condition that the card ID matches the insertion time is stored as the current score by the CU. Control is made so that the score transmitted from the gaming machine is stored as the current score as a further condition that the communication has been started until a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has passed since the communication was interrupted. May be. Specifically, a timer for measuring a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) after communication between the gaming machine and CU3 is interrupted is provided in the CU control unit 323 at the start of communication between the gaming machine and CU3 (at the time of recovery). It is determined whether or not the timer is still timed (in a state where time is not up), and on the further condition that it is a result of determination that the timer is timed, the score sent from the gaming machine is the current value of the CU. It controls to memorize as a score.

  Further, instead of the insertion time, the CU may store the score transmitted from the gaming machine on condition that the last serial number used between the CU 3 and the P stand 2 matches, as the current score. .

  (30) In the above-described embodiment, the number of game balls and game points are directly added by the occurrence of a win, but instead, the points are added by the occurrence of a win, and the added points are added. It may be controlled to withdraw and add the number of game balls or game points.

  (31) In the above-described embodiment, when the value is withdrawn within the range of the valuable value owned by the player (prepaid balance, holding balls, savings) and the corresponding game points are added, the value withdrawn. However, instead, for example, it may be controlled to add game points that are smaller by the amount equivalent to the consumption tax with respect to the value actually withdrawn.

  (32) In this embodiment, the key management server is installed in the key management center that is remote from the game arcade. However, the key management server may be installed in the game hall. Thereby, compared with the case where a key management server is installed outside the game hall, it is easier to speed up communication between the CU and the key management server, and the occurrence rate of communication failures can be reduced.

  (33) The CU control unit 323 receives board security information (including board authentication key and update information) from the key management server 800 via the hall server 801. However, instead of this, the board security information is transmitted from the key management server 800 to the CU control unit 323 without using the hall server 801 between the key management server 800 and the CU control unit 323. For example, it is conceivable that the key management server 800 and the CU are directly connected to each other, or a relay communication device different from the hall server 801 is provided between the key management server 800 and each CU.

  (34) In the above embodiment, the number of balls automatically counted based on the game interruption operation (simple leaving operation or meal break operation) is temporarily added to the holding ball and written to the card. By doing so, the player who interrupted the game returns, then inserts the card into the original CU 3 again, and converts the holding ball into a game ball 125 by game ball. Shown what can be converted to play games. However, instead, the counting ball automatically counted at the time of the interruption operation is stored by the CU 3 as a custody ball different from the gaming ball and the holding ball (also storing the C-ID and the insertion time), and the holding ball is not added. Discontinue processing by ejecting the card without recording the ball. When the discharge card is reinserted, all the custody balls may be automatically converted into P game balls at once and control may be performed. Alternatively, the custody balls in this case are transmitted from the P platform to the CU based on the interruption operation, stored on the CU side or the hall server side, and automatically from the CU or the hall server when the card is inserted again. It is also possible that information on the custody ball is transmitted to the P platform side and stored as a game ball on the P platform side. Further, in this case, when the information on the custody balls is transmitted, it may be transmitted from the CU to the P units as a game ball addition command.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, when the number of counting balls automatically counted based on the interruption operation is added to the holding ball and written to the card and then discharged, the interruption flag is recorded on the card. So that you can't exchange prizes with that card. As a method for prohibiting the exchange of prizes as described above, it is also possible to adopt the following method other than using the suspended flag of the card.

  First, when an interruption operation is performed, the information (including the card ID) is transmitted from the CU to the hall server, and the card of the player suspended on the hall server side is stored as an interruption card. At the time of prize exchange, an inquiry is made to the hall server from POS or the like, and the hall server determines whether or not the card used for prize exchange is an interruption card. Alternatively, all interruption card information may be transmitted from the hall server to the POS side in advance. In addition, if the card used for the exchange of the prize is an interrupted card, the exchange of the prize using the card is prohibited.

  (35) In the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine determines that the gaming device (CU) is given the game points as the holding points on the condition that the conversion process for all game points is completed (game points = 0). (Processing that accepts a card with a prize exchange machine and consumes the points specified by the card and enables prize exchange, and inserts a card discharged from the CU into another CU connected to another gaming machine. A validating means for validating the recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the card return button 322)) for performing the processing of the CU when used in the same manner.

  (36) In the present embodiment, as an example of the game information, the description has been given by taking the ball number, the game ball, the remaining amount of the card, the storage ball, the number of balls information and the game table information. However, the game information includes other information related to the game on the gaming machine. For example, when a player's favorite character selected or customized by the player can be displayed on variable display means (variable display device) such as the variable display device 278 or the display device 54, information that can specify the character Is also included in the game information. Information on the screen design including the character that matches the player's preference is transmitted to the server at the end of the game in association with the player's card ID and stored, for example, when starting a new game. You may make it download from a server to CU or P stand.

  (37) In the game ball number display 29, a display is made in which the number of balls is decreased one by one in conjunction with the ball firing or counting operation. In addition, the game ball number display 29 displays such that the number of balls increases by one or a predetermined number of units according to a ball lending operation or the like. When the game ball number display 29 is constituted by an image display such as a liquid crystal display device, the number of game balls is not simply displayed digitally, but whether the change in the number of game balls is due to a ball or not is counted. Whether it is due to winning, winning a prize, due to savings, or due to a lending operation, an image according to the type is displayed along with the display update of the number of game balls You may make it do.

  In addition, when the counting operation is performed, the game ball number display 29 performs counting display in conjunction with the counting operation, but when the game ball number display 29 is configured by an image display such as a liquid crystal display device. In the same manner as the display 54, the number of game balls may be counted and the number thereof may be decreased, while an image display in which the number of holding balls is increased may be performed. In this case, as described above as a modification of the display of the display unit 54, the display of the number of game balls converted to the number of balls data over time (for example, a bar graph display), the current The number of game balls and the number of balls are digitally displayed as they are, and the number of balls is increased while decreasing the number of balls, or the display of moving a part of the number of balls to the number of balls is repeated. It is possible.

  (38) As shown in FIG. 15, in the above embodiment, the card return operation detected in the state where the game balls remain is counted by detecting the counting operation in a predetermined waiting period. It is activated after completion and shifts to card return processing.

  On the other hand, as a process in the case where the counting operation is not detected even after the standby period elapses, for example, the previous card return operation may be invalidated. In this case, since the counting operation is not detected even when the standby period elapses, the display on the CU3 or P table 2 side may display that the card return operation has been invalidated.

  Alternatively, the card return operation detected with the game balls remaining may be invalidated regardless of whether the counting operation is detected in a predetermined waiting period. In this case, the card return process may be executed again by executing the card return operation after counting all the game balls in accordance with the counting operation after the card return operation is detected. Alternatively, when the counting of all game balls is completed, or before and after that, a display for prompting a card return operation may be performed on the display on the CU 3 or P stand 2 side.

  In the present embodiment, if even one game ball remains when a card return operation is detected, the process shown in FIG. 15 is executed. However, the processing shown in FIG. 15 may be executed when the number of game balls remaining when the card return operation is detected is a predetermined number of two or more.

  Further, in the counting operation after the card return operation is detected, the counting display speed of the game balls may be made faster than usual. For example, in a normal counting operation, a display in which game balls are counted one by one is displayed, while in a counting operation after a card return operation is detected, a display in which a plurality of game balls are counted together, or for all games It is conceivable to display such that balls are counted together.

  Further, in the counting operation after the card return operation is detected, not all game balls are counted, but a larger number of game balls than the normal counting operation are counted. It is good. For example, normally, a maximum of 100 game balls are counted as one counting operation, but in a counting operation after a card return operation is detected, a larger number of 200 gaming balls are counted. You may be made to do. Even in this case, when there is a card return operation in advance, the number of counting operations for counting all game balls is reduced compared to when there is no card return operation, and counting of all game balls is completed early. Can do.

  Also, if a card return operation is detected with game balls remaining, even if no counting operation is detected, start counting all game balls, and then proceed to card return processing. Also good. In this case, when counting of all game balls is started, the fact that counting of all game balls is started may be displayed on the P stand 2 or CU3. Alternatively, a message for confirming whether or not the counting of all game balls may be started is displayed, and a predetermined operation (for example, an operation on the touch panel of P stand 2 or CU 3 or a card return operation again) is detected. It is also possible to start counting all game balls on the condition.

  In addition, the card return operation detected during the game (during ball launching) may be invalidated, but the card return operation is not invalidated, and the counting operation during the game is performed on the P platform side. The counting process based on the above may be invalidated.

  Furthermore, in the said embodiment, CU3 determines whether the number of game balls is 0, when card return operation is detected. However, such a determination may be made by the P base 2. In this case, for example, when a card return operation is detected, data indicating the presence of the card return operation is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2, and the number of game balls stored by the P stand 2 itself is 0. It is determined whether or not. If it is 0, the number of game balls is 0 or data allowing card return is transmitted to CU3, while if it is not 0, the number of game balls is not 0, card return standby or card return prohibition is prohibited. The indicated data is transmitted to CU3.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when operation of a count button is detected, the P stand 2 determines whether card return operation is detected before the detection of the operation. However, such determination means may be provided in the CU3. In this case, for example, when the operation of the counting button is detected, the P base 2 transmits data indicating that to the CU 3. The CU 3 receiving it can be considered to determine whether or not there has been a card return operation within a predetermined period before receiving the data.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the P table 2 detects the counting operation, while the CU 3 detects the card return operation, but the CU 3 detects the counting operation, while the P table 2 detects the card returning operation. Alternatively, both the operations may be detected by the P stand 2 or the CU 3. In addition, both the counting button and the card card return button may be attached to the CU 3 or the P stand 2, and one may be the CU 3 or the P stand 2.

  (39) The presence or absence of a change in the number of holding balls or game balls is checked on the CU or P stand. If the number of holding balls or game balls does not change for a predetermined period, the fact is notified on the CU or P stand. You may do it. Alternatively, a notification signal may be output to an external device (a hall computer, a calling lamp on the P platform). This makes it easier for the store clerk to grasp, for example, a table that has been abandoned while the remaining few balls are left unattended.

  (40) Alternatively, when a player's game ball changes even though the card is not inserted into the CU, the fact may be notified by the CU or P platform. Alternatively, a notification signal may be output to an external device (a hall computer, a calling lamp on the P platform). Thereby, for example, after the game is finished and the card is discharged, it becomes easy for the store clerk to grasp the stand where the ball caught on the game board wins and the game ball is left as it is paid out.

  (41) In the present embodiment, the CU 3 compares and determines the previous game table information and the latest game table information from the P table 2 with the data stored on its own, and the data on the P table 2 side is not improperly flooded. Confirm that the data is correct. If an error determination is made on the CU3 side, such a situation is simply due to the exchange of CU3 (regular data to be compared is not stored in the CU3 after the exchange), and this is based on fraud. Since there is a possibility that it is not a thing, the store clerk confirms the error and cancels the error with a portable terminal device such as a remote control. However, when the CU 3 is replaced with a new one in this way, the CU 3 may not perform the above error determination at all. Alternatively, the above error determination function may not be provided in the CU 3 regardless of whether or not it has been replaced.

  (42) In the present embodiment, a card, which is a recording medium capable of specifying the valuable value owned by the player, is inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309 at the start of the game, and is removed from the card insertion / discharge port 309 after the game ends. The configuration has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the card may be placed on the card reading unit at the start of the game and removed from the card reading unit after the game ends. In other words, the recording medium receiving means for receiving the recording medium capable of specifying the valuable value owned by the player may be attached to the recording medium receiving means at the start of the game and removed from the recording medium receiving means after the game ends.

  (43) In the present embodiment, the CU 3 notifies the P stand 2 of the information waiting for card removal, and the P display 2 that has received the notification of the information indicates that “please remove the card”. The configuration for notifying the card removal such as displaying on the card has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CU 3 displays “Please remove card” on the display 54 and / or the display 312 while notifying the P stand 2 of information waiting for card removal. It may be configured to notify the card removal on the CU side.

  (44) In the present embodiment, the P stand 2 waits until the card information waiting command including the card removal waiting state = ON until receiving the state information request command including the card waiting waiting state = OFF. The configuration for continuing the notification of sampling has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the P stand 2 is waiting for card removal = after receiving a status information request command including ON, even if a card removal notification is given for a certain period of time, it is still waiting for card removal = The card removal notification may be intermittently performed after the status information request command including ON is received until the status information request command including OFF is received = OFF.

  (45) In the present embodiment, the P stand 2 receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3 when the card is received and communication is restored, and the P stand The configuration has been described in which the “store code” and “SC board ID” held in 2 are determined to match, the recovery process is performed if they match, and the game is prohibited from continuing if they do not match. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the P stand 2 determines whether the “store code” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3 matches the “store code” held in the P stand 2 or The “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3 and the “SC board ID” held in the P platform 2 are determined to match, and if they match, recovery processing is performed and a mismatch is detected. In this case, it may be configured to prohibit the continuation of the game.

  (46) In this embodiment, since the loop-shaped power line 500 is also wired (power line 500a) in the main control board 16, the connecting portion between the power line 500 of the game board 26 and the power line 500a of the main control board 16 is An example (see FIG. 63 (a)) that functions as main control connection detection means and can detect electrical connection between the game board 26 and the main control board 16 is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the loop-shaped power line 500 may also be provided in the main control semiconductor chip 16 a of the main control unit 161 provided on the main control board 16. Thereby, replacement of the main control semiconductor chip 16a can also be detected.

  (47) In this embodiment, since the loop-shaped power line 500 is also wired in the payout control board 17, the connection portion between the front frame 5 and the payout control board 17 functions as a payout control connection detection unit. An example (see FIG. 63A) in which the electrical connection between the frame 5 and the payout control board 17 can be detected is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the loop-shaped power line 500 may also be wired in the payout control semiconductor chip 17 a of the payout control unit 171 provided on the payout control board 17. Thereby, replacement of the payout control semiconductor chip 17a can also be detected. Here, the payout control board 17, the payout control unit 171, the payout control semiconductor chip 17a, and the like are included in the payout control means.

  (48) In the present embodiment, any of the entities that perform the above-described totalization processing, firing intensity correction processing, firing abnormality determination processing, driving area identification processing, and measurement processing can directly receive signals from the P base 2 However, the subject that performs these processes is not limited to CU3.

  For example, if necessary, a main body that performs all or a part of these processes, a hall control 900 that can indirectly acquire a signal from the P stand 2 via a stand terminal or an island terminal, a hall server 801, Alternatively, the central management apparatus 1000 may be used. For example, the hall control 900 may directly perform the counting process (flow in FIG. 71) for each gaming machine.

  Further, if necessary, a main body that performs all or part of these processes may be a calling lamp (not shown) provided for each P base 2. A call lamp is provided for each gaming machine, and has a function of calling a staff member of a game hall by operating a button by a player and a function of displaying a game history such as the number of jackpots and the number of fluctuations between jackpots. It is.

  (49) Moreover, you may make it attach an IC tag to a pachinko ball. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify which pachinko ball is at the time of launch and at the time of passing through any one of the winning areas (winning entrance or gate). For this reason, in the counting process, it is possible to identify the correspondence relationship between the firing intensity T of the same pachinko ball identified by the IC tag and the passing area. As a result, it is possible to more accurately determine which region the pachinko ball tends to pass according to the launch intensity.

  (50) If the hitting operation handle 25 is fixed by a player, the above-described firing intensity correction process cannot be performed. Therefore, it may be detected and notified that the hitting operation handle 25 is fixed. Further, when the firing strength is stable at a constant value, it may be determined that the hitting operation handle 25 is fixed.

  (51) For example, whether or not the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25 can be detected by a touch sensor.

  Therefore, for example, when it is detected that the player is not touching the hitting ball operating handle 25, the above-described firing intensity correction processing may be performed.

  Further, in the firing abnormality determination process, when it is detected that the player does not touch the hitting operation handle 25 and it is detected that the hitting operation handle 25 is fixed, it is determined that there is a launching abnormality. It may be.

  (52) In this embodiment, the hall control 900 acquires the information of the P base 2 via the CU 3. However, the hall control 900 directly receives the information of the P base 2 from the P base 2 without passing through the CU 3. The structure which acquires may be sufficient.

(53) When the payout control unit 171 receives a value (= 63) in which the round flag is raised, the abnormality control process is executed by adopting one or two or more of those listed in the following a to c You may control as follows.
a Display device of P stand 2 (for example, a variable display device variably displaying 7-segment display 50 and identification information (design)) by the payout control portion 171 or the main control portion 161 receiving the abnormality information from the payout control portion 171 Is displayed.
b CU3 that receives the abnormality information from the payout control unit 171 performs abnormality notification such as an error number.
c An abnormality notification such as an error number is given in a host device such as a hall management computer that has received the abnormality information from the CU 3.

  (54) In this embodiment, when the card insertion notification command is received while the state of the CU 3 is the card insertion state, the P base 2 transmits only a response without backing up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. Explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a card insertion notification command is received while the state of the CU 3 is in the card insertion state, a warning is displayed on the display 54 or the like, or notification is given to the host server. May also be notified.

  (55) In this embodiment, when “Closed” is set, for a gaming machine in which no card is inserted and a game ball remains in the P stand 2, card ID = 0 and card insertion time = 0. The configuration is described in which a counting process is performed in which it is assumed that a virtual card is inserted, and the remaining game balls are counted, stored in the card, and returned. However, the present invention is not limited to this, the card ID of the virtual card that is considered to be inserted is counted as the card ID of the card that was inserted immediately before closing, and the remaining game balls are inserted immediately before closing. The configuration may be such that it automatically associates with the card that has been stored.

  (56) In the present embodiment, when the recovery request 2 command is transmitted to the P unit 2 even though it is determined that the recovery request is not required by the CU 3, the P unit 2 determines the recovery process again. A configuration has been described in which processing NG is notified to the CU 3 when no operation is required. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is unnecessary to perform recovery processing determination again on the P platform 2, a warning is displayed on the display 54 or the like, or a notification to that effect is sent to the host server. You may do it.

  (57) In this embodiment, even if the key management server 800 transmits a health check request command and does not reach the CU control unit 323, for example, for 10 days, it is determined that the health check request time limit is exceeded, The configuration in which the timed operation function of the CU 3 or the P stand 2 is invalidated has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of days until the timed operation function of the CU 3 or P unit 2 is invalidated is displayed on the display unit 54, or the timed operation function having a plurality of restriction levels is stepwise. It may be invalidated.

  (58) In the present embodiment, the setting and canceling control of the alarm setting has been described in relation to the alarm setting based on the injustice for the P unit 2 and the alarm setting based on the disconnection of the P unit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to alarm setting setting and release control in the relationship between the alarm setting based on fraud for the P base 2 and another alarm setting based on another fraud for the P base 2. In addition, in three or more relationships between the alarm setting based on a plurality of frauds on the P unit 2 and the alarm setting based on the disconnection of the P unit, the alarm setting may be applied to the setting and release control.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  2 Pachinko machine, 2S slot machine, 3 card unit, 16 main control board, 17 payout control board, 26 game board, 54, 312 display, 309 card insertion / discharge port, 319 replay button, 320 IR light receiving unit, 321 Lending button, 322 return button, 161 main control unit, 325 display control unit, 171 payout control unit, 323 CU control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming system comprising a gaming device that enables a game using a gaming value owned by a player, and a gaming machine that is communicably connected to the gaming device,
The gaming device is:
A notification setting means for performing notification setting including notification of fraud to the gaming machine and fraud notification setting for performing notification that communication with the gaming machine is impossible;
Notification means for performing notification based on the notification setting by the notification setting means;
Cancellation setting means for canceling the notification setting set by the notification setting means,
The gaming machine is
A request notification means for notifying a setting request for requesting the gaming device to perform the fraud notification setting and a release request for requesting the gaming device to cancel the fraud notification setting;
The release setting means includes
The unauthorized notification setting can be canceled when a cancellation request is notified from the gaming machine after the unauthorized notification setting is performed by the notification setting means in response to the notification of the setting request from the gaming machine. ,
A gaming system capable of canceling the fraud notification setting by assuming that a cancellation request has been notified when communication with the gaming machine is disabled after the fraud notification setting is performed by the notification setting means.